2013 Fusion

User Manual: 2013-fusion

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 449 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2012
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 20120706212512
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
Introduction
About This Manual...........................................7
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9
California Proposition 65..............................11
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Ford Credit..........................................................11
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................11
Special Notices................................................12
Mobile Communications
Equipment.....................................................12
Export Unique Options..................................13
Child Safety
General Information.......................................14
Child Seat Positioning...................................16
Booster Seats....................................................17
Installing Child Seats.....................................19
Child Safety Locks..........................................25
Safety Belts
Principle of Operation..................................26
Fastening the Safety Belts..........................27
Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................29
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime.............................................................30
Safety Belt Minder.........................................30
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance................................................32
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™..........................33
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation..................................34
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................35
Knee Airbag......................................................36
Front Passenger Sensing System............36
Side Airbags.....................................................39
Side Curtain Airbags.....................................40
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.........41
Airbag Disposal...............................................42
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies..................................................43
Remote Control..............................................43
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control...........................................................48
MyKey®
Principle of Operation..................................49
Creating a MyKey...........................................49
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................50
Checking MyKey System Status..............50
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems.........................................................50
MyKey Troubleshooting................................51
Locks
Locking and Unlocking.................................52
Keyless Entry....................................................55
Interior Luggage Compartment
Release..........................................................58
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System........................59
Anti-Theft Alarm.............................................61
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................62
Audio Control...................................................62
Voice Control...................................................63
Cruise Control..................................................63
Information Display Control.......................63
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers........................................65
1
Table of Contents
Information Provided by:
Autowipers.......................................................65
Windshield Washers.....................................66
Lighting
Lighting Control..............................................67
Autolamps........................................................67
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................68
Headlamp Exit Delay....................................68
Daytime Running Lamps............................68
Automatic High Beam Control.................69
Front Fog Lamps............................................70
Direction Indicators.......................................70
Interior Lamps.................................................70
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows..............................................72
Exterior Mirrors.................................................73
Interior Mirror....................................................74
Sun Visors..........................................................75
Moonroof...........................................................75
Instrument Cluster
Gauges................................................................77
Warning Lamps and Indicators.................79
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............82
Information Displays
General Information......................................83
Information Messages..................................91
Audio System
General Information....................................106
Audio unit - Vehicles With:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC/Satellite
Radio.............................................................107
Audio unit - Vehicles With: Premium
AM/FM/CD.................................................109
Audio unit - Vehicles With: Sony
AM/FM/CD..................................................110
Auxiliary Input Jack.......................................114
USB Port...........................................................114
Media Hub........................................................115
Satellite Radio................................................115
Climate Control
Manual Climate Control.............................118
Automatic Climate Control.......................119
Automatic Climate Control........................121
Automatic Climate Control.......................123
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate.........................................................124
Heated Windows and Mirrors..................126
Cabin Air Filter................................................127
Remote Start..................................................127
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position..................129
Head Restraints.............................................129
Manual Seats..................................................131
Power Seats.....................................................131
Memory Function..........................................132
Rear Seats.......................................................134
Heated Seats..................................................134
Rear Seat Armrest........................................135
Universal Garage Door
Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener...............136
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points...............................140
Storage Compartments
Center Console..............................................142
Overhead Console........................................142
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information....................................143
Ignition Switch...............................................143
2
Table of Contents
Information Provided by:
Keyless Starting............................................143
Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................145
Engine Block Heater....................................146
Unique Driving Character-
istics
Start-Stop.......................................................148
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions......................................150
Fuel Quality......................................................151
Refueling...........................................................151
Running Out of Fuel.....................................152
Fuel Consumption........................................154
Emission Control System..........................154
Transmission
Manual Transmission..................................157
Automatic Transmission...........................158
Hill Start Assist...............................................161
All-Wheel Drive
Using All-Wheel Drive.................................163
Brakes
General Information....................................168
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes...........................................................168
Electric Parking Brake.................................169
Traction Control
Principle of Operation.................................172
Using Traction Control................................172
Stability Control
Principle of Operation.................................173
Using Stability Control................................173
Parking Aids
Parking Aid......................................................174
Active Park Assist.........................................176
Rear View Camera........................................179
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation.................................183
Using Cruise Control....................................183
Using Adaptive Cruise Control................184
Driving Aids
Driver Alert......................................................190
Lane Keeping System.................................193
Blind Spot Monitor.......................................196
Steering............................................................201
Load Carrying
Load Limit.......................................................202
Towing
Towing a Trailer.............................................210
Recommended Towing Weights............210
Essential Towing Checks...........................212
Transporting the Vehicle............................214
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......214
Driving Hints
Breaking-In......................................................216
Economical Driving......................................216
Driving Through Water................................216
Floor Mats........................................................217
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need................219
In California (U.S. Only)............................220
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).......................221
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................221
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada........................................................222
3
Table of Contents
Information Provided by:
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................223
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only).............................................................223
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only).............................................................224
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance..................................225
Hazard Warning Flashers..........................226
Fuel Cut-Off Switch....................................226
Jump-Starting the Vehicle.......................226
Fuses
Changing a Fuse...........................................229
Fuse Specification Chart..........................229
Maintenance
General Information...................................239
Opening and Closing the Hood..............239
Under Hood Overview - 1.6L
EcoBoost®................................................240
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
EcoBoost®..................................................241
Under Hood Overview - 2.5L...................242
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L
EcoBoost®.................................................243
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.5L/2.0L
EcoBoost®.................................................243
Engine Oil Check - 2.5L/1.6L
EcoBoost®/2.0L EcoBoost®..............243
Engine Coolant Check - 2.5L/1.6L
EcoBoost®/2.0L EcoBoost®..............244
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check............................................................247
Brake Fluid Check........................................247
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................247
Fuel Filter........................................................248
Washer Fluid Check....................................248
Changing the 12V Battery.........................248
Checking the Wiper Blades.....................249
Changing the Wiper Blades.....................249
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 2.5L/1.6L
EcoBoost®/2.0L EcoBoost®.............250
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................251
Removing a Headlamp..............................252
Changing a Bulb...........................................252
Bulb Specification Chart...........................253
Vehicle Care
General Information...................................255
Cleaning Products.......................................255
Cleaning the Exterior..................................255
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............256
Waxing.............................................................256
Cleaning the Engine....................................256
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades..........................................................257
Cleaning the Interior....................................257
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.......................258
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................258
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................259
Vehicle Storage............................................259
Wheels and Tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........262
Tire Care..........................................................265
Using Snow Chains....................................280
Changing a Road Wheel...........................280
Technical Specifications...........................284
Capacities and Specific-
ations
Engine Specifications................................286
Motorcraft Parts..........................................286
Vehicle Identification Number...............288
Vehicle Certification Label.......................288
Transmission Code Designation............289
Technical Specifications..........................290
4
Table of Contents
Information Provided by:
Accessories
Accessories....................................................293
Ford Extended Service Plan
(ESP)
Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP).......295
SYNC®
General Information...................................298
Using Voice Recognition..........................300
Using SYNC® With Your Phone.............302
SYNC® Applications and Services........314
Using SYNC® With Your Media
Player.............................................................321
SYNC® Troubleshooting..........................328
MyFord Touch®
General Information...................................335
Settings............................................................347
Entertainment..............................................356
Phone...............................................................376
Information....................................................382
Climate.............................................................391
Navigation......................................................395
Appendices
End User License Agreement.................404
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance..........................420
5
Table of Contents
Information Provided by:
6
Information Provided by:
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about it,
the greater the safety and pleasure you
will get from driving it.
WARNING
Always drive with due care and
attention when using and operating
the controls and features on your
vehicle.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range, sometimes even before they are
generally available. It may describe options
not fitted to your vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may be used for different models,
so may appear different to your vehicle.
However, the essential information in the
illustrations is always correct.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of the
vehicle.
Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
7
Introduction
Information Provided by:
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten safety belt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
E91392
Heated windshield
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
Stability control
8
Introduction
Information Provided by:
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada, and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle
when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, when your vehicle is in for
service or repair, Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada, and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
data for vehicle improvement purposes.
For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose
to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report,
you consent that certain diagnostic
information may also be accessed
electronically by Ford Motor Company and
Ford authorized service facilities, and that
the diagnostic information may be used
for any purpose. See SYNC® (page 298).
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle;
this data will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The event data recorder is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
•Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
•How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
the brake pedal; and
•How fast the vehicle was travelling;
and
•Where the driver was positioning
the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
9
Introduction
Information Provided by:
Note: Event data recorder data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the event data recorder
under normal driving conditions and no
personal data or information (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is
recorded (see limitations regarding 911
Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the event data recorder.
Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order
or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other
third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to
access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any
law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
applies to SYNC or its features, please
note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
may, through any paired and connected
cell phone, disclose to emergency
services that the vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
may also be capable of being used to
electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other
details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the
occupants to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose
this information, do not activate the 911
Assist feature. See SYNC® (page 298).
Additionally, when you connect to
Traffic, Directions and Information (if
equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
location, travel direction, and speed
(“vehicle travel information”), only to
help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches
that you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the
service. Ford Motor Company and the
vendors it uses to provide you with this
information do not store your vehicle
travel information. For more
information, see Traffic, Directions and
Information, Terms and Conditions.
See SYNC® (page 298).
10
Introduction
Information Provided by:
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Some constituents of engine
exhaust, certain vehicle components,
certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, safety belt
pretensioners and remote control batteries
may contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. For more information
vist:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
FORD CREDIT
(U.S. Only)
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
For your convenience we offer a number
of ways to contact us, as well as help
manage your account.
Phone: 1-800-727-7000
For more information regarding Ford Credit,
as well as access Account Manager, please
go to www.fordcredit.com.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish,
structural integrity, corrosion protection
and dent resistance. During vehicle
development we validate these parts
deliver the intended level of protection as
a whole system. A great way to know for
sure you are getting this level of protection
is to use genuine Ford replacement
collision parts.
11
Introduction
Information Provided by:
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be
covered by the Ford Warranty. For
additional information, refer to the terms
and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered and what is not covered by your
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
refer to the Warranty Manual that is
provided to you along with your Owner’s
Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
Failure to follow the specific
warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury. See
Supplementary Restraints System
(page 34).
Front seat mounted rear-facing child
or infant seats should NEVER be
placed in front of an active
passenger airbag.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, accident and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device or feature that may take your focus
off the road. Your primary responsibility is
the safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving and that you
comply with all applicable laws.
12
Introduction
Information Provided by:
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for Export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
13
Introduction
Information Provided by:
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is
secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
All children are shaped differently.
The recommendations for safety
restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds
from National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum
WARNINGS
requirements of law. Ford recommends
checking with a NHTSA Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and
consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and
is compatible with and properly installed
in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting
station and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll
free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet
at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial
ministry of transportation, your local St.
John Ambulance office at
http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport Canada
at 1-800-333-0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca).
Failure to properly restrain children in
safety seats made especially for their
height, age, and weight may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
14
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint
type
Child size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Infants or
toddlers
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (gener-
ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four (4)
and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg)
and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if recom-
mended by your child restraint manufac-
turer).
Small children
Use a vehicle safety belt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seat back
upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80
lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom-
mended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
15
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
•You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
•Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements about
the safety of children in your vehicle.
•When possible, always properly
restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position
of your vehicle. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in a front seating
position. See Front Passenger
Sensing System (page 36).
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. NEVER place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move your vehicle seat
all the way back. When possible, all
children age 12 and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating
position. If all children cannot be seated
and restrained properly in a rear seating
position, properly restrain the largest child
in the front seat.
WARNINGS
Always carefully follow the
instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint device
is appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a collision,
which may result in serious injury or death.
Never use pillows, books, or towels
to boost a child. They can slide
around and increase the likelihood
of injury or death in a collision.
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a collision
or sudden stop, which may increase the
risk of serious injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a collision.
Do not leave children or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
16
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
Use any attachment method as indicated below by XChild
Weight
Restraint
Type Safety belt
only
Safety belt
and LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety belt
and top
tether
anchor
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
XXUp to 48 lb
(21 kg)
Rear facing
child seat
XXXUp to 48 lb
(21 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
XXOver 48 lb
(21 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly
against your vehicle seat. It may be
necessary to lift or remove the head
restraint. See Seats (page 129).
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a collision.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to
100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer). Many state and provincial
laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
17
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
E142595
•Can the child sit all the way back
against your vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
•Can the child sit without slouching?
•Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
•Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
•Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
•Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
back or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts,
or consider using a high back booster seat.
E70710
•High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
18
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
E142597
If the booster seat slides on your vehicle
seat, placing a rubberized mesh sold as
shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat
may improve this condition. Do not
introduce any item thicker than this under
the booster seat. Check with the booster
seat manufacturer's instructions.
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS
Child Seats
E142594
19
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or
children weighing 40 pounds (18
kilograms) or less (generally age four or
younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. NEVER place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat all the way
back.
Children 12 and under should be
properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
•Use the correct safety belt buckle for
that seating position.
•Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
•Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child
seat and the release button, to prevent
accidental unbuckling.
•Place your vehicle seat back in the
upright position.
•Put the safety belt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking
clip.
Perform the following steps when
installing the child seat with combination
lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is
a forward facing child seat, the steps are
the same for installing a rear facing child
seat.
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E142529
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and
then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
belt together.
20
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats. This vehicle does not require the use
of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
21
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
e.g., by pressing down or kneeling on
the child restraint while pulling up on
the shoulder belt in order to force slack
from the belt. This is necessary to
remove the remaining slack that will
exist once the extra weight of the child
is added to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper snugness
of the child seat to your vehicle.
Sometimes, a slight lean toward the
buckle will additionally help to remove
remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement
for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a Certified Passenger
Seat Technician.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNINGS
Never attach two child safety seats
to the same anchor. In a collision, one
anchor may not be strong enough to
hold two child safety seat attachments
and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies or LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where your vehicle seat back and
seat cushion meet (called the seat bight)
and one top tether anchor located behind
that seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used
to attach the child seat. For forward-facing
child seats, the top tether strap must also
be attached to the proper top tether
anchor, if a top tether strap has been
provided with your child seat.
22
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
E142535
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat
symbol.
E144054
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the
cushion and seat back below the symbols
as shown. Follow the child seat
manufacturer's instructions to properly
install a child seat with LATCH
attachments. Follow the instructions on
attaching child safety seats with tether
straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child seat only to the anchors shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center
Seating Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 inches (28
centimeters) center to center. Do not
use LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row rear seat are spaced 18 inches
(46 centimeters) apart. A child seat with
rigid LATCH attachments cannot be
installed at the center seating position.
LATCH compatible child seats (with
attachments on belt webbing) can only be
used at this seating position provided that
the child seat manufacturer's instructions
permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child seat to any lower
anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached
to that anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child seat from side to
side and forward and back where it is
secured to your vehicle. The seat should
move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
23
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH
Lower Anchors for Attaching Child
Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the
safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors
may be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
seat.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety
seats include a tether strap
which extends from the back of
the child safety seat and hooks to an
anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
seat for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in your vehicle.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed using either the safety belt, the
lower anchors of the LATCH system, or
both, you can attach the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
E142537
Perform the following steps to install a
child safety seat with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child seat off
your vehicle seat cushion when the child is
seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat.
Keeping the child seat just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat. For outboard
seating positions, route the tether strap
under the head restraint and between
the head restraint posts. For the center
seating positions, route the tether strap
over the top of the head restraint. If
needed, the head restraints can also
be removed.
E144274
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position, then open
the tether anchor cover.
E144275
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
24
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer's
instructions. If your child restraint
system is equipped with a tether strap,
and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, Ford also
recommends its use.
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the
rear edge of each rear door and must be
set separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
25
Child Safety
Information Provided by:
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make
sure children sit where they can be
properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a collision.
All occupants of the vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and
one tongue that are designed to be used
as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing the safety belt around your neck over
the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single
belt for more than one person.
When possible, all children 12 years
old and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNINGS
Safety belts and seats can become
hot in a vehicle that has been closed
up in sunny weather; they could burn
a small child. Check seat covers and
buckles before you place a child anywhere
near them.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum
protection in an accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have
lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
•Lap and shoulder safety belts.
•Shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety
belt).
•Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
•Safety belt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
•Belt tension sensor at the front
outboard passenger seating position.
•Safety belt warning light and chime.
•Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
26
Safety Belts
Information Provided by:
The safety belt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten
the safety belts when activated. In frontal
and near-frontal collisions, the safety belt
pretensioners may be activated alone or,
if the collision is of sufficient severity,
together with the front airbags. The
pretensioners may also activate when a
side curtain airbag is deployed.
FASTENING THE SAFETY
BELTS
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
Restraint of Pregnant Women
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the safety belt
properly fastened. The lap portion of
the safety belt should fit snug and be
positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the safety belt should
be positioned across the chest. Pregnant
women should also follow this practice.
See the following figure.
E142590
27
Safety Belts
Information Provided by:
Pregnant women should always wear their
safety belt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should
be positioned low across the hips below
the belly and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNINGS
After any vehicle collision, the safety
belt system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an
authorized dealer to verify that the
automatic locking retractor feature for
child seats is still functioning properly. In
addition, all safety belts should be checked
for proper function.
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY
MUST BE REPLACED if the safety
belt assembly automatic locking
retractor feature or any other safety belt
function is not operating properly when
checked by an authorized dealer. Failure
to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver safety belt has the first type of
locking mode, and the front outboard
passenger and rear seat safety belts have
both types of locking modes described as
follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety
belts will lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If
this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and
pull webbing out again in a slow and
controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver safety belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
This mode should be used any time a child
safety seat, except a booster, is installed
in passenger front or rear seating positions.
Children 12 years old and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. See Child
Safety (page 14).
28
Safety Belts
Information Provided by:
How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled
out.
Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the safety belt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNING
Position the safety belt height
adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
Failure to adjust the safety belt properly
could reduce the effectiveness of the
safety belt and increase the risk of injury in
a collision.
If the safety belt is too short when fully
extended, a safety belt extension assembly
can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the
same supplier as the safety belt.
Manufacturer identification is located at
the end of the webbing on the label. Also,
use the safety belt extension only if the
safety belt is too short for you when fully
extended.
SAFETY BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height
adjuster so that the belt rests across
the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the safety belt properly could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a collision.
E145664
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so
the belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height, pull the
button and slide the height adjuster up or
down. Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
29
Safety Belts
Information Provided by:
SAFETY BELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
Conditions of operation
Then...If...
The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-
2 minutes and the warning chime sounds
4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is not buckled
before the ignition switch is turned to the
on position...
The safety belt warning light and warning
chime turn off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled while the
indicator light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and indicator
chime remain off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled before
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi-
tion...
SAFETY BELT MINDER
Belt-Minder®
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders by intermittently sounding a
chime and illuminating the safety belt
warning light when the driver's or front
passenger's seat is occupied and the
safety belt is unbuckled.
The system uses information from the
front passenger sensing system to
determine if a front seat passenger is
present and therefore potentially in need
of a warning. To avoid activating the
Belt-Minder feature for objects placed in
the front passenger seat, warnings will only
be given to front seat occupants as
determined by the front passenger sensing
system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings have expired
(warnings for approximately five minutes)
for one occupant (driver or front
passenger), the other occupant can still
activate the Belt-Minder feature.
30
Safety Belts
Information Provided by:
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.The driver's and front passenger's safety
belts are buckled before the ignition switch
is turned to the on position or less than 1-2
minutes have elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to on...
The Belt-Minder feature is activated - the
safety belt warning light illuminates and
the warning chime sounds for six seconds
every 25 seconds, repeating for approxim-
ately five minutes or until the safety belts
are buckled.
The driver's or front passenger's safety belt
is not buckled when the vehicle has reached
at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes
have elapsed since the ignition switch has
been turned to on...
The Belt-Minder feature is activated - the
safety belt warning light illuminates and
the warning chime sounds for six seconds
every 25 seconds, repeating for approxim-
ately five minutes or until the safety belts
are buckled.
The driver's or front passenger's safety belt
becomes unbuckled for approximately one
minute while the vehicle is traveling at least
6 mph (9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2
minutes have elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to on...
Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to
deactivate it, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being
safely belted and surviving an accident.
We recommend you leave the system
activated for yourself and others who may
use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury,
do not deactivate or activate the system
while driving the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warning are deactivated and activated
independently. When deactivating or
activating one seating position, do not
buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the deactivation or
activation programming procedure.
The system can be deactivated or
activated by performing the following
procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
•the parking brake is set
•the transmission selector lever is in
position P (automatic transmission)
or N (manual transmission)
•the ignition is off
•the driver and front passenger safety
belts are unbuckled.
1. Turn the ignition on. DO NOT START
THE ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (approximately one minute).
After Step 2, wait an additional five
seconds before proceeding with Step
3. Once Step 3 is started, the procedure
must be completed within 60 seconds.
31
Safety Belts
Information Provided by:
3. For the seating position being disabled,
buckle then unbuckle the safety belt
four times at a moderate speed, ending
in the unbuckled state. After Step 3,
the safety belt warning light will turn
on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is
on, buckle and then unbuckle the
safety belt. After Step 4, the safety belt
warning light will flash for confirmation.
•This will disable the feature for that
seating position if it is currently
enabled.
•This will enable the feature for that
seating position if it is currently
disabled.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
seat safety belts to make sure there are no
nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.
All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies
(slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt
height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder
belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child
safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and
attaching hardware, should be inspected
after a collision. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor
Company recommends that all safety belt
assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a
collision be replaced. However, if the
collision was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Safety
belt assemblies not in use during a collision
should also be inspected and replaced if
either damage or improper operation is
noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 255).
32
Safety Belts
Information Provided by:
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able
to analyze different occupant conditions
and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety
of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle's Personal Safety System
consists of:
•Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
•Front outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety
belt usage sensors.
•Driver’s seat position sensor.
•Front passenger sensing system.
•Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
•Front crash severity sensors.
•Restraints Control Module with impact
and safing sensors.
•Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
•The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage
sensors, driver seat position sensor,
front passenger sensing system, and
indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety
System Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of your vehicle’s
safety devices according to crash severity
and occupant conditions. A collection of
crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints Control
Module. During a crash, the Restraints
Control Module may activate the safety
belt pretensioners and may activate either
one or both stages of the dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
33
Personal Safety System™
Information Provided by:
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or
gently, and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is the greatest close
to the trim covering the airbag module.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided.
Always transport children 12 years
old and under in the back seat and
always properly use appropriate
child restraints.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or
other injuries.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. NEVER place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat all the way
back.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Several airbag system components
get hot after inflation. Do not touch
them after inflation.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags DO NOT inflate
slowly; there is a risk of injury from a
deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (e.g., baking soda) that result
from the combustion process that inflates
the airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which may
irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the
residue is toxic. While the system is
designed to help reduce serious injuries,
contact with a deploying airbag may also
cause abrasions or swelling. Temporary
hearing loss is also a possibility as a result
of the noise associated with a deploying
airbag. Because airbags must inflate
rapidly and with considerable force, there
is the risk of death or serious injuries such
as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants
who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of
airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely
important that occupants be properly
restrained as far away from the airbag
module as possible while maintaining
vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
34
Supplementary Restraints System
Information Provided by:
SOS POST-CRASH ALERT
SYSTEM
The system flashes the turn signal lamps
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.
The horn and lamps will turn off when:
•the hazard control button is pressed
•the panic button (if equipped) is
pressed on the remote entry
transmitter, or
•your vehicle runs out of power.
Spin out Detection
If a spinout is detected and the hazard
warning flashers come on, the message
Spinout Detected Hazards Activated will
appear on the instrument cluster.
Once the hazard warning flashers have
been activated, they can be turned off by:
•pressing the hazard warning flasher
button.
•pressing the remote control unlock
button.
•pressing the remote control panic
button.
•cycling the ignition on and off twice.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the airbag into
your face and torso causing serious injury.
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat all the way
back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal collisions.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
•Driver and passenger airbag modules.
•Front passenger sensing system.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 41).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance
of at least 10 in. (25 cm) between an
occupant’s chest and the driver airbag
module.
35
Supplementary Restraints System
Information Provided by:
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
•Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
•Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on safety belts, it’s very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seat back, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. NEVER place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat all the way
back.
E142846
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
KNEE AIRBAG
The driver's and passenger's knee airbags
are located under the instrument panel.
The system works along with the driver's
and passenger's front airbags to help
reduce injury to the legs. When the airbags
activate in a collision, the knee airbags
deploy from under the instrument panel.
As with front and side airbags, it is
important to be properly seated and
restrained to reduce the risk of death or
serious injury.
Make sure the knee airbags are
operating properly. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator
(page 41).
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Even with Advanced Restraints
Systems, children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a
rear seating position.
Sitting improperly out of position or
with the seat back reclined too far
can take off weight from the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the front
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in a crash
36
Supplementary Restraints System
Information Provided by:
WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of possible serious
injury: Do not stow objects in seat
back map pocket (if equipped) or
hang objects off seat back if a child is in
the front passenger seat. Do not place
objects underneath the front passenger
seat or between the seat and the center
console (if equipped). Check the passenger
airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp
for proper airbag status. Failure to follow
these instructions may interfere with the
front passenger seat sensing system.
Any alteration or modification to the
front passenger seat may affect the
performance of the front passenger
sensing system.
This system works with sensors that are
part of the front passenger’s seat and
safety belt to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger’s frontal airbag
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
E157152
The front passenger sensing system uses
a pass airbag off indicator which will
illuminate and stay lit to remind you that
the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled. The indicator lamp is located at
the top center of the instrument panel.
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for
a short period of time when the ignition is
turned to the on position to confirm it is
functional.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger's frontal airbag when a
rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is
detected. Even with this technology,
parents are STRONGLY encouraged to
always properly restrain children in the rear
seat. The sensor also turns off the
passenger front airbag and seat-mounted
side airbag when the passenger seat is
empty.
•When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the
indicator lamp will illuminate and stay
lit to remind you that the front
passenger frontal airbag is disabled.
•If the child restraint has been installed
and the indicator lamp is not lit, then
turn the vehicle off, remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall
the restraint following the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger's frontal airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the front passenger
seat.
•When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the
indicator lamp will be unlit and stay
unlit.
37
Supplementary Restraints System
Information Provided by:
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, but the airbag off
indicator lamp is lit, it is possible that the
person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens:
•Turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seat back in the full upright
position.
•Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.
•Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the
passenger’s frontal airbag.
•If the indicator lamp remains lit even
after this, the person should be advised
to ride in the rear seat.
Passenger AirbagPassenger Airbag OFF Indic-
ator
Occupant
DisabledUnlitEmpty
DisabledLitChild
EnabledUnlitAdult
Note: When the passenger airbag off light
is illuminated, the passenger (seat
mounted) side airbag may be disabled to
avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on safety belts, it’s very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seat back, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
If you think that the status of the passenger
airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect, check
for the following:
•Objects lodged underneath the seat
•Objects between the seat cushion and
the center console (if equipped)
•Objects hanging off the seat back
•Objects stowed in the seatback map
pocket (if equipped)
•Objects placed on the occupant's lap
•Cargo interference with the seat
•Other passengers pushing or pulling on
the seat
•Rear passenger feet and knees resting
or pushing on the seat
The conditions listed above may cause the
weight of a properly seated occupant to
be incorrectly interpreted by the front
passenger sensing system. The person in
the front passenger seat may appear
heavier or lighter due to the conditions
described in the list above.
To know if the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly, See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 41).
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the
following:
38
Supplementary Restraints System
Information Provided by:
The driver and adult passengers should
check for any objects that may be lodged
underneath the front passenger seat or
cargo interfering with the seat.
If objects are lodged or cargo is interfering
with the seat; please take the following
steps to remove the obstruction:
•Pull the vehicle over.
•Turn the vehicle off.
•Driver and adult passengers should
check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat
or cargo interfering with the seat.
•Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
•Restart the vehicle.
•Wait at least two minutes and verify
that the airbag readiness light is no
longer illuminated.
•If the airbag readiness light remains
illuminated, this may or may not be a
problem due to the front passenger
sensing system.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the
system; take your vehicle immediately to
an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced
front airbag system to accommodate a
person with disabilities, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center. See
Getting the Services You Need (page
219).
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seat backs
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas
that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a collision.
WARNINGS
Do not use accessory seat covers.
The use of accessory seat covers
may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the
seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the
seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The
side airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and serviced by
an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a collision.
The side airbags are located on the
outboard side of the seat backs of the front
seats. In certain lateral collisions, the
airbag on the side affected by the collision
will be inflated. The airbag was designed
to inflate between the door panel and
occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact
collisions.
E152533
39
Supplementary Restraints System
Information Provided by:
The system consists of the following:
•A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted
to your vehicle
•Side airbags located inside the driver
and front passenger seat backs
•Front passenger sensing system
·Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 41).
Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted
side airbag if it detects an empty, unbuckled
passenger seat.
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying side curtain
airbag. Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of personal injury in
the event of a collision.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The side curtain airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the side curtain airbags, its
fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the
headliner on a vehicle containing side
curtain airbags. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
WARNINGS
All occupants of the vehicle including
the driver should always wear their
safety belts even when an airbag
SRS and side curtain airbag is provided.
To reduce risk of injury, do not
obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the side curtain
airbag.
If the side curtain airbags have
deployed, the side curtain airbags
will not function again. The side
curtain airbags (including the A, B and C
pillar trim and headliner) must be
inspected and serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the side curtain airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a collision.
The side curtain airbags will deploy during
significant side collisions. The side curtain
airbags are mounted to the roof side-rail
sheet metal, behind the headliner, above
each row of seats. In certain lateral
collisions, the side curtain airbags on the
impacted side of the vehicle will be
activated. The side curtain airbags are
designed to inflate between the side
window area and occupants to further
enhance protection provided in side impact
collisions.
The system consists of the following:
E75004
40
Supplementary Restraints System
Information Provided by:
•Side curtain airbags fitted above the
trim panels over the front and rear side
windows identified by a label or
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
•A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow side air curtain
deployment.
Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 41).
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the back
seats. The side curtain airbags will not
interfere with children restrained using a
properly installed child or booster seat
because it is designed to inflate downward
from the headliner above the doors along
the side window opening.
The design and development of the side
curtain airbags included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
curtain airbags.
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to
the front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body
structure and tow hooks) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify
the front end of the vehicle.
The vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide
information to the Restraints Control
Module which deploys (activates) the front
safety belt pretensioners, driver airbag,
passenger airbag, knee airbag(s), seat
mounted side airbags, and the side curtain
airbags. Based on the type of collision
(frontal impact or side impact), the
restraints control module will deploy the
appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
· The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
•The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
•A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically
until the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a collision.
The safety belt pretensioners and the front
airbag supplemental restraint system are
designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains longitudinal deceleration
sufficient to cause the restraints control
module to deploy a safety device.
41
Supplementary Restraints System
Information Provided by:
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a collision does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
•Front airbags are designed to activate
only in frontal and near-frontal
collisions (not rollovers, side impacts
or rear impacts) unless the collision
causes sufficient longitudinal
deceleration.
•The safety belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, and may also
activate when a side curtain deploys.
•A knee airbag deploys from under the
instrument panel when the front airbag
activates in a collision.
•Side airbags and side curtain airbags
are designed to inflate in side-impact
collisions, not rollovers, rear impacts,
frontal or near-frontal collisions, unless
the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by
qualified personnel.
42
Supplementary Restraints System
Information Provided by:
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). Vehicles with the remote start
feature will have a greater range. A
decrease in operating range could be
caused by:
•weather conditions
•nearby radio towers
•structures around the vehicle
•other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other short
distance radio transmissions (e.g. amateur
radios, medical equipment, wireless
headphones, remote controls and alarm
systems). If the frequencies are jammed,
you will not be able to use your remote
control. You can lock and unlock the doors
with the key.
Note: Make sure your vehicle is locked
before leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle and
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
of the following conditions are met:
•You touch the inside of the front
exterior door handle.
•You press the luggage compartment
button.
•You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference
is present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, it may be necessary to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
use the mechanical key blade in your
intelligent access key to open the driver’s
door in this situation. See Remote
Control (page 43).
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with two
integrated keyhead transmitters. The key
blade is used to start the vehicle and
unlock or lock the driver’s door from
outside the vehicle. The transmitter portion
functions as the remote control.
E151797
Press the button to release the key. Press
and hold the button to fold the key back
in when not in use.
43
Keys and Remote Controls
Information Provided by:
E151795
Note: Your vehicle’s keys were issued with
a security tag that provides important
vehicle key cut information. Keep the tag in
a safe place for future reference.
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)
E144506
Your vehicle may be equipped with two
intelligent access keys which operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in the vehicle to activate
the push button start system.
Removable Key Blade
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable mechanical key blade that can
be used to unlock the driver door.
E151796
Slide the release on the back of the remote
control and pivot the cover off to access
the key blade.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle’s backup keys were
issued with a security tag that provides
important vehicle key cut information. Keep
the tag in a safe place for future reference.
Using the Key Blade
The key cylinder is hidden under a cap on
the driver's side door handle.
To remove the cap:
E151956
44
Keys and Remote Controls
Information Provided by:
1. Insert the key blade into the slot on the
bottom of the handle and press up.
2. While maintaining upward pressure,
move the cap rearward to release it.
Gently remove the key while doing so.
To install the cap:
E151957
1. Place the cap just forward of the key
cylinder.
2. While applying pressure to the cap,
move it forward until it is in place. You
may hear a snap as it engages.
Make sure the cap is properly installed by
trying to move it rearward.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery will not delete
the transmitter from the vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
A message will appear in the information
display when the remote control battery
is low. See Information Messages (page
91).
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Press the button to release the key before
beginning the procedure.
E151798
1. Insert a screwdriver in the position
shown and gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
E151799
3. Carefully remove the cover.
45
Keys and Remote Controls
Information Provided by:
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or
the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
4. Insert a screwdriver as shown to
release the battery.
E151801
5. Remove the battery.
6. Install a new battery with the + facing
up.
7. Replace the battery cover.
Intelligent Access Transmitter
The remote control uses two coin-type
three-volt lithium batteries CR2025 or
equivalent.
E151796
1. Slide the release on the back of the
remote control and pivot the cover off.
E153890
2. Insert a coin into the slot and twist to
separate the housing.
E153891
3. Remove the batteries.
4. Install new batteries with the + facing
each other.
Note: Make sure to replace the label
between the two batteries.
46
Keys and Remote Controls
Information Provided by:
5. Reinstall the housing and cover.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within
three seconds. The horn will
chirp and the turn signals will
flash. It is recommended that this method
be used to locate your vehicle, rather than
using the panic alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm will only operate
when the ignition is off.
E138624
Press the button to activate the
alarm. Press the button again or
turn the ignition on to deactivate.
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle
is low on fuel.
E138625
Your vehicle has remote start if
the transmitter has this button.
The remote start feature allows you to
start the vehicle from outside the vehicle.
The transmitter has an extended operating
range.
Vehicles with automatic climate control
can be configured to operate when the
vehicle is remote started. See Climate
Control (page 118). A manual climate
control system will run at the setting it was
set to when the vehicle was last turned off.
Many states and provinces have
restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements regarding
remote start systems.
The remote start system will not work if:
•the ignition is on
•the alarm system is triggered
•the feature has been disabled
•the hood is not closed
•two remote vehicle starts have already
been attempted within the last hour
•the vehicle is not in P
•the vehicle battery voltage is too low
•the service engine soon light is on.
Remote Control Feedback
An LED on the remote control provides
status feedback of remote start or stop
commands.
StatusLED
Remote start or
extension
successful
Solid green
Remote stop
successful; engine
off
Solid red
Remote start or
stop failed
Blinking red
Waiting for status
update
Blinking green
Remote Starting the Vehicle
Note: Each button press must be done
within three seconds of each other. The
vehicle will not remote start if this sequence
is not followed and the horn will not chirp.
47
Keys and Remote Controls
Information Provided by:
E138626
The tag with your transmitter details the
starting procedure. To remote start the
vehicle:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice.
The exterior lamps will flash twice.
The horn will chirp if the system fails to
start, unless quiet start is on. Quiet start
will run the blower fan at a slower speed
to reduce noise. It can be switched on or
off in the information display. See General
Information (page 83).
Note: If the vehicle has been remote started
and is equipped with an integrated keyhead
transmitter, you must turn the ignition on
before driving the vehicle. If equipped with
an intelligent access transmitter, you must
press the START/STOP button on the
instrument panel once while applying the
brake pedal before driving the vehicle.
The power windows will be inhibited during
the remote start and the radio will not turn
on automatically.
The parking lamps will remain on and the
engine will run for 5, 10, or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Vehicle Run Time
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still
running to extend the run time for another
remote start duration. If you programmed
the duration to last 10 minutes, the second
10 minutes will begin after what is left of
the first activation time. For example, if the
vehicle had been running from the first
remote start for five minutes, the vehicle
will continue to run now for a total of 15
minutes. You can only extend the remote
start once.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after a vehicle shutdown. Only two
remote starts are allowed.
The ignition must be turned on and then
back off or allow one hour to pass before
using remote start again if additional
remote starts are desired.
Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. The
parking lamps will turn off.
You may have to be closer to the
vehicle than when starting due to ground
reflection and the added noise of the
running vehicle.
You can disable or enable the remote start
system through the information display.
See General Information (page 83).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement or additional keys or remote
controls can be purchased from your
authorized dealer. Your dealer can program
the transmitters to your vehicle or you may
be able to program them yourself. See
Passive Anti-Theft System (page 59).
48
Keys and Remote Controls
Information Provided by:
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys
programmed to the vehicle can be
activated with these restricted modes. Any
keys that have not been programmed are
referred to as an "administrator key" or
"admin key" which can be used to:
•create a restricted key
•program optional MyKey settings
•clear all MyKey features altogether.
Once a key has been programmed you can
access the following information using the
information display control:
•How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to the vehicle.
•The total distance the vehicle has been
driven with a MyKey.
For vehicles equipped with intelligent
access key (push button start), when both
a MyKey and an admin intelligent access
key (fob) are present, the admin fob will
be recognized by the vehicle to start the
engine.
Standard Settings
These settings cannot be changed.
•Belt-Minder®. This cannot be disabled
and the five-minute timer does not
expire. The audio system is muted
when MyKey Belt-Minder® is activated.
•Early low fuel. Warnings are displayed
in the information display control
followed by an audible tone when the
fuel tank is at one-eighth tank or less.
•Driver assist features, if equipped on
your vehicle, are forced on: Rear
parking aid, Blind spot information
system (BLIS®) with cross traffic alert,
Lane departure warning, Forward
collision warning system and Satellite
radio adult content restriction.
Optional Settings
These settings can be configured right after
a MyKey is first created or changed
afterward with an admin key.
•Vehicle speed limit of 65, 70, 75 and
80 mph (105, 113, 121 and 130 km/h).
Visual warnings are displayed followed
by an audible tone when vehicle speed
has reached the selected top speed.
•Vehicle speed minder of 45, 55 or 65
mph (75, 90, or 105 km/h). Visual
warnings are displayed followed by an
audible tone when the preselected
vehicle speed is exceeded.
•Audio system maximum volume of
45%. A message in the audio system
is displayed when attempting to
exceed the limited volume. Also, speed
sensitive compensated volume feature
will be disabled.
•Always on setting. When this is
selected you will not be able to disable
AdvanceTrac®, 911 Assist® or the Do
not disturb feature (if your vehicle is
equipped with these features).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display control to
create a MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition or, if the vehicle is equipped
with push button start, put the
intelligent access key in the backup
slot. Backup slot information is located
in a different chapter. See Starting
and Stopping the Engine (page 143).
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the
information display controls and select
Settings, then MyKey by pressing OK
or the > button.
4. Press OK to select Create.
49
MyKey®
Information Provided by:
5. When prompted, hold the OK button
until you see a message informing you
to label this key as a MyKey. The key
will be restricted at the next start.
The key is successfully programmed. Make
sure you label it so you can distinguish it
from the admin keys.
You can program optional settings for the
key(s). Refer to Programming/Changing
optional settings.
Programming/Changing Optional
Settings
All programmed keys can be cleared within
the same key cycle in which a key was
programmed, otherwise an admin key is
required to clear the keys. See Clearing
All MyKeys (page 50).
You can access the optional settings
through the information display control.
1. Turn the ignition on using an admin key.
2. Access the main menu and select
Settings, then MyKey.
3. Use the arrow buttons to get to an
optional feature.
4. Press OK or > to scroll through settings.
5. Press OK or > to make a selection.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
All programmed MyKeys can be cleared
within the same key cycle in which a MyKey
was created, otherwise an admin key is
required to clear the keys.
To clear all MyKeys (which removes all
restrictions and returns them to admin key
status), use the information display control
to do the following:
1. Access the main menu and select
Settings, then MyKey.
2. Scroll to Clear All and press the OK
button.
3. Hold the OK button until ALL MYKEYS
CLEARED is displayed.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
The information display control displays
information about keys programmed to
the vehicle:
•MYKEY MILES: Tracks mileage when
a restricted key is used. If mileage does
not accumulate as expected, then the
key is not being used by the intended
user. The only way to reset this to zero
is by clearing MyKeys. If the mileage is
lower than the last time you checked,
then the key system has been recently
reset.
•#MYKEY(S): Indicates how many
restricted keys are programmed to the
vehicle. Can also be used to detect
deletion of a restricted key.
•#ADMIN KEY(S): Indicates how
many admin keys are programmed to
the vehicle. Can also be used to detect
if an additional key has been
programmed to the vehicle.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is NOT compatible with
non-Ford-approved aftermarket remote
start systems. If you choose to install a
remote start system please see your Ford
authorized dealer for a Ford-approved
remote start system.
50
MyKey®
Information Provided by:
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
· The key in the ignition does not have admin
privileges.
I cannot program a key.
· The key in the ignition is the only admin
key (there always has to be at least one
admin key).
· The intelligent access key is not in the
backup slot (vehicles with push-button
start).
· SecuriLock® passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
· The key in the ignition does not have admin
privileges. I cannot program the optional
settings.
I cannot program the optional settings.
· No keys are programmed to the vehicle.
See Creating a MyKey (page 49).
· The key in the ignition does not have admin
privileges.
I cannot clear the restricted keys.
· No restricted keys are programmed to the
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 49).
· Purchase a new key from your authorized
dealer.
I lost the only admin key.
· Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-
Theft System (page 59).
I lost a key.
· An admin fob is present at engine start-
up.
No restricted key functions with intelligent
access key (push-button start).
· No MyKey keys are programmed to the
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 49).
· The MyKey key is not being used by the
intended user.
MyKey miles do not accumulate.
· The key system has been reset.
51
MyKey®
Information Provided by:
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is located on
the driver and front passenger door panels.
E138628
UnlockA
LockB
Door Lock Indicator
An LED on each door window trim will light
when the door is locked. It will remain lit
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is
switched off.
Switch Inhibitor
When you electronically lock your vehicle,
the power door lock switch will no longer
operate after 20 seconds. You must unlock
your vehicle with the remote control or
keyless keypad, or switch the ignition on,
to restore function to these switches. This
feature can be switched on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 83).
Rear Door Unlocking and Opening
Pull the interior door release handle twice
to unlock and open the rear door. The first
pull unlocks the door and the second pull
will unlatch the door.
Remote Control
The remote control can be used at any
time. The luggage compartment release
button will only work when the vehicle
speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage
Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver’s door.
Press the button again within
three seconds to unlock all doors. The turn
signals will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for three
seconds to change between driver's door
or all doors unlock mode. The turn signals
will flash twice to indicate the unlocking
mode was changed. Driver's door unlock
mode will only unlock the driver's door
when the unlock button is pressed once.
All door unlock mode will unlock all doors
with one press of the unlock button. The
unlocking mode will be applied to the
remote control, keyless entry keypad and
intelligent access. The mode can also be
changed in the information display. See
General Information (page 83).
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all the
doors. The turn signals will
illuminate.
Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors will lock again, the horn
will chirp and the turn signals will
illuminate if all the doors and the luggage
compartment are closed.
52
Locks
Information Provided by:
Note: If any door or the luggage
compartment is not closed, or if the hood is
not closed on vehicles equipped with an
anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn
will chirp twice and the lamps will not flash.
This feature can be enable or disabled in
the information display. See General
Information (page 83).
Opening the Luggage Compartment
E138630
Press twice within three seconds
to open the luggage
compartment.
Make sure the luggage compartment is
closed and latched before driving your
vehicle. An unlatched luggage
compartment may cause objects to fall
out or block your view.
Activating Intelligent Access (If
Equipped)
Intelligent access can be switched off with
the key free feature in the information
display. See General Information (page
83).
The intelligent access key must be within
3 feet (1 meter) of the vehicle.
At a Door
Pull an exterior door handle. The door will
unlock and can be opened.
E157085
Touch the top of the door handle to lock
the vehicle.
At the Luggage Compartment
E144402
Press the exterior release button hidden
above the license plate.
Smart Unlocks For Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter
This feature helps to prevent you from
locking yourself out of the vehicle if your
key is still in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock the vehicle with the power door lock
control, all the doors will lock then unlock
and the horn will chirp twice if your key is
still in the ignition.
The vehicle can still be locked with the key
in the ignition by using the keyless entry
keypad with the driver door closed, or by
pressing the lock button on the transmitter
even if the doors are not closed.
If both front doors are closed, the vehicle
can be locked by any method, regardless
of whether the key is in the ignition or not.
Smart Unlocks For Intelligent
Access Keys (If Equipped)
This feature helps to prevent you from
unintentionally locking your intelligent
access key inside your vehicle’s passenger
compartment or rear cargo area.
53
Locks
Information Provided by:
When you electronically lock your vehicle
using the driver or passenger power door
lock control (with any door open, vehicle
in park and ignition off), after you close the
last door the vehicle will search for an
intelligent access key in the passenger
compartment. If an intelligent access key
is found inside the vehicle, all of the doors
will immediately unlock and the horn will
chirp twice, indicating that the intelligent
access key is inside.
In order to override the smart unlock
feature and intentionally lock the
intelligent access key inside the vehicle,
you can lock your vehicle after all doors
are closed by using the keyless entry
keypad, pressing the lock button on
another intelligent access key or touching
the locking area on the handle with another
intelligent access key in your hand.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock the vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if:
•the ignition is on, or
•the ignition is off and the vehicle is not
in P.
Auto Relock
If you press the unlock button on the
remote control and do not open a door
within 45 seconds, your vehicle will lock
and the alarm will arm. This feature can
be enabled or disabled in the information
display. See General Information (page
83).
Autolock Feature
The autolock feature will lock all the doors
when:
•all doors are closed,
•the ignition is on,
•you shift into any gear putting the
vehicle in motion, and
•the vehicle attains a speed greater than
12 mph (20 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when:
•any door is opened then closed while
the ignition is on and the vehicle speed
is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
•the vehicle then attains a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autounlock Feature
The autounlock feature will unlock all the
doors when:
•the ignition is on, all the doors are
closed, and the vehicle has been in
motion at a speed greater than 12 mph
(20 km/h);
•the vehicle has then come to a stop
and the ignition is turned off or to
accessory; and
•the driver door is opened within 10
minutes of the ignition being turned off
or to accessory.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the
vehicle has been electronically locked after
the ignition is turned off and before the
driver's door is opened.
Enabling or Disabling
Note: The autolock and autounlock
features can be enabled or disabled
independently of each other.
These features can be enabled or disabled
by your authorized dealer for in the
information display. See General
Information (page 83).
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and select exterior
lamps will illuminate when the remote
entry system is used to unlock the doors.
54
Locks
Information Provided by:
The illuminated entry system will turn off
the lights if:
•the ignition is on,
•the remote transmitter lock control is
pressed, or
•after 25 seconds of illumination.
The lights will not turn off if:
•they have been turned on with the
dimmer control, or
•any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and select exterior
lamps will illuminate when all doors are
closed, the ignition is turned off and the
key is removed from the ignition
(integrated keyhead transmitter only).
The lamps will turn off if all the doors
remain closed and:
•25 seconds elapse
•the key is inserted in the ignition
(integrated keyhead transmitter only)
•the START/STOP button is pressed
(intelligent access key only).
Battery Saver
If the courtesy lamps, dome lamps or
headlamps are left on, the battery saver
will shut them off 10 minutes after the
ignition has been turned off.
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for
Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped)
If you shut off the engine and leave the
ignition in the on or accessory mode, the
ignition will shut off after 30 minutes.
Luggage Compartment
E144402
Press the release button above the license
plate. Your vehicle must be unlocked or
have an intelligent access transmitter
within 3 feet (1 meter) of the trunk.
KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is located near the driver’s
window. It is invisible until touched and
then it lights up so you can see and touch
the appropriate buttons.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly.
55
Locks
Information Provided by:
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 0
E138637
You can use the keypad to:
•lock or unlock the doors
•release the trunk
•recall memory seat and mirror
positions (if equipped)
•program and erase user codes
•arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
The keypad can be operated with the
factory set 5-digit entry code. The code is
located on the owner’s wallet card in the
glove box and is available from your
authorized dealer. You can also create up
to five of your own 5-digit personal entry
codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each
number must be entered within five
seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code 1.
The doors will lock then unlock to confirm
that your personal entry code has been
programmed.
To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
•press 3·4 to save personal code 2
•press 5·6 to save personal code 3
•press 7·8 to save personal code 4
•press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
You may also program a personal entry
code through the MyFord Touch system
(if equipped). See Settings (page 347).
Tips:
•Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
•Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
•The factory set code will work even if
you have set your own personal code.
Recalling Memory Positions (If
Equipped)
The programmed entry codes will recall
driver memory positions as follows:
•Entry code 1 will recall driver 1 memory
positions.
•Entry code 2 will recall driver 2 memory
positions.
•Entry code 3 will recall driver 3 memory
positions.
Note: Personal entry codes 4 and 5 will not
recall memory positions.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory set 5-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
This must be done within five seconds
of completing Step 2.
56
Locks
Information Provided by:
All personal codes are now erased and only
the factory set 5–digit code will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode
if the wrong code has been entered seven
times (35 consecutive button presses).
This mode disables the keypad for one
minute and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
•one minute of keypad inactivity
•pressing the unlock button on the
remote control
•the ignition is switched on
•unlocking the vehicle using intelligent
access (if equipped).
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
To Unlock the Driver’s Door
Enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be
pressed within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps will illuminate.
Note: All doors will unlock if the all door
unlocking mode is enabled. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 52).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 within five seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same
time (with the driver’s door closed). You
do not need to enter the keypad code first.
To Release the Trunk
Enter the factory set code or your personal
code, then press 5·6 within five seconds.
Displaying the Factory Set Code
With Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
Note: You will need to have two
programmed passive anti-theft keys for this
procedure.
To display the factory set code in the
information display:
1. Insert a key into the ignition and turn
the ignition on for a few seconds.
2. Turn the ignition off and remove the
key.
3. Insert the second key into the ignition
and turn the ignition on.
The factory set code will display for a few
seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.
With Intelligent Access Keys
Note: You will need to have two
programmed intelligent access keys for this
procedure.
To display the factory set code in the
information display:
1. Place the first programmed key in the
backup slot inside the center console.
2. Press the START/STOP button once
and wait a few seconds.
3. Press the START/STOP button again
and remove the key.
4. Insert the second programmed key into
the backup slot, then press the
START/STOP button.
The factory set code will appear in the
information display for a few seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.
57
Locks
Information Provided by:
INTERIOR LUGGAGE
COMPARTMENT RELEASE
WARNINGS
Keep vehicle doors and luggage
compartment locked and keep keys
and remote transmitters out of a
child’s reach. Unsupervised children could
lock themselves in the trunk and risk injury.
Children should be taught not to play in
vehicles.
Do not leave children, unreliable
adults, or animals unattended in the
vehicle. On hot days, the
temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior
can rise very quickly. Exposure of people
or animals to these high temperatures for
even a short time can cause death or
serious heat-related injuries, including brain
damage. Small children are particularly at
risk.
Your vehicle is equipped with a release
handle that provides a means of escape
for children and adults if they become
locked inside the luggage compartment.
Adults should familiarize themselves with
the operation and location of the release
handle.
E144403
The handle is located inside the luggage
compartment either on the luggage
compartment door (lid) or near the tail
lamps. It is composed of a material that
will glow for hours in darkness following
brief exposure to ambient light.
Pull the handle and push up on the luggage
compartment door (lid) to open from
within the luggage compartment.
58
Locks
Information Provided by:
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may cause vehicle starting problems
if they are too close to the key when starting
the engine. Prevent these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the
coded key and restart the engine if a
problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
SecuriLock®
The system is an engine immobilization
system. It is designed to help prevent the
engine from being started unless a coded
key programmed to your vehicle is used.
Using the wrong key may prevent the
engine from starting. A message may
appear in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, a malfunction has
happened and a message may appear in
the information display.
Automatic Arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after
switching the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key
disarms the vehicle.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with
two integrated keyhead transmitters or two
intelligent access keys.
The integrated keyhead transmitter
functions as a programmed ignition key
that operates all the locks and starts the
vehicle, as well as a remote control.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver's
door lock and activates the intelligent
access with push button start systems, as
well as a remote control.
If your programmed transmitters or
standard SecuriLock coded keys
(integrated keyhead transmitters only) are
lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra
coded key, you will need to have your
vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The
key codes need to be erased from your
vehicle and new coded keys will need to
be programmed.
Store an extra programmed key away from
the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. See your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter
Note: A maximum of eight coded keys can
be programmed to your vehicle. All eight
can be integrated keyhead transmitters.
You can program your own integrated
keyhead transmitter or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This
procedure will program both the engine
immobilizer keycode and the remote entry
portion of the remote control to your
vehicle
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
or standard SecuriLock keys.
59
Security
Information Provided by:
You must have two previously
programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible. See
your authorized dealer to have the spare
key programmed if two previously
programmed coded keys are not available.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the
first coded key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key
into the ignition.
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed coded
key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off
and removing the previously
programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded
key from the ignition.
If the key has been successfully
programmed it will start the engine and
operate the remote entry system (if the
new key is an integrated keyhead
transmitter).
If it was not programmed successfully,
wait 10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through
8. If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to your authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Intelligent
Access Key
Note: A maximum for four intelligent
access keys can be programmed to your
vehicle.
You must have two previously
programmed intelligent access keys inside
the vehicle and the new unprogrammed
intelligent access keys readily accessible.
See your authorized dealer to have the
spare key programmed if two previously
programmed keys are not available.
Make sure that the vehicle is off before
beginning this procedure. Make sure that
all doors are closed before beginning and
that they remain closed throughout the
procedure. Perform all steps within 30
seconds of starting the sequence. Stop
and wait for at least one minute before
starting again if any steps are performed
out of sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
E147165
1. Place a programmed intelligent access
key in the backup slot in the center
console.
2. Wait 5 seconds, then press the
START/STOP button.
3. Remove the intelligent access key.
60
Security
Information Provided by:
4. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in
the backup slot and press the
START/STOP button.
5. Wait 5 seconds, then press the
START/STOP button again.
6. Remove the intelligent access key.
7. Wait 5 seconds, then place the
unprogrammed intelligent access key
in the backup slot and press the
START/STOP button.
The intelligent access key is now
programmed. Verify the remote control
functions operate and the vehicle starts
with the new intelligent access key.
If it was not programmed successfully,
wait 10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through
7. If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to your authorized dealer.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will
be triggered if any door, the luggage
compartment or the hood is opened
without using the key, remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in the ignition. Electronically lock
the vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
•Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control
or keyless entry keypad.
•Switch the ignition on or start the
vehicle.
•Use a key in the driver’s door to unlock
the vehicle, then switch the ignition on
within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
61
Security
Information Provided by:
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 129).
2
2
1
E157083
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
E157084
3. Lock the steering column.
AUDIO CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
You can operate the following functions
with the control:
E144503
Volume upA
Volume downB
MuteC
MediaD
Seek down or previousE
Seek up or nextF
MEDIA
Press repeatedly to scroll through available
audio sources.
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
•tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset
•play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
•tune the radio to the next station up or
down the frequency band
•seek through a track.
62
Steering Wheel
Information Provided by:
VOICE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
B
A
C
E144504
End a callA
Answer a callB
Voice recognitionC
See SYNC® (page 298). See MyFord
Touch® (page 335).
CRUISE CONTROL
Type 1
E144500
Type 2
E144501
See Cruise Control (page 183).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E144636
See Information Displays (page 83).
63
Steering Wheel
Information Provided by:
Cluster Display Control Features
E144811
If equipped with:
MyFord® system: This control functions
the same as the center control on the
faceplate. See Audio unit (page 107).
MyFord Touch®: Use this control to
adjust the right side of the cluster display.
Navigate through the screen and press OK
to select. See MyFord Touch® (page 335).
64
Steering Wheel
Information Provided by:
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure the windshield wipers are
switched off before entering a car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper
blades if they begin to leave streaks or
smears. If that doesn't resolve the issue,
install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
E144495
Single wipeA
Intermittent wipeB
Normal wipeC
High speed wipeD
Intermittent Wipe
E144496
Shortest wipe intervalA
Intermittent wipeB
Longest wipe intervalC
Use the rotary control to adjust the
intermittent wipe interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes will decrease.
AUTOWIPERS (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure the windshield wipers are
switched off before entering a car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper
blades if they begin to leave streaks or
smears. If that doesn't resolve the issue,
install new wiper blades.
Note: If you switch autolamps on in
conjunction with autowipers, your low beam
headlamps will illuminate automatically
when the rain sensor activates the
windshield wipers continuously.
Note: Wet road conditions can cause
unexpected wiping or smearing.
65
Wipers and Washers
Information Provided by:
To reduce smearing we recommend the
following:
•Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers.
•Switch to normal or high speed wipe.
•Switch the autowipers off.
E144497
Highest sensitivityA
OnB
Lowest sensitivityC
The wipers will function when moisture is
detected on the windshield. The rain
sensor will continue to monitor the amount
of moisture on the windshield and adjust
the speed of the wipers automatically. This
feature can be switched on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 83).
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the rain sensor. With low
sensitivity, the wipers will operate when
the sensor detects a large amount of
moisture on the windshield. With high
sensitivity, the wipers will operate when
the sensor detects a small amount of
moisture on the windshield.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
Sensor performance will be affected if the
area around the interior mirror is dirty. The
rain sensor is very sensitive and the wipers
may operate if dirt, mist or flies hit the
windshield.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.
E144498
The washers will spray for as long as you
pull the lever toward you. When you
release the lever, the wipers will operate
for a short time.
A wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing to clear any remaining washer
fluid. This feature can be switched on or
off in the information display. See General
Information (page 83).
66
Wipers and Washers
Information Provided by:
LIGHTING CONTROL
E142449
OffA
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
tail lamps
B
HeadlampsC
High Beams
E130140
Push the lever forward to switch the high
beams on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
Headlamp Flasher
E142450
Pull the lever toward you slightly and
release it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: It may be necessary to switch your
headlamps on manually in severe weather
conditions.
E142451
The headlamps will switch on and off
automatically in low light situations or
during inclement weather.
The headlamps will remain on for a period
of time after you switch the ignition off.
You can adjust the time delay using the
information display controls. See
Information Displays (page 83).
67
Lighting
Information Provided by:
Note: If you switch autolamps on in
conjunction with autowipers, low beam
headlamps will illuminate automatically
when the rain sensor activates the
windshield wipers continuously.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
Note: If you disconnect the battery or it
becomes discharged, the illuminated
components will switch to the maximum
setting.
Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps
E132712
Press repeatedly or press and hold until
the desired level is reached.
Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps
A B
A
E142452
Press repeatedly or press and
hold to dim.
A
Press repeatedly or press and
hold to brighten.
B
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
After you switch the ignition off, you can
switch the headlamps on by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you. You
will hear a short tone. The headlamps will
switch off automatically after three
minutes with any door open or 30 seconds
after the last door has been closed. You
can cancel this feature by pulling the
direction indicator toward you again or
switching the ignition on.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING
Always remember to switch your
headlamps on in low light situations
or during inclement weather. The
system does not activate the tail lamps
and may not provide adequate lighting
during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions
may result in a collision.
68
Lighting
Information Provided by:
The system switches the low beam
headlamps on at a reduced intensity in
daylight conditions.
To switch the system on, switch the
ignition on, and switch the lighting control
to the off, autolamp or parking lamp
position.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
The system will automatically turn on your
high beams if it is dark enough and no other
traffic is present. When it detects an
approaching vehicle’s headlights, a
preceding vehicle’s tail lamps or street
lighting, the system will turn off the high
beams before they distract other drivers.
The low beams remain on.
Note: If it appears that automatic control
of the high beams is not functioning
properly, check the windshield in front of
the camera for blockage. A clear view of the
road is required for proper system operation.
Any windshield damage in the area of the
camera field-of-view should be repaired.
Note: If a blockage is detected (e.g. bird
dropping, bug splatter, snow, or ice) and no
changes are observed, the system will go
into low beam mode until the blockage is
cleared. A message may also appear in the
instrument cluster display noting the front
camera is blocked.
Note: Typical road dust, dirt and water
spots will not affect the automatic high
beam system’s performance. However, in
cold or inclement weather conditions, the
automatic high beam system's availability
may be decreased. If the driver wants to
change the beam state independently of
the system, the driver may turn the high
beams ON or OFF using the multifunction
switch lever. Automatic control will resume
when conditions are correct.
Note: Modification of the vehicle ride height
(e.g. using much larger tires) may degrade
feature performance.
A camera sensor is centrally mounted
behind the windscreen of the vehicle, and
monitors conditions continuously to decide
when to switch the high beams off and on.
Once the system is active the high beams
will switch on if:
•The ambient light level is low enough
that high beams are needed.
•There is no traffic in front of the vehicle.
•The vehicle speed is greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The high beams will switch off if:
•An approaching vehicle's headlights or
a preceding vehicle's tail lamps are
detected.
•Vehicle speed falls below 16 mph
(25 km/h).
•The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
•Severe rain, snow, or fog is detected.
•The camera is blocked.
Activating the system
Switch on the system using the information
display and autolamps. See Information
Displays (page 83). See Autolamps
(page 67).
E142451
69
Lighting
Information Provided by:
Turn the lighting control to the autolamps
position.
Manually overriding the system
E130140
Use the lever to switch between the high
beams and the low beams.
Note: This is a temporary override and the
system will return to automatic operation
after a short period.
To permanently deactivate the system,
use the information display menu or turn
the lighting control switch from autolamps
to headlamps.
FRONT FOG LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
E142453
Press the control to switch the fog lamps
on or off.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except off
and the high beams are not on.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E145595
Push the lever up or down to use the
direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times to
indicate a lane change.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps will switch on when one of the
following conditions have been met:
•You open any door.
•You press a remote control button.
•You touch switch A on the front interior
lamp.
Front Interior Lamp
Note: The front interior lamp switches are
on the overhead console. The exact location
of each switch on the overhead console
depends upon which roof, sunroof, and
window shade features are equipped on the
vehicle.
70
Lighting
Information Provided by:
Note: Touch switch C to switch the door
function off when you open any door. The
indicator lamp will illuminate amber when
the door function is off. When the door
function is off and you open a door, the
courtesy and door lamps will stay off. Touch
switch C again to switch the door function
back on. The indicator lamp will illuminate
blue when the door function is on. When the
door function is on and you open a door, the
courtesy and door lamps will switch on.
E146410
All lamps on switchA
All lamps off switchB
Door function switchC
You can switch individual map lamps on
independently by touching a map lens.
Rear Interior Lamp (If Equipped)
A
E142455
You can switch individual dome lamps on
independently by pressing switch A.
71
Lighting
Information Provided by:
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings.
E146043
Note: You may hear a rumbling noise when
just one of the windows are open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
or lift it again to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.
Bounce-Back
The window will stop automatically while
closing. It will reverse some distance if
there is an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
Pull up the window switch and hold within
two seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window will
travel up with no bounce-back protection.
The window will stop if the switch is
released before the window is fully closed.
Global Opening and Closing
Note: The ignition must be off and the
accessory delay feature must not be
activated in order for this feature to operate.
Note: This feature can be disabled or
enabled by your authorized dealer or in the
information display. See General
Information (page 83).
You can open and close your vehicle's
windows, and vent the moonroof (if
equipped) using the remote control.
Opening the Windows
Press and hold the unlock button on the
remote control to begin opening the
windows and venting the moonroof (if
equipped).
Press the lock or unlock button on the
remote control to stop motion.
Closing the Windows
WARNING
Before operating power windows
and moonroof, you should verify that
they are free of obstructions and
make sure that children and pets are not
in the proximity of window openings.
72
Windows and Mirrors
Information Provided by:
Press and hold the lock button on the
remote control to begin closing the
windows and moonroof (if equipped).
Press the lock or unlock button on the
remote control to stop motion.
Window Lock
E144072
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It will illuminate when
the rear window controls are locked.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for
several minutes after you have switched
the ignition off or until either front door is
opened.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving.
E144073
Left-hand mirrorA
Adjustment controlB
Right-hand mirrorC
To adjust a mirror:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control will illuminate.
2. Adjust the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror switch again.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
126).
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 132).
Auto-Dimming Feature (If Equipped)
The driver’s exterior mirror will
automatically dim when the interior
auto-dimming mirror is activated.
73
Windows and Mirrors
Information Provided by:
Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror
housing will blink when the turn signal is
activated.
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Objects in the blind spot mirror are
closer than they appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated
convex mirror built into the upper outboard
corner of the exterior mirrors. They are
designed to increase your visibility along
the side of your vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror.
If no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane
is at a safe distance, signal that you intend
to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder
to verify traffic is clear and carefully
change lanes.
A
B
C
E138665
The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the
main mirror when it is at a distance. The
image becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image will
transition from the main mirror and begin
to appear in the blind spot mirror as the
vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle will
transition to your peripheral field of view
as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
See Blind Spot Monitor (page 196).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
74
Windows and Mirrors
Information Provided by:
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce glare at night.
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or
raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
E138667
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended
in the vehicle. They may seriously
hurt themselves.
When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the roof opening.
The sliding shade can be manually opened
or closed when the moonroof is closed.
Pull the shade toward the front of the
vehicle to close it.
The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop it during
one-touch operation, touch the control a
second time.
75
Windows and Mirrors
Information Provided by:
E144499
OpenA
VentB
CloseC
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
Touch (A) to open the moonroof. It will
stop short of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
the moonroof fully open. Touch (A) again
to fully open the moonroof.
Touch (C) to close the moonroof.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof will stop automatically and
reverse some distance if an obstacle is
detected while closing.
Touch and hold (C) within two seconds of
a bounce-back event to override this
function.
Venting the Moonroof
Touch (B) to vent the moonroof. Touch
(C) to close it.
76
Windows and Mirrors
Information Provided by:
GAUGES
Type 1 and 2
TachometerA
Information Display (Type 2 shown Type 1 similar)B
SpeedometerC
Fuel GaugeD
Engine Coolant Temperature GaugeE
Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information
display Registers the accumulated
distance your vehicle has traveled.
Outside Air Temperature
Shows the outside air temperature.
Compass
Displays the vehicle’s heading direction.
Trip Computer
See General Information (page 83).
77
Instrument Cluster
Information Provided by:
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 83).
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
Shows the temperature of the engine
coolant. At normal operating temperature,
the needle will remain in the center section.
If the needle enters the red section, the
engine is overheating. Stop the engine,
switch the ignition off and determine the
cause once the engine has cooled down.
Note: Do not restart the engine until the
cause of overheating has been resolved.
WARNING
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
Fuel Gauge
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is
left in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge may
vary slightly when your vehicle is moving
or on a gradient. The arrow adjacent to the
fuel pump symbol indicates on which side
of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Type 3
78
Instrument Cluster
Information Provided by:
Left Information DisplayA
SpeedometerB
Right Information Display See General Information (page 335).C
Left Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information
display Registers the accumulated
distance your vehicle has traveled.
Trip Computer
See General Information (page 83).
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 83).
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators will alert you to a vehicle
condition that may become serious. Some
lamps will illuminate when you start your
vehicle to make sure they work. If any
lamps remain on after starting your vehicle,
refer to the respective system warning
lamp for further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp but do not display
when you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E144524
The speed control system
indicator light changes color to
indicate what mode the system
is in: See Using Cruise Control (page 183).
On (white light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system is turned
on. Turns off when the speed control
system is turned off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when
the adaptive cruise control system is
engaged. Turns off when the speed control
system is disengaged.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue
to have the normal braking system
(without ABS) unless the brake system
warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the
system checked by your authorized dealer.
Auto Start-stop (If Equipped)
It will illuminate to inform you
when the engine shuts down or
in conjunction with a message.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked
by your authorized dealer immediately.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
E151262
It will illuminate when you switch
this feature off or in conjunction
with a message. See Blind Spot
Monitor (page 196). See Information
Messages (page 91).
Brake System
E144522
It will illuminate when you
engage the parking brake with
the ignition on.
79
Instrument Cluster
Information Provided by:
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that the parking brake is not engaged. If
the parking brake is not engaged, this
indicates low brake fluid level or a brake
system malfunction. Have the system
checked immediately by your authorized
dealer.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance
may occur. It will take you longer to stop
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. Driving
extended distances with the parking brake
engaged can cause brake failure and the
risk of personal injury.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E71340
It will illuminate when you switch
this feature on.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or right
turn signal or the hazard warning
flasher is turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for
a burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb
(page 252).
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Electric Park Brake
E146190
It will illuminate or flash when
the electric parking brake has a
malfunction.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high.
Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible, switch off the engine and let cool.
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
(page 243).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by your authorized
dealer immediately.
Fasten Safety Belt
It will illuminate and a chime will
sound to remind you to fasten
your safety belt. See Safety
Belt Minder (page 30).
Front Airbag
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates
a malfunction. Have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
It will illuminate when you switch
the front fog lamps on.
80
Instrument Cluster
Information Provided by:
Heads Up Display (If Equipped)
E156133
A red beam of lights will
illuminate on the windshield in
certain instances when using
adaptive cruise control and/or the collision
warning system. It will also illuminate
momentarily when you start your vehicle
to make sure the display works.
High Beam
It will illuminate when you switch
the high beam headlamps on. It
will flash when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Lane Keeping Aid (If Equipped)
E144813
Illuminates when the lane
keeping system is activated.
Low Fuel Level
It will illuminate when the fuel
level is low or the fuel tank is
nearly empty. Refuel as soon as
possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It will illuminate when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine
running or when driving, check
your tire pressure as soon as possible.
It will also illuminate momentarily when
you switch the ignition on to confirm the
lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate
when you switch the ignition on, or begins
to flash at any time, have the system
checked by your authorized dealer.
Parking Lamps
It will illuminate when you switch
the parking lamps on.
Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when a powertrain
or an AWD fault has been
detected. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
If the service engine soon
indicator light stays illuminated
after the engine is started, it
indicates that the On Board Diagnostics
system (OBD) has detected a malfunction
of the vehicle emissions control system.
Refer to On board diagnostics (OBD) in
the Fuel and Refueling chapter for more
information about having your vehicle
serviced. See Emission Control System
(page 154).
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is
occurring which could damage your
catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate
fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and
deceleration) and have your vehicle
serviced immediately.
Note: Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures could
damage the catalytic converter or other
vehicle components.
The service engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first turned
on prior to engine start to check the bulb
and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready
for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing.
81
Instrument Cluster
Information Provided by:
Normally, the service engine soon light will
stay on until the engine is cranked, then
turn itself off if no malfunctions are
present. However, if after 15 seconds the
service engine soon light blinks eight times,
it means that the vehicle is not ready for
I/M testing. See Emission Control
System (page 154).
Stability Control
E138639
It will flash when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated
or does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the
system will switch off. Have the system
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. See Using Stability
Control (page 173).
Stability Control Off
It will illuminate when you switch
the system off. It will go out
when you switch the system
back on or when you switch the ignition
off. See Using Stability Control (page
173).
Trunk Ajar
E146189
Displays when the ignition is on
and the trunk is not completely
closed.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when you open the driver's door
and you have left the key in the ignition
with it in the off or accessory position.
Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)
Chirps the horn twice when you exit the
vehicle and the keyless vehicle is in RUN,
indicating the vehicle is still on.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by your authorized dealer
immediately.
82
Instrument Cluster
Information Provided by:
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, accident and
injury. Ford strongly recommends
that drivers use extreme caution when
using any device or feature that may take
their focus off the road. Your primary
responsibility is the safe operation of the
vehicle. We recommend against the use
of any handheld device while driving and
that you comply with all applicable laws.
Various systems on your vehicle can be
controlled using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information is displayed in
the information display.
Information Display Controls
(Type 1 and Type 2)
E144637
•Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
•Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
•Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
•Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
•Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Menu
You can access the menu using the
information display control.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Trip 1 and 2
Trip Odometer
Trip Timer
Fuel Used
Average Fuel
83
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Trip 1 and 2
All Values
Outside Temperature
•Resetting the Trip Computer — Press and hold OK on the current screen to reset the
respective trip, distance, time and fuel information.
•Trip Odometer — Registers the distance of individual journeys.
•Trip Timer — timer stops when the vehicle is turned off and restarts when the vehicle
is restarted.
•Fuel Used — shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip.
•Average Fuel — shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
•All Values — Shows all trip values.
•Outside Temperature — Shows the outside air temperature.
Fuel Economy
Distance to E
Inst Fuel Econ
Long Term Average Fuel
Fuel History
All Values
Information
Available Auto Start-Stop messaging will provide details
about what is happening with your system. See Informa-
tion Messages (page 91).
Auto Stop/Start
-Intelligent AWD
-MyKey
All active warnings will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Use the up/
down arrow buttons to scroll through the list.
System Check
84
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Settings
On or OffTraction CtrlDriver Assist
On (default on key cycle) or OffBlind Spot
On or OffRear Park Aid
On or OffHill Start
Assist
On or OffCross Traffic
Auto Engine OffVehicle
5, 10 or 30 minutesFuel History
Auto HighbeamLighting
Off or XX SecondsAutolamp Delay
Settings (cont’d)
AutolockLocksVehicle
(cont’d) Autounlock
Relock
Mislock
All Doors / Driver
First
Remote Unlock
Set to XXX %Oil Life Rest
Switch Inhibit
Remote Open / Remote CloseWindows
Courtesy Wipe / Rain SensingWipers
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKeyMyKey
Always On / User Selectable911 Assist
Always On / User SelectableTraction
Control
Choose desired speed or OffMax Speed
85
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Settings (cont’d)
Choose desired speed or OffSpeed Minder
On or OffVolume
Limiter
On or OffDo Not
Disturb
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys
Choose your applicable settingLanguageDisplay
Choose your
applicable setting
DistanceUnits
Choose your
applicable setting
Temperature
Information Display Controls
(Type 3)
E144638
•Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
•Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
•Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
•Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
•Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Main menu
From the main menu bar on the left side
of the information display, you can choose
from the following categories:
E144639
Display Mode
E138660
Trip 1 & 2
E144640
Fuel Economy
E144642
Information
E100023
Settings
Scroll up/down to highlight one of the
categories, then press the right arrow key
or OK to enter into that category. Press the
left arrow key as needed to exit back to the
main menu.
86
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Display Mode
E144639
Use the up/down arrow buttons
to choose between the following
display options.
Option 6Option 5Option 4Option 3Option 2Option 1Display mode
----XXXXX mi (km) to
empty
XXXXXXFuel gauge
--XX--Round tachometer
X---X-Vertical tacho-
meter
--X---Engine coolant
temp gauge
XX----AWD gauge
•XXX mi (km) to empty: Shows the approximate distance the vehicle will travel.
•Fuel gauge: Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank. The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade. When the fuel
level becomes low, the level indicator will change to amber. When the fuel level
becomes critically low, the level indicator will change to red. Note: When a MyKey®
is in use, low fuel warnings will display earlier. The fuel icon and arrow indicates which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
•Round tachometer: Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute. Driving with
your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine.
During SelectShift Automatic™ transmission (SST) use, the currently selected gear
will appear in the display.
•Engine coolant temperature gauge: Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal
operating temperature, the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the engine
coolant temperature exceeds the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
•Intelligent AWD (if equipped): displays power distribution between the front and rear
wheels. More power to either front or rear wheels will be displayed by more area filled
in.
Trip 1 & 2
E138660
Choose between the standard
or enhanced trip display.
87
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Enhanced displayStandard displayTrip 1 & 2
XXTrip Odometer
XXTrip Timer
X-Average Fuel
X-Fuel Used
-Press and hold OK to reset the currently
displayed trip information.
•Trip Odometer — shows the accumulated trip distance.
•Trip Timer— timer stops when the vehicle is turned off and restarts when the vehicle
is restarted.
•Average Fuel — shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
•Fuel Used — shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip.
Fuel Economy
E144640
Use the left/right arrow buttons
to choose the desired fuel
economy display.
Option 2Option 1Fuel Economy
XXDTE
-XInst Fuel Econ
XXAverage Fuel
X-Fuel History
5, 10, or 30 minuteFuel History Duration
•DTE: Distance To Empty shows the approximate distance the vehicle will travel on
the fuel remaining in the tank. Changes in driving pattern may cause the value to vary.
•Inst Fuel Econ: This display shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy.
•Average Fuel: Indicates the average fuel consumption since the function was last
reset.
•Fuel History: shows a bar chart of your fuel history.
•Fuel History Duration: shows fuel usage over a 5, 10, or 30 minute time span.
88
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Info
E144642
In this mode, you can view
different vehicle system
information and perform a
system check.
Information
Available Auto Start-Stop messaging will provide details
about what is happening with your system. See Informa-
tion Messages (page 91).
Auto Stop/Start
-Driver Alert
-MyKey
All active warnings will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Use the up/
down arrow buttons to scroll through the list.
System Check
Settings
E100023
In this mode, you can configure
different driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
Settings
On / OffTraction CtrlDriver
Assist On (default on key cycle) / OffBlindspot
High / Normal / LowSensitivityCollision Warning
On / OffDistance Alert
On (default on key
cycle) / Off
Warn
Adaptive (default on key cycle) or NormalCruise Control
On (default on key cycle) / OffCross Traffic
On (default on key cycle) / OffDriver Alert
On / OffHill start
89
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Settings (cont’d)
Alert / Aid / BothModeLane Keeping SystemDriver
Assist
(cont’d) High / Normal / LowIntensity
On (default on key cycle) / OffFront Park Aid
On (default on key cycle) / OffRear Park Aid
On (default on key cycle) / OffAuto Engine OffVehicle
On / OffEasy Entry/Exit
Auto HighbeamLighting
Off or XX SecondsAutolamp Delay
On / OffAutolockLocks
On / OffAutounlock
On / OffMislock
All doors / Driver’s doorRemote Unlocking
Set to XXX %Oil Life Reset
Settings (cont’d)
Heater – A/C: Auto /
Last Settings
Climate Control (using
this feature allows you
to select different
climate control modes
when the vehicle is
started using the
remote start feature)
Remote StartVehicle
(cont’d)
Front Defrost: Auto / Off
Rear Defrost: Auto / Off
Driver Seat: Auto / Off
Passenger Seat: Auto /
Off
5 / 10 /15 minutesDuration
On / OffQuiet Start
Enable / DisableSystem
90
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Settings (cont’d)
On / OffSwitch InhibitVehicle
(cont’d) On / OffRemote OpenWindows
On / OffRemote Close
On / OffCourtesy WipeWipers
On / OffRain Sensing
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKeyMyKey
Always On / User Selectable911 Assist
Always On / User SelectableTraction Control
Choose desired speed or offMax Speed
Choose desired speed or offSpeed Minder
On / OffVolume Limiter
Always On / User SelectableDo Not Disturb
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys
Choose your applicable settingLanguageDisplay
Choose your applicable
setting
DistanceUnits
Choose your applicable
setting
Temperature
Fuel Gauge / Fuel + TachGauge Display
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
messages will display or be available.
Certain messages may be abbreviated or
shortened depending upon which cluster
type you have.
E144636
91
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display. Other messages will
be removed automatically after a short
time.
Certain messages need to be confirmed
before you can access the menus.
Active Park
ActionMessage
Displayed when the system needs service. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Active Park Fault
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC
from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
184).
Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction
Displayed when conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise
cannot function properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise
Control (page 184).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available
Displayed when the radar is blocked because of poor radar
visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in front of
radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See
Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 184).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
Displayed when the automatic braking has been disabled.Cruise Control Auto-
matic Braking Turned
Off
Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC
from engaging.
Front Sensor Not Aligned
Displayed when the adaptive cruise has reinstated controls
to the driver.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver
Resume Control
Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the
adaptive cruise.
Adaptive Cruise Speed
Too Low to Activate
Displays when the adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting
the gap distance and the driver needs to shift the transmission
into a lower gear.
Adaptive Cruise Shift
Down
92
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
AdvanceTrac®
ActionMessage
Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a
blocked sensor.
Service AdvanceTrac
Displayed when the traction control has been disabled or
enabled by the driver.
AdvanceTrac Off On
Airbag
ActionMessage
Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a
blocked sensor.
Occupant Sensor
BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger
Seat
Alarm
ActionMessage
Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to unauthor-
ized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 61).
Vehicle Alarm to Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle
Auto Start-Stop
ActionMessage
The engine needs to be restarted, press the brake pedal to
start.
Auto StartStop Press
Brake to Start Engine
The engine needs to be restarted, press the brake pedal harder
to start.
Auto StartStop Press
Brake Harder to Activate
The engine needs to be restarted, press the clutch pedal to
start.
Auto StartStop Press
Clutch to Start Engine
The engine needs to be restarted, press any pedal to start.Auto StartStop Press
Any Pedal
Select neutral for the system to restart the engine.Auto StartStop Select
Neutral To Start Engine
93
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
ActionMessage
Select park for the system to restart the engine.Auto StartStop Shift to
P Restart Engine
The system is not functioning. A manual restart is required.Auto StartStop Manual
Restart Required
Displays when conditions are not met for the Auto StartStop
system to function properly See Start-Stop (page 148).
Auto StartStop Not
Available
StartStop has shutoff the engine automatically.Engine Stopped
The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being
turned.
Engine On due to Vehicle
Maneuvering
The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being
turned.
Engine On due to
Steering Wheel Maneuv-
ering
Engine may be On to support high demand for electrical
accessories, such as operating power windows, rear defroster,
or when using the Power point.
Engine On due to
Accessory Usage
Engine On to support normal vehicle operation. Includes
external vehicle conditions, such as altitude, traffic, low
ambient temperature. Also includes battery outside optimal
operating conditions (state of charge and temperature), and
inadequate brake vacuum (can occur if the brake pedal is
depressed a number of times in succession).
Engine On Normal Oper-
ation
Engine On to achieve or maintain interior compartment at an
acceptable level.
Heating or Cooling
Engine On required to support use of Power Outlet (110V).Power Outlet in Use
Automatic Engine Shutdown
ActionMessage
Displays when the engine is getting ready to shut off.Engine Shuts Off in XX
Seconds
Displays when the engine has shut off to help increase fuel
economy.
Engine Shut Off for Fuel
Economy
Displays when the engine is getting ready to shut off. You can
press OK on the left steering wheel button to override the shut
down.
Engine Shuts Off in XX
Seconds Press Ok to
Override
94
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
AWD
ActionMessage
Displayed when the AWD system has been temporarily
disabled to protect itself from overheating.
AWD Temporarily
Disabled
Displayed when the AWD system has been automatically
disabled to protect itself. This is caused by operating the
vehicle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system
is overheating.
AWD Off
The AWD system will resume normal function and clear this
message after driving a short distance with the road tire re-
installed or after the system is allowed to cool.
AWD Restored
Displayed in conjunction with the Throttle Control/Transmis-
sion/AWD light when the AWD system is not operating prop-
erly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
AWD Malfunction
Service Required
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
Displayed when the charging system needs servicing. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check Charging System
Displayed when the battery management system detects an
extended low-voltage condition. Various vehicle features will
be disabled to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of
the electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system
voltage. If the system voltage has recovered, the disabled
features will operate again as normal
Low Battery Features
Temporarily Turned Off
Displayed when the battery management system determines
that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn the ignition
off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message
will clear once the vehicle has been started and the battery
state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary elec-
trical loads will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off to Save
Battery
95
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
Displayed when a fault with the system has occurred. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Blindspot System Fault
Displayed when the system sensors are blocked. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. See Blind Spot
Monitor (page 196).
Blindspot Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual
Displayed when the system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot
Monitor (page 196).
Cross Traffic Vehicle
Coming From X
Displayed when the blind spot information system and cross
traffic alert system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot
Monitor (page 196).
Cross Traffic Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
Displays when a fault with the system has occurred. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System
Fault
Collision Warning System
ActionMessage
Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the colli-
sion warning system. The system will be disabled. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning
Malfunction
Displayed when the collision warning system radar is blocked
because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/
mud/water in front of the radar. Driver can typically clean the
sensor to resolve. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Collision Warning Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the colli-
sion warning system. The system will be disabled. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not
Available
96
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed and
the vehicle is moving.
X Door Ajar
Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed.
Displays when the luggage compartment is not completely
closed.
Trunk ajar
Displays when the door switches have been disabled.Switches Inhibited
Security Mode
Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the child
locks. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Child Lock Malfunction
Service Required
Displays the factory keypad code after the keypad has been
reset.
Factory Keypad Code
XXXXX
Driver Alert
ActionMessage
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning Rest
Now
Take a rest break soon.Driver Alert Warning Rest
Suggested
Engine
ActionMessage
Engine service is required. Contact your authorized dealer.Engine Fault Service
Now
Displays when the engine temperature is too high. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place and allow to engine to cool. If the
problem persists, contact your authorized dealer. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 244).
High Engine Temper-
ature Stop Safely
97
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Fuel
ActionMessage
Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Hill Start Assist
ActionMessage
Displays when hill start assist is not available. Contact your
authorized dealer. See Hill Start Assist (page 161).
Hill Start Assist Not
Available
Keys and Intelligent Access
ActionMessage
Displayed as a reminder to press the brake while starting the
vehicle.
Press Brake to START
Displayed if the key is not detected by the system. See
Keyless Starting (page 143).
No Key Detected
Displayed when the start/stop button is pressed to shut off
the engine and a Intelligent Access Key is not detected inside
the vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is
Needed
Displayed when the vehicle is in the run ignition state.Run Power Active
This message is displayed when there is a problem with your
vehicle’s starting system. See your authorized dealer for
service.
Starting System Fault
Displayed as a reminder to press the brake and clutch while
starting the vehicle.
Press Brake and Clutch
to Start
Displayed as a reminder to press the clutch in while starting
the vehicle.
Press Clutch to Start
Displays when the starter has exceeded its cranking time in
attempting to start the vehicle.
Cranking Time Exceeded
Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent
access key is programmed to the system.
Key Program Successful
98
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
ActionMessage
Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent
access key has failed to be programmed.
Key Program Failure
Displayed during spare key programming when the maximum
number of keys have been programmed.
Max Number of Keys
Learned
Displayed during spare key programming when not enough
keys have been programmed.
Not Enough Keys
Learned
Displays when the key battery is low. Change the battery as
soon as possible.
Key Battery Low Replace
Soon
Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare key
using two existing keys.
Could Not Program
Integrated Key
Displays to inform the driver that they are exiting the vehicle
and the engine is on.
Engine On
Lane Keeping System
ActionMessage
The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Lane Keeping Sys.
Malfunction Service
Required
The system has detected a condition that has caused the
system to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Tempor-
arily Not Available
The system has detected a condition the requires the wind-
shield to be cleaned to operate properly.
Front Camera Low Visib-
ility Clean Screen
The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Front Camera Malfunc-
tion Service Required
Displayed when the system requests the driver to keep their
hands on the steering wheel.
Keep Hands on Steering
Wheel
99
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine.
Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on with your engine running, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
LOW Engine Oil Pressure
Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.
See Engine Oil Check (page 243).
Change Engine Oil Soon
Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine Oil
Check (page 243).
Oil Change Required
Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system
should be inspected immediately. See Brake Fluid Check
(page 247).
Brake Fluid Level LOW
Displays when the brake system needs servicing. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place. Contact your authorized dealer.
Check Brake System
Displays when the engine coolant temperature is excessively
high.
Engine Coolant Overtem-
perature
Displays when the engine has reduced power in order to help
reduce high coolant temperatures.
Power Reduced to
Lower Engine Temp
Displays to indicate that the vehicle is till in Transport or
Factory mode. This may not allow some features to operate
properly. See your authorized dealer.
Transport / Factory
Mode
Informs the driver that the powertrain needs service due to a
powertrain malfunction.
See Manual
MyKey
ActionMessage
Displayed during key programming when MyKey cannot be
programmed.
MyKey Not Created
Displays when MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive
Safely
Displays when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use and
the MyKey speed limit is on.
Speed Limited to XX
MPH/km/h
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is
on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
100
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
ActionMessage
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is
reached.
Vehicle at Top Speed of
MyKey Setting
Displays when MyKey is active.Check Speed Drive
Safely
Displays when a MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is activated.Buckle Up to Unmute
Audio
Displays when a MyKey is in use and AdvanceTrac is activated.AdvanceTrac On -
MyKey Setting
Displays when a MyKey is in use and Traction control is
activated.
Traction Control On -
MyKey Setting
Displays when a MyKey is in use and park aid is activated.MyKey Park Aid Cannot
be Deactivated
Displayed when the lane keeping aid is on per MyKey settings.Lane Keeping Alert On
MyKey Setting
Park Aid
ActionMessage
Displays when the system has detected a condition that
requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. See Parking
Aid (page 174).
Check Front Park Aid
Displays when the system has detected a condition that
requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. See Parking
Aid (page 174).
Check Rear Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
101
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Park Brake
ActionMessage
Displays when the parking brake is set, the engine is running
and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the
warning stays on after the parking brake is released, contact
your authorized dealer.
Park Brake Engaged
The electric parking brake system has detected a condition
that requires service. See your authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction
Service Now
Displays when the electric parking brake is not set.Park Brake Not Applied
Apply Park Brake
Displays when the electric parking brake did not set.Park Brake Not Applied
Re-Apply
Displays when the electric parking brake is running a diagnostic
check.
Park Brake Maintenance
Mode
Displays when the electric parking brake is set but has not be
released.
Park Brake Use Switch
to Release
Displays when the electric parking brake is set but has not be
released and the vehicle is moving.
Press Brake to Release
Park Brake
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
requires service. See your authorized dealer.
Park Brake Limited
Function Service
Required
Displays when the electric parking brake was not released
causing it to overheat.
Park Brake System
Overheated
Displays when the electric parking brake is set and the vehicle
is started.
Release Park Brake
Displays when the electric parking brake is set.Park Brake Applied
Displays when the electric parking brake is released.Park Brake Released
102
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that
requires service. See your authorized dealer.
Steering Fault Service
Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop the vehicle a
safe place. Contact your authorized dealer.
Steering Loss Stop
Safely
The power steering system has detected a condition within
the power steering system or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact your authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault
Service Required
Remote Start
ActionMessage
Displays as a reminder to turn the key on to drive the vehicle
after a remote start.
To Drive: Turn Key to On
Displays as a reminder to apply the brake and the start button
to drive the vehicle after a remote start.
To Drive: Press Brake
and Start Button
Starting System
ActionMessage
Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to apply the
brake.
Press Brake + Start
Button
Displays when the starter is attempting to start the vehicle.Engine Start Pending
Please Wait
Displays when the pending start has been cancelled.Pending Start Cancelled
103
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire
pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 262).
LOW Tire Pressure
Displays when the tire pressure monitoring system is
malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come
on, contact your authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 262).
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or
your spare tire is in use. For more information on how the
system operates under these conditions, see See Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (page 262). If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
Traction Control
ActionMessage
Displays when the traction control system has been switched
off or on. See Using Traction Control (page 172).
Traction Control Off /
Traction Control On
Displays when a spinout has occurred and the hazard are
activated.
Spinout Detected
Hazards Activated
Transmission
ActionMessage
See your authorized dealer.Transmission Malfunc-
tion Service Now
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a
safe place as soon as it’s possible.
Transmission Over-
heating Stop Safely
The transmission has overheated and needs to cool. Stop in
a safe place as soon as it’s possible.
Transmission Overtem-
perature Stop Safely
See your authorized dealer.Transmission Service
Required
Transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool.Transmission Too Hot
Press Brake
104
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
ActionMessage
Displays when the transmission has overheated and has
limited functionality. See Automatic Transmission (page
158).
Transmission Limited
Function See Manual
Transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before you
drive.
Transmission Warming
Up Please Wait
Displays as a reminder to shift into park.Transmission Not in Park
Displays when the transmission has adjusted the shift
strategy.
Transmission Adjusted
Displays when the transmission is adjusting the shift strategy.Transmission Adapt
Mode
Displays when the transmission shift lever is locked and unable
to select gears.
Transmission Indicate
Mode Lockup On
Displays when the transmission shift lever is unlocked and
free to select gears.
Transmission Indicate
Mode Lockup Off
105
Information Displays
Information Provided by:
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
•AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
•FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an FM station, the weaker the
signal and the weaker the reception.
Distance/Strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station Overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units are designed to play
commercially-pressed 4.75 inch (12
centimeter) audio compact discs only. Due
to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs
may not function correctly when used in
Ford CD players.
Note: CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player as the label may peel and
cause the CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker
rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens
may damage CDs. Please contact your
authorized dealer for further information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only, wiping from the center of the
disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a
circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods of time.
MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 individual tracks and folder
structures work as follows:
•There are two different modes for MP3
disc playback: MP3 track mode
(system default) and MP3 folder
mode.
•MP3 track mode ignores any folder
structure on the MP3 disc. The player
numbers each MP3 track on the disc
(noted by the .mp3 file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3
files may be less depending on the
structure of the CD and exact model
of radio present.
106
Audio System
Information Provided by:
•MP3 folder mode represents a folder
structure consisting of one level of
folders. The CD player numbers all MP3
tracks on the disc (noted by the .mp3
file extension) and all folders
containing MP3 files, from F001
(folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
•Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is
important to understand how the system
reads the structures you create. While
various files may be present, (files with
extensions other than mp3), only files with
the .mp3 extension are played; other files
are ignored by the system. This enables
you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety
of tasks on your work computer, home
computer and your in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and
plays the structure as if it were only one
level deep (all .mp3 files are played,
regardless of being in a specific folder). In
folder mode, the system only plays the
.mp3 files in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC/SATELLITE
RADIO
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, accident and
injury. Ford strongly recommends
that you use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take your
focus off the road. Your primary
responsibility is the safe operation of the
vehicle. We recommend against the use
of any handheld device while driving,
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you
become aware of applicable state and
local laws that may affect use of electronic
devices while driving.
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, your system may look different
than what is shown.
Note: Some features such as SIRIUS
satellite radio may not be available in your
location. Check with your authorized dealer.
107
Audio System
Information Provided by:
CD: Press to access different CD features by pressing CD, then MENU. See
Menu Structure later in this chapter.
A
SOUND: Press to adjust the sound settings for Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade.B
Display screen: Shows audio and SYNC information.C
Number block: Press to store your favorite radio stations, when in radio mode.
When tuned to a station, press and hold a button until sound returns. When in
CD mode, press a button to select a track. In phone mode, use the buttons to
dial a phone number.
D
Function buttons: Press to select different functions of the audio system
depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in.
E
TUNE: Turn to search the frequency band in individual increments.F
Eject: Press to eject a CD.G
Seek: allows you to go to the next station up the radio frequency band or the
next track on a CD.
H
End call: allows you to end a phone call.I
Cursor arrows/OK: Press the arrows to scroll through on-screen choices. Press
OK to confirm the selection.
J
CD slot: Insert a CD.K
Pick-up/Make phone call: Press to either pick-up an incoming phone call or
to make a phone call.
L
Seek: Press to go to the next station down the radio frequency band or the
previous track on a CD.
M
Play/Pause: Press to either play or pause a CD or MP3 track.N
Power/VOL: allows you to switch the audio system on or off by pressing the
button. Turn the dial to adjust the volume.
O
PHONE: Press to access the phone features of the SYNC system by pressing
MENU, then AUX. See SYNC® (page 298).
P
MENU: allows you to access different audio system features. See Menu
Structure later in this chapter.
Q
MEDIA: allows you to access the media features of the SYNC system by
pressing MENU, then AUX. See SYNC® (page 298).
R
Clock: Press to set the time. Use the H and M buttons outside the adjust the
hours and minutes. Press OK to finish. (The clock can also be set by pressing
MENU, then scrolling to the clock settings menu.)
S
RADIO: allows you to access different radio features by pressing RADIO, then
MENU. See Menu Structure later in this chapter.
T
SIRIUS: Press to access different satellite radio features by pressing SIRIUS,
then MENU. See Menu Structure later in this chapter.
U
108
Audio System
Information Provided by:
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
PREMIUM AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, accident and
injury. Ford strongly recommends
that you use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take your
focus off the road. Your primary
responsibility is the safe operation of the
vehicle. We recommend against the use
of any handheld device while driving,
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you
become aware of applicable state and
local laws that may affect use of electronic
devices while driving.
Note: Most of the audio features are
controlled through the MyFord Touch®
system. See MyFord Touch® (page 335).
Power/Volume: Switch the audio system on and off by pressing the button.
Turn to adjust the volume.
A
CD slot: Insert a CD.B
TUNE: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press one of the seek buttons.
The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction. In SIRIUS mode,
select the previous or next channel. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock,
News, etc.), use the SEEK buttons find to the previous or next channel in the
selected category.
C
109
Audio System
Information Provided by:
Eject: Eject a CD.D
Seek/Fast Forward: Press to go to the next track or available radio station.
Press and hold to fast forward through the current track or to quickly advance
through the radio band in individual increments.
E
Seek/Reverse: Press to go to the previous track or available radio station.
Press and hold to reverse through the current track or to quickly reverse through
the radio band in individual increments.
E
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
SONY AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, accident and
injury. Ford strongly recommends
that you use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take your
focus off the road. Your primary
responsibility is the safe operation of the
vehicle. We recommend against the use
of any handheld device while driving,
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you
become aware of applicable state and
local laws that may affect use of electronic
devices while driving.
Note: Most of the audio features are
controlled through the MyFord Touch®
system. See MyFord Touch® (page 335).
110
Audio System
Information Provided by:
Power: Switch the audio system on and off by pressing the button.A
CD slot: Insert a CD.B
Eject: Ejects a CD.C
TUNE +/TUNE -: Search the frequency band in individual increments.D
SOUND: Allows you to adjust the sound settings (Treble, Bass, Midrange, Fade
and Balance).
E
VOL: Turn the dial to adjust the volume.F
SOURCE: Access different audio modes such as AM, FM and A/V Input.G
Seek/Reverse/Fast Forward: In radio mode, select a frequency band and
press one of the seek buttons. The system stops at the first station it finds in
that direction. In SIRIUS mode, select the previous or next channel. If a specific
category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), use the SEEK buttons find to the
previous or next channel in the selected category. In CD mode, select the
previous or next track.
H
Menu Structure
Note: Depending on your system, some
options may appear slightly different, not
at all or on-screen and able to be selected
using the function buttons.
Press MENU.
Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through the options (if active).
Press the right arrow to enter a menu.
Press the left arrow to exit a menu.
111
Audio System
Information Provided by:
Radio
Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the
frequency band.
Manual tune
Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.Scan
Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AM
and FM frequency bands.
Autostore
Select to have the system search by certain music
categories (rock, pop, country, etc).
PTY/Set category
Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This
feature defaults to off. RBDS/RDS must be on for you to
set a category.
RBDS/RDS
SIRIUS
Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.Scan
Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number
(ESN). You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS® to activate, modify or track your account.
Show ESN
Select to view available satellite radio channels. Press OK
to select Tune Channel, Skip Channel or Lock Channel.
Once a channel is skipped or locked, you can only access
it by pressing Direct and entering the channel number.
Locking or unlocking a channel requires your PIN.
Channel guide
Select to view channel categories (pop, rock, news, etc).
If you select a category, seek and scan functions will only
stop on channels in that category.
Set category
Select to enable/disable an alert for a song, artist or team.
The system alerts you when the selection is playing on
another channel. Save up to 20 alerts.
Alerts
Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations.Unlock all stations
Use to restore any channels you previously skipped.Skip no stations
Select to create a PIN which allows you to lock or unlock
channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.
Parental lock (PIN)
112
Audio System
Information Provided by:
Audio Settings
Automatically adjusts the volume to compensate for
speed and wind noise. You can set the system between
off and + 7.
SCV level
Allows you to adjust sound settings such as treble, bass,
middle, fade and balance.
Sound
Optimizes sound quality for the chosen seating position.Occupancy mode
Select to view channel categories (pop, rock, news, etc).
If you select a category, seek and scan functions will only
stop on channels in that category.
Set PTY
Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This
feature defaults to off. RBDS/RDS must be on for you to
set a category.
RBDS/RDS
CD
Select to scan all disc selections.Scan all
Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder.Scan folder
Select to bring soft and loud passages together for a more
consistent listening level.
CD compression
Display Settings
Select to change display brightness.Dimming
Select to display the language in English, French or
Spanish.
Language
Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit
or Celsius.
Temp setting
Clock Settings
Select to set the time.Set time
Select to set the calendar date.Set date
Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour
mode.
12/24 hour
113
Audio System
Information Provided by:
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
WARNINGS
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, accident and
injury. Ford strongly recommends
that you use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take your
focus off the road. Your primary
responsibility is the safe operation of the
vehicle. We recommend against the use
of any handheld device while driving,
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you
become aware of applicable state and
local laws that may affect use of electronic
devices while driving.
For safety reasons, do not connect
or adjust the settings on your
portable music player while the
vehicle is moving.
Store the portable music player in a
secure location, such as the center
console or the glove box, when the
vehicle is in motion. Hard objects may
become projectiles in a collision or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious
injury. The audio extension cable must be
long enough to allow the portable music
player to be safely stored while the vehicle
is in motion.
E149149
The auxiliary input jack (AIJ) allows you to
connect and play music from your portable
music player through the vehicle speakers.
You can use any portable music player
designed for use with headphones. Your
audio extension cable must have male
1/8th-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors at
each end.
1. Make sure the vehicle, radio and
portable music player are turned off
and the transmission is in position P.
2. Plug the extension cable from the
portable music player into the AIJ.
3. Turn on the radio. Select either a tuned
FM station or a CD.
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Turn on your portable music player and
adjust its volume to half its maximum
level.
6. Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN
appears in the display. You should hear
music from your device even if it is low.
7. Adjust the volume on your portable
music player until it reaches the volume
level of the FM station or CD. Do this
by switching back and forth between
the AUX and FM or CD controls.
USB PORT (IF EQUIPPED)
E149148
114
Audio System
Information Provided by:
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See SYNC® (page
298).
MEDIA HUB (IF EQUIPPED)
The media hub is located in the center
console and has the following features:
C
B
A
E142605
A/V inputsA
SD card slotB
USB portsC
See MyFord Touch® (page 335).
SATELLITE RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music,
news, sports, weather, traffic and
entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of
SIRIUS satellite radio channels, visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriuscanada.ca in Canada, or call
SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential Satellite Radio Reception Issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING...to indicate the
interference and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
115
Audio System
Information Provided by:
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E142593
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SIRIUS satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
which begins on the date of sale or lease
of the vehicle. Refer to your authorized
dealer for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at
1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, you can view this
number by pressing SIRIUS and memory
preset 1 at the same time.
Troubleshooting
Possible ActionConditionRadio Display
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
Acquiring
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an igni-
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See your
authorized dealer for service.
Internal module or system
failure present.
Sat Fault/SIRIUS system
failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
Channel is no longer avail-
able.
Invalid Channel
116
Audio System
Information Provided by:
Possible ActionConditionRadio Display
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
Subscription not available
for this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is currently being
blocked. When you move
into an open area, the signal
should return.
Loss of signal from the
SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS
tower to the vehicle
antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel
programming in progress.
Updating
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
539-7474 to reactivate or
resolve subscription issues.
Satellite service has been
deactivated by SIRIUS
Satellite Radio.
Call SIRIUS 1-888-539-7474
Using the channel guide,
unlock or unskip the chan-
nels.
All the channels in the
selected category are
skipped or locked.
No Channels Available
No action required.SIRIUS has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
Subscription Updated
117
Audio System
Information Provided by:
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your vehicle. Adjust
to select the desired fan speed or switch off. If you switch the fan off, the
windshield may fog up. Light bars on the dial illuminate to indicate fan speed.
A
A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. To improve air
conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open
for two to three minutes. Use with recirculated air to improve cooling
performance and efficiency.
B
Power: Press the button to turn the system on and off. When the system is off,
outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle.
C
Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page 126).
D
Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the airflow in your vehicle.
Adjust to select the desired temperature.
E
MAX Defrost: Turn the temperature control dial all the way past the full heat
position to turn on. Outside air is distributed through the windshield air vents,
air conditioning is automatically turned on, the fan is automatically adjusted
to the highest speed and the temperature dial returns to the full heat position.
When MAX defrost is on, recirculated air cannot be selected (to prevent fogging).
The heated rear window is automatically switched on when MAX defrost is
selected.
F
118
Climate Control
Information Provided by:
MAX A/C: Turn the temperature control dial all the way past the full cool
position. Recirculated air is distributed through the instrument panel air vents,
air conditioning is automatically turned on, the fan speed is automatically
adjusted to the highest speed and the temperature dial returns to the full cool
position. This re-cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient.
G
Air distribution control: Press these buttons to turn airflow from the
windshield, instrument panel and footwell vents. Air can be distributed through
any combination of these air vents. At least one of these buttons remain on
while the system is on.
H
Heated seats (if equipped): Turn the driver or passenger heated seats on
and off. See Heated Seats (page 134).
I
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When recirculated air is selected, the air currently in the
passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool
the interior (when used with A/C) and may also reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle. Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the possibility of fogging.
J
Fan speed indicators: Illuminate to indicate fan speed.K
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
119
Climate Control
Information Provided by:
Driver temperature control: Turn to increase or decrease the air temperature
for the driver side of the vehicle. This control also adjusts the passenger side
temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged.
A
A/C: Press the button to turn air conditioning on or off. To improve air
conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open
for two to three minutes. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling
performance and efficiency.
B
- Fan speed control: Press to decrease the volume of air circulated in your
vehicle.
C
Fan speed indicator: Illuminates to indicate fan speed. All of the fan speed
indicators turn off whenever the fan speed is controlled automatically.
D
Airflow distribution control: Press these buttons to turn airflow from the
windshield, instrument panel and footwell vents. Air can be distributed through
any combination of these air vents. At least one of these buttons remain on
while the system is on. Indicators for all of these buttons will turn off whenever
the air distribution is controlled automatically.
E
+ Fan speed control: Press to increase the volume of air circulated in your
vehicle.
F
AUTO: Press the button to turn on fully automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system automatically adjusts
fan speed, air distribution, A/C operation, and outside or recirculated air, to heat
or cool the vehicle to maintain the selected temperature.
G
Passenger temperature control: Turn to increase or decrease the air
temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle.
H
Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page 126).
I
MAX Defrost: Press to switch on. Outside air is distributed through the
windshield air vents, air conditioning is automatically turned on, the fan is
automatically adjusted to the highest speed and the temperature dial returns
to the full heat position. When MAX defrost is on, recirculated air cannot be
selected (to prevent fogging). The heated rear window is automatically switched
on when MAX defrost is selected.
J
Power: Press the button to turn the system on and off. When the system is off,
outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle.
K
Heated seat (if equipped): Turn the driver or passenger heated seats on and
off. See Heated Seats (page 134).
L
120
Climate Control
Information Provided by:
MAX A/C: Turn the temperature control dial all the way past the full cool
position. Recirculated air is distributed through the instrument panel air vents,
air conditioning is automatically turned on, the fan speed is automatically
adjusted to the highest speed and the temperature dial returns to the full cool
position. This re-cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient.
M
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When recirculated air is selected, the air currently in the
passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool
the interior (when used with A/C) and may also reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle. Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the possibility of fogging.
N
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 347).
Driver heated seat control: Turn the driver heated seat on and off. See
Heated Seats (page 134).
A
Driver temperature control: Press + or - to increase or decrease the air
temperature for the driver side of the vehicle. This control also adjusts the
passenger side temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged.
B
121
Climate Control
Information Provided by:
Power: Press to turn the system on and off. When the system is off, outside
air is prevented from entering the vehicle.
C
Fan speed control: Press on either side of the fan icon to increase or decrease
the volume of air circulated in your vehicle.
D
Passenger temperature controls: Press + or - to increase or decrease the
air temperature for the passenger side of the vehicle.
E
Passenger heated seat control: Turn the passenger heated seat on and off.
See Heated Seats (page 134).
F
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When recirculated air is selected, the air currently in the
passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool
the interior (when used with A/C) and may also reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle. Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the possibility of fogging.
G
A/C: Press the button to turn air conditioning on or off. To improve air
conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open
for two to three minutes. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling
performance and efficiency.
H
MAX A/C: Turn the temperature control dial all the way past the full cool
position. Recirculated air is distributed through the instrument panel air vents,
air conditioning is automatically turned on, the fan speed is automatically
adjusted to the highest speed and the temperature dial returns to the full cool
position. This re-cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient.
I
AUTO: Press the button to turn on fully automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system automatically adjusts
fan speed, air distribution, A/C operation, and outside or recirculated air, to heat
or cool the vehicle to maintain the selected temperature.
J
Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page 126).
K
Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and de-mister
vents. This setting can also be used to defog and clear the windshield of a thin
covering of ice.
L
MAX Defrost: Press to switch on. Outside air is distributed through the
windshield air vents, air conditioning is automatically turned on, the fan is
automatically adjusted to the highest speed and the temperature dial returns
to the full heat position. When MAX defrost is on, recirculated air cannot be
selected (to prevent fogging). The heated rear window is automatically switched
on when MAX defrost is selected.
M
122
Climate Control
Information Provided by:
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 347).
AUTO: Press the button to turn on fully automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system automatically adjusts
fan speed, air distribution, A/C operation, and outside or recirculated air, to heat
or cool the vehicle to maintain the selected temperature.
A
CLIMATE: Press to turn the climate control system on and off. When the system
is off, outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle.
B
MAX A/C: Turn the temperature control dial all the way past the full cool
position. Recirculated air is distributed through the instrument panel air vents,
air conditioning is automatically turned on, the fan speed is automatically
adjusted to the highest speed and the temperature dial returns to the full cool
position. This re-cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient.
C
A/C: Press the button to turn air conditioning on or off. To improve air
conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open
for two to three minutes. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling
performance and efficiency.
D
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When recirculated air is selected, the air currently in the
passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool
the interior (when used with A/C) and may also reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle. Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the possibility of fogging.
E
123
Climate Control
Information Provided by:
Passenger temperature control: Allows the passenger to set their
temperature independent of the driver temperature. Press + or - to increase or
decrease the air temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle when in dual
zone mode.
F
Fan speed control: Press the small fan icon or large fan icon to decrease or
increase the volume of air circulated in your vehicle.
G
Driver temperature control: Press + or - to increase or decrease the air
temperature inside the vehicle. This control also adjusts the passenger side
temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged.
H
MAX Defrost: Press to switch on. Outside air is distributed through the
windshield air vents, air conditioning is automatically turned on, the fan is
automatically adjusted to the highest speed and the temperature dial returns
to the full heat position. When MAX defrost is on, recirculated air cannot be
selected (to prevent fogging). The heated rear window is automatically switched
on when MAX defrost is selected.
I
Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page 126).
J
Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and de-mister
vents. This setting can also be used to defog and clear the windshield of a thin
covering of ice.
K
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: A small amount of air may be felt
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Manual Climate Control
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
distribution control to the windshield air
vents position.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
not necessary. The system automatically
make adjustments to heat or cool the cabin
to your temperature set-point as quickly as
possible.. For the system to function
efficiently, the instrument panel and side air
vents should be fully open.
Note: At low ambient temperatures with
AUTO selected, the air flow is directed to
the windshield and side window vents and
fan speed may be reduced until the engine
remains warms up.
124
Climate Control
Information Provided by:
Heating the Interior Quickly
Vehicle With Automatic Climate ControlVehicle With Manual Climate Control
Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the highest
speed setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
highest setting (not MAX defrost).
2
Select the footwell air vents using the
air distribution buttons.
3
Recommended Settings for Heating
Vehicle With Automatic Climate ControlVehicle With Manual Climate Control
Adjust the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature to a comfortable
setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings (not
MAX defrost).
2
Select the footwell air vents and wind-
shield air vents position using the air
distribution buttons.
3
Cooling the Interior Quickly
Vehicle With Automatic Climate ControlVehicle With Manual Climate Control
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
MAX A/C position.
1
Drive with the windows open for 2-3
minutes.
2
125
Climate Control
Information Provided by:
Recommended Settings for Cooling
Vehicle With Automatic Climate ControlVehicle With Manual Climate Control
Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the middle speed
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature to a comfortable
setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.
2
Select the instrument panel air vents
using the air distribution buttons.
3
Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather
Vehicle With Automatic Climate ControlVehicle With Manual Climate Control
Press the defrost button.Select the instrument panel and footwell
air vents positions through the air distri-
bution control.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Press the A/C button.2
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
3
Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.
4
Direct the instrument panel side air vents
toward the side windows.
5
Close the instrument panel center vents.6
HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED)
Heated Rear Window
Note: The ignition must be switched on to
use this feature.
Press the button to clear the rear window
of thin ice and fog. Press the button again
within 10 minutes to switch it off. It
switches off automatically after 10
minutes, or when you switch the ignition
off.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp
objects to clean the inside of the rear
window or to remove decals from the
inside of the rear window. This may
cause damage to the heated grid lines
and will not be covered by your
warranty.
126
Climate Control
Information Provided by:
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or attempt to readjust the
mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These
actions could cause damage to the glass
and mirrors.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
Both mirrors are heated to remove ice, mist
and fog when the heated rear window is
switched on.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter. It is located behind the glove box.
The particulate filtration system is
designed to reduce the concentration of
airborne particles such as dust, spores and
pollen in the air being supplied to the
interior of your vehicle.
Note: A cabin air filter must be installed at
all times to prevent foreign objects from
entering the system. Running the system
without a filter in place could result in
degradation or damage to the system.
The particulate filtration system gives you
and your passengers the following
benefits:
•It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
•It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
•It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
The filter should be replaced at regular
intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 420).
For additional cabin air filter information,
or to replace the filter, see an authorized
dealer.
REMOTE START (IF EQUIPPED)
The climate control system adjusts the
cabin temperature during remote start.
You cannot adjust the system during
remote start operation. Turn the ignition
on to return the system to its previous
settings. You can now make adjustments.
You need to turn certain
vehicle-dependent features back on, such
as:
•heated seats
•heated mirrors
•heated rear window.
You can adjust the settings using the
information display controls. See
Information Displays (page 83).
Automatic Settings
You can set the climate control to operate
in AUTO mode through the information
display setting: Remote Start > Climate
Control > Heater-A/C > Auto. The climate
control system automatically sets the
interior temperature to 72°F (22°C).
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C).
In moderate weather, the system either
heats or cools (based on previous
settings). The rear defroster, heated
mirrors and heated seats are not
automatically turned on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high
(if available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display). The rear defroster
and heated mirrors are automatically
turned on.
127
Climate Control
Information Provided by:
Last Settings
You can set the climate control to operate
using the last climate control settings
through the information display setting:
Remote Start > Climate Control >
Heater–A/C > Last Settings. The climate
control system automatically uses the
settings last selected before the vehicle
was turned off.
Heated and Cooled Devices
The climate control system controls other
heated and cooled devices inside the
vehicle. These devices (if available, and
selected to AUTO in the information
displays) may also be switched on during
remote start. Heated devices are typically
switched on during cold weather, and
cooled devices during hot weather.
128
Climate Control
Information Provided by:
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seat back reclined too far
can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a collision. Always
sit upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
Do not recline the seat back as this
can cause the occupant to slide
under the safety belt, resulting in
serious injury in the event of a collision.
Do not place objects higher than the
seat back to reduce the risk of
serious injury in the event of a
collision or during heavy braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and air bags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a collision.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
•Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
•Do not recline the seat back more than
30 degrees.
•Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
•Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 inches
(25 centimeters) between your
breastbone and the air bag cover.
•Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
•Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
•Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a collision. Do not
adjust the head restraint when your vehicle
is moving.
The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied.
129
Seats
Information Provided by:
WARNINGS
Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a collision.
Note: Adjust the seat back to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Front seat and rear seat outboard head
restraints
E138642
Rear center head restraint
E138645
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint
A
Two steel stemsB
Guide sleeve adjust and unlock
button
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until in
locks.
Tilting Head Restraints
The front head restraints have a tilting
feature for extra comfort. To tilt the head
restraint, do the following:
130
Seats
Information Provided by:
E144727
1. Adjust the seat back to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivoting it
forward again will then release it to the
rearward, un-tilted position.
MANUAL SEATS
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver's seat or seat
back when your vehicle is moving.
Rock the seat backward and forward
after releasing the lever to make sure
that it is fully engaged.
Reclining the seat back can cause an
occupant to slide under the seat's
safety belt, resulting in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.
The manual front seats may consist of:
A B C D
E144631
a bar to move the seat backward
and forward
A
a control to adjust the lumbar of
the seat back
B
a lever to adjust the height of the
seat
C
a lever to adjust the angle of the
seat back
D
POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver's seat or seat
back when your vehicle is moving.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seat back before returning
it to the original position.
131
Seats
Information Provided by:
Power Lumbar (If Equipped)
E144633
MEMORY FUNCTION (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
Before activating the seat memory,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of
obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.
Do not use the memory function
when your vehicle is moving.
This feature will automatically recall the
position of the driver's seat and power
mirrors. The memory control is located on
the driver’s door.
132
Seats
Information Provided by:
E142554
Saving a Pre-Set Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to
your desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired pre-set
button until you hear a single chime.
Up to three pre-set memory positions may
be saved. A memory pre-set may be saved
at any time.
Recalling a Pre-Set Position
Press and release the pre-set button
associated with your desired driving
position. The seat and mirrors will move to
the position stored for that pre-set.
Note: A pre-set memory position can only
be recalled when the ignition is off, or when
the transmission selector lever is in position
P or N (and your vehicle is not moving) if
the ignition is on.
A pre-set memory position can also be
recalled by pressing the unlock button on
your remote control or intelligent access
key if it is linked to a pre-set position, or by
a driver door handle unlock with an
intelligent access key present.
Linking a Pre-Set Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent
Access Key
Your vehicle can save the pre-set memory
positions for up to three remote controls
or intelligent access (IA) keys.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired pre-set
button for about five seconds. A chime
will sound after about two seconds.
Continue holding until a second chime
is heard.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking. A single chime will sound.
To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
Note: To stop seat movement during a
recall, press any driver seat adjustment
control, any of the memory buttons, or any
mirror control switch.
Seat movement will also stop if you move
your vehicle.
Note: If more than one linked remote
control or IA key is in range, the memory
function will move to the settings of the first
key stored.
Easy Entry and Exit Function
If the easy entry and exit feature is enabled,
this feature automatically moves the driver
seat position rearward up to five
centimeters when the transmission
selector lever is in position P and the key
is removed or the keyless start ignition is
turned off.
The driver seat will return to the previous
position when the key is put in the ignition
or the keyless start ignition is activated.
133
Seats
Information Provided by:
The easy entry and exit feature can be
turned on or off using the driver
information display.
REAR SEATS
To lower the seat back(s) from inside the
vehicle, do the following:
E144634
1. Pull the handle to release the seat
back.
2. Push the seat back forward.
Note: Your vehicle may have split seat
backs that must be folded individually.
HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
•Place heavy objects on the seat.
•Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
•Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E146941
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
Warmer settings are indicated by more
indicator lights.
134
Seats
Information Provided by:
REAR SEAT ARMREST
E144635
Fold the armrest down to use the armrest
and cupholder.
135
Seats
Information Provided by:
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are
programming. Do not program the system
with the vehicle in the garage.
Do not use the system with any
garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Erasing the function
button codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any of
the three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the
current settings. See Erasing the function
button codes later in this section.
E142657
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door
opener with a three-button transmitter
that is integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. As well as being programmed for
garage doors, the system transmitter can
be programmed to operate entry gate
operators, security systems, entry door
locks and home or office lighting.
Additional system information can be
found online at www.homelink.com or by
calling the toll-free help line on
1-800-355-3515.
Programming
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
Note: During programming, the hand-held
transmitter may stop transmitting. If this
occurs press and hold the function button
on the visor while you press and release the
hand-held transmitter every two seconds.
The indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly once the radio frequency signal is
accepted.
E142658
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Hold the garage door hand-held
transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8
centimeters) away from the button you
want to program.
136
Universal Garage Door Opener
Information Provided by:
3. Press and hold both the button on the
visor you want to program and the
hand-held transmitter button until the
indicator light on the visor changes
from flashing slowly to rapidly, then
release.
4. Press and hold the function button you
programmed for 5 seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, observe the indicator
light.
If the indicator light stays on, programming
is complete. Press and release the
programmed button to activate the door.
If the indicator light on the visor flashes
rapidly for two seconds then turns to a
constant light, follow the steps below.
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor.
Note: You will have 30 seconds to
complete the next step.
2. Return to your vehicle.
E142658
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program on the visor for 2
seconds, then release. Repeat this step.
Depending on the brand of garage door
opener you may need to repeat this
sequence a third time.
To program additional buttons repeat
steps one through four.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or
1-800-355-3515.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E142660
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
approximately 20 seconds until the
indicator lights above the buttons flash
rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons
are erased.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the
Programming section.
137
Universal Garage Door Opener
Information Provided by:
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode®
2 Garage Door Opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter
must already be programmed to operate
with the garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the
transmitter into programming mode.
E142661
Red indicator lightA.
Green indicator lightB.
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on
the hand-held transmitter for 10
seconds. The indicator light will change
from green to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches
(2–8 centimeter) of the button on the
visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want
to program. The indicator light on the
visor will flash rapidly when the
programming is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit
for up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not
program within 30 seconds the Genie
transmitter will need to be pressed again. If
the Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the
indicator light turns off before pressing the
button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed
successfully, the Genie transmitter must
be changed out of program mode. To do
this:
1. Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds.
The indicator light will change from red
to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the
indicator light will turn green.
Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.
E142662
1. Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until
both blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
138
Universal Garage Door Opener
Information Provided by:
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will
flash.
Note: The next two steps must be
completed in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode
2 hand-held transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both indicator
lights on the garage door opener motor
unit should now flash purple.
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which
time both buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased, and
the indicator light should blink slowly to
indicate the device is in train mode when
any of the three HomeLink buttons are
pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device
not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
139
Universal Garage Door Opener
Information Provided by:
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket (if equipped). Improper use
of the lighter can cause damage not
covered by your warranty, and can result
in fire or serious injury.
Note: If used when the engine is not
running, the battery will discharge. There
may be insufficient power to restart your
engine.
Note: Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Do not use the power point for
operating a cigar lighter element.
Note: Improper use of the power point can
cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Run the engine for full capacity use of the
power point. To prevent the battery from
being discharged:
•Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the engine is not
running.
•Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when the vehicle is parked
for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be found:
•in the front of the center console
•inside the center console storage bin
•on the rear of the center console.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices
plugged in the power point whenever
the device is not in use. Do not use
any extension cord with the 110 volt AC
power point, since it will defeat the safety
protection design. Doing so my cause the
power point to overload due to powering
multiple devices that can reach beyond
the 150 watt load limit and could result in
fire or serious injury.
Note: Keep the engine running to use the
power point.
E143941
The power point is used for powering
electrical devices that require up to 150
watts. It is located on the rear of the center
console.
When the indicator light, located on the
power point, is:
•on — power point is ready to supply
power.
•off — power point power supply is off;
ignition is not on.
•flashing — power point is in fault mode.
140
Auxiliary Power Points
Information Provided by:
The power point temporarily turns off
power if the 150 watt limit is exceeded. It
can also switch to a fault mode when it is
overloaded, overheated, or shorted. Unplug
your device and switch the ignition off then
on for overloading and shorting conditions.
Let the system cool off, then turn the
ignition off then on for an overheating
condition.
The power point is not designed for electric
devices such as:
•Cathode ray tube type televisions
•Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools, compressor-driven refrigerators,
etc.
•Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment, measuring equipment, etc.
•Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply:
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
141
Auxiliary Power Points
Information Provided by:
CENTER CONSOLE
WARNING
Use only soft cups in the cupholder.
Hard objects can injure you in a
collision.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
variety of features.
AB
C
E143942
CupholderA
Storage compartment with
auxiliary power point, auxiliary
input jack, USB port and media
hub
B
Auxiliary power pointC
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E75193
Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.
142
Storage Compartments
Information Provided by:
GENERAL INFORMATION
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles
(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This
is because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or
other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
IGNITION SWITCH
E72128
0 (off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.
Note: To switch the engine off when your
vehicle is moving, move the transmission
selector lever to position N. Use the brakes
to bring the vehicle to a safe stop. After your
vehicle has stopped, switch the engine off
and move the transmission selector lever to
position P. Turn the key to position 0 or I.
I (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
vehicle battery to lose charge.
II (on) - All electrical circuits operational.
Warning lamps and indicators are
illuminated.
III (start) - cranks the engine. Release the
key as soon as the engine starts.
KEYLESS STARTING
WARNING
The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal
objects or electronic devices such as
mobile phones.
143
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Information Provided by:
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.
Switching the Ignition On
(Accessory Mode)
E144447
Press the START button once. It is located
on the instrument panel near the steering
wheel. All electrical circuits and
accessories are operational and the
warning lamps and indicators illuminate.
Starting Your Vehicle
Carry out the following steps to start your
vehicle:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Move the transmission selector lever
to position P.
3. Press the START button.
The system does not function if:
•The key frequencies are jammed.
•The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do
the following:
E147165
1. Place the remote in the backup slot
inside the center console.
2. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal, then the START button to
switch the ignition on and start your
vehicle.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
1. Move the transmission selector lever
to position P.
2. Press the START button once.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits
warning lamps and indicators will be
switched off.
Note: If the engine is left unattended for 30
minutes, the ignition and engine
automatically shut down.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
1. Press and hold the START button for
one second, or press it three times
within two seconds.
2. Move the transmission selector lever
to position N and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
3. When your vehicle has stopped, move
the transmission selector lever to
position P and switch the ignition off.
144
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Information Provided by:
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not lock, but higher effort
will be required. When the ignition is
switched off, some electrical circuits,
warning lamps and indicators may also be
off.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to
restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of
switching it off, even if a valid key is not
present.
Within 20 seconds of switching your
vehicle off, press the brake pedal and press
the start button. After 20 seconds have
expired, you can no longer start your
vehicle without the key present inside the
vehicle.
Once your vehicle has started, it remains
running until you press the start button,
even if a valid key has not been detected.
If you open and close a door while your
vehicle is running, the system searches for
a valid key. You cannot be able to start
your vehicle if a valid key is not detected
within 20 seconds.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
Your vehicle is equipped with a feature that
automatically shuts down the engine if it
has been idling for an extended period of
time. The ignition also turns off in order to
save battery power. Before the engine
shuts down, a message appears in the
information display showing a timer
counting down from 30 seconds. If the
driver does not intervene within 30
seconds, the engine shuts down. Another
message appears in the information
display to inform the driver that the engine
has shut down in order to save fuel. Start
the vehicle as you normally do.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: The automatic engine shutdown
feature cannot be permanently switched
off. When it is temporarily switched off, it
turns on at the next ignition cycle.
The engine shutdown can be stopped, or
the timer reset, at any point before the 30
second countdown has expired by doing
any of the following:
•The timer can be reset when some kind
of interaction with the vehicle is
detected (such as pressing the brake
pedal or accelerator pedal)
•The shutdown feature can be
temporarily switched off any time the
ignition is on (for the current ignition
cycle only). Use the information display
to do so. See Information Displays
(page 83).
•During the countdown prior to engine
shutdown, you are prompted to press
the OK or RESET button (depending
on your type of information display) to
temporarily switch the feature off (for
the current ignition cycle only).
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases to warm up the engine. If the
engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have your vehicle checked
by your authorized dealer.
Before starting the engine check the
following:
•Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
•Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
•Make sure the parking brake is on.
145
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Information Provided by:
•Move the transmission selector lever
to position P.
•Turn the ignition key to position II.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Move the transmission selector lever
to position P or N.
3. Start the engine. The engine may
continue cranking for up to 15 seconds
or until it starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
first try, wait for a short period of time and
try again.
If you have difficulty starting the engine
when the temperature is below -13°F
(-25°C), press the accelerator pedal
slightly and try again.
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
3. Move the transmission selector lever
to position P.
4. Start the engine.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon
monoxide is present in exhaust fumes.
Take precautions to avoid its dangerous
effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and the leave the
engine idling for long periods of time, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
•Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5
centimeters)
•Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk
of electrical shock.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120 volt AC electrical
source.
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
•Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
able to be used outdoors, in cold
146
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Information Provided by:
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
•Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
•Do not use multiple extension cords.
•Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
•Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
•Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
•Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
•Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
The engine block heater plug is located in
a housing in the left fog lamp bezel. Open
the hinged, circular door and make sure
the receptacle terminals are clean and dry
prior to use. Clean them with a dry cloth if
necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It will achieve
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation. If
you use the heater longer than three hours,
this will not improve system performance
and will use unnecessary electricity.
147
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Information Provided by:
START-STOP (IF EQUIPPED)
The system helps reduce fuel consumption
by automatically shutting off and restarting
your vehicle’s engine while the vehicle is
stopped. The engine will restart
automatically when you release the brake
pedal. In some situations, your vehicle may
restart automatically, for example:
•To maintain interior comfort
•To recharge the battery
WARNINGS
The engine may restart
automatically if required by the
system.
Switch the ignition off before
opening the hood or performing any
maintenance. Failure to do so may
result in serious injuries due to automatic
engine restart.
Always switch the ignition off before
leaving your vehicle, as the system
may have turned the engine off, but
the ignition will still be on and automatic
restart may occur.
The Auto StartStop system status is
available at a glance within the information
display. See Information Displays (page
83).
Enabling Auto StartStop
The system is automatically enabled every
time you start your vehicle if the following
conditions are met:
•The Auto StartStop button is not
pressed (not illuminated).
•Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed
of 3 mph (4 km/h) after the vehicle has
been initially started.
•Your vehicle is stopped.
•Your foot is on the brake pedal.
•The transmission selector lever is in
position D.
•There is adequate brake vacuum.
•The interior compartment has been
cooled or warmed to an acceptable
level.
•The front windshield defroster and rear
window defroster are off.
•The steering wheel is not turned rapidly
or is not at a sharp angle.
•The vehicle is not on a steep road
grade.
•The battery is within optimal operating
conditions (battery state of charge and
temperature in range).
•The engine coolant is at operating
temperature.
•Elevation is below approximately
10000 feet (3048 m).
•Ambient temperature is moderate
(40°F–95°F) (4°C–35°C).
Note: The system allows multiple
successive Auto StopStart events, but it
may not operate in conditions of heavy
traffic or in extended low speed operation.
Note: The green Auto StartStop
indicator light on the instrument
cluster will illuminate to indicate
when the automatic engine stop occurs.
E146361
Note:If the instrument cluster is
equipped with a grey Auto
StartStop indicator light, it is
illuminated when automatic engine stop
is not available due to one of the above
noted conditions.
Automatic Engine Restart
Any of the following conditions will result
in an automatic restart of the engine:
•Your foot is removed from the brake
pedal.
•You press the accelerator pedal.
148
Unique Driving Characteristics
Information Provided by:
•You press the accelerator and the
brake pedal at the same time.
•The transmission selector lever is
moved from position D.
•Your vehicle is moving.
•The interior compartment does not
meet customer comfort when air
conditioning or heat is on.
•Fogging of the windows could occur
and the air conditioning is on.
•The battery is not within optimal
operating conditions.
•The maximum engine off time is
exceeded.
•When you press the Auto StartStop
button while the engine is stopped
automatically.
•Either the front defroster is turned to
the MAX setting or the rear defroster is
turned on.
Any of the following conditions may result
in an automatic restart of the engine:
•The blower fan speed is increased or
the climate control temperature is
changed.
•An electrical accessory is turned on or
plugged in.
Disabling Auto StartStop
P
R
N
D
S
E146362
Press the Auto StartStop button located
on the center console to switch the system
off. The button will illuminate. The system
will only be deactivated for the current
ignition cycle. Press the button again to
restore Auto StartStop function.
Note: If the Shift to P, Restart Engine
message appears and the amber Auto
StartStop indicator light is flashing,
automatic restart is not available. The
vehicle must be restarted manually. See
Information Displays (page 83).
149
Unique Driving Characteristics
Information Provided by:
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel
capless fuel system), do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump
nozzle can produce static electricity,
which can cause a fire if fuel is
pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.
Fuel ethanol and gasoline may
contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the filler neck.
Never smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is
extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
•Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
•Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
•Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
visible for hours.
•Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead
to eye and respiratory tract irritation.
In severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause
serious illness and permanent injury.
•Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper
medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
•Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes
skin irritation.
•Be particularly careful if you are taking
“Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin
contact could cause an adverse
reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious
personal injury or sickness may result.
If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly
wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately
if you experience an adverse reaction.
150
Fuel and Refueling
Information Provided by:
FUEL QUALITY
Note: We recommend that you use only
high quality fuel without additives or other
engine treatments.
Choosing the Right Fuel
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED
fuel blended with a maximum of 15%
ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85),
diesel fuel, fuel-methanol, leaded fuel or
any other fuel because it could damage or
impair the emission control system.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended may cause vehicle damage,
a loss of vehicle performance and repairs
may not be covered under warranty.
Octane Recommendations
2.5L engine
Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump
(R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 is
recommended. Some fuel stations offer
fuels posted as regular with an octane
rating below 87, particularly in high altitude
areas. Fuels with octane levels below 87
are not recommended.
1.6L and 2.0L EcoBoost® engines
Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump
(R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 is
recommended. Some stations offer fuels
posted as "Regular" with an octane rating
below 87, particularly in high altitude areas.
Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not
recommended. Premium fuel will provide
improved performance and is
recommended for severe duty usage such
as trailer tow.
Do not be concerned if your engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it
knocks heavily while you are using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, see your
authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
REFUELING
WARNINGS
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel
fire can cause severe injuries.
Read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling.
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from fuel.
Stay outside your vehicle and do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.
Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
Do not use personal electronic
devices while refueling.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling
an ungrounded fuel container:
•Place approved fuel container on the
ground.
•Do not fill a fuel container while it is in
the vehicle (including the cargo area).
•Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container while filling.
•Do not use a device that would hold
the fuel pump handle in the fill position.
151
Fuel and Refueling
Information Provided by:
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System
WARNING
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Put the vehicle in P (Park) and turn the
ignition off.
2. Open the fuel filler door.
E156032
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully
into the fuel system, and leave the
nozzle fully inserted to open both doors
until you are done pumping. Hold
handle higher during insertion for easier
access.
E154765
4. After you are done pumping fuel, slowly
remove the fuel filler nozzle—allow
about five to ten seconds after
pumping fuel before removing the fuel
filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel
to drain back into the fuel tank and not
spill onto the vehicle.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if
overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the
tank to the point that the fuel is able to
bypass the fuel filler nozzle. The overfilled
fuel may run down the drain located below
and in front of the fuel filler door.
If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed,
a Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may
appear on the instrument cluster.
At the next opportunity, do the following:
1. Safely pull off the road.
2. Put the vehicle in P (Park) and turn the
ignition off.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove
any visible debris from the fuel fill
opening.
4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the
fuel fill funnel provided with the vehicle
several times to allow the inlet to close
properly. This will dislodge any debris
preventing the inlet from sealing.
If this action corrects the problem, the
message may not reset immediately. It
may take several driving cycles for the
message to turn off. A driving cycle
consists of an engine start-up (after four
or more hours with the engine off) followed
by city or highway driving. Continuing to
drive with the message on may cause the
service engine soon lamp to turn on as
well.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Avoid running out of fuel because this
situation may have an adverse effect on
powertrain components.
152
Fuel and Refueling
Information Provided by:
If you have run out of fuel:
•You may need to cycle the ignition from
off to on several times after refueling
to allow the fuel system to pump the
fuel from the tank to the engine. On
restarting, cranking time will take a few
seconds longer than normal. With
keyless ignition, just start the engine.
Crank time will be longer than usual.
•Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8 liters) of
fuel is enough to restart the engine. If
the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep
grade, more than 1 gallon (3.8 liters)
may be required.
•The service engine soon indicator may
come on. For more information on the
service engine soon indicator, See
Warning Lamps and Indicators
(page 79).
Refilling With a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of portable
fuel containers or aftermarket
funnels into the capless fuel system.
This could damage the fuel system and its
seal, and may cause fuel to run onto the
ground instead of filling the tank, which
could result in serious personal injury.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels; they
will not work with the capless fuel system
and can damage it. The included funnel has
been specially designed to work safely with
your vehicle.
When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a
portable fuel container, use the funnel
included with the vehicle.
1. Locate the portable funnel that comes
with your vehicle.
E157279
2. Slowly insert the funnel into the
capless fuel system.
E157280
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the
portable fuel container.
4. When done, clean the funnel or
properly dispose of it. Extra funnels can
be purchased from your authorized
dealer if you choose to dispose of the
funnel.
153
Fuel and Refueling
Information Provided by:
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Note: The amount of usable fuel in the
empty reserve varies and should not be
relied upon to increase driving range. When
refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge
indicates empty, you might not be able to
refuel the full amount of the advertised
capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty
reserve still present in the tank.
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. Do not rely on this fuel for
driving. The usable capacity of the fuel
tank is the amount of fuel that can be put
into the tank after the gauge indicates
empty. The advertised capacity is the total
fuel tank size – it is the combined usable
capacity plus the empty reserve.
Filling the Tank
For consistent results when filling the fuel
tank:
•Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
•Use the same fill rate
(low-medium-high) each time the tank
is filled.
•Allow no more than two automatic
click-offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) of
driving (this is your engine’s break-in
period); a more accurate measurement is
obtained after 2000 miles - 3000 miles
(3200 kilometers - 4800 kilometers). Also,
fuel expense, frequency of fill ups or fuel
gauge readings are not accurate ways to
measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the
amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three to five tank fill ups,
fill the fuel tank and record the current
odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing
miles traveled by gallons used (For
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then
divide by kilometers traveled).
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of the
vehicle’s fuel economy under current
driving conditions. Additionally, keeping
records during summer and winter show
how temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, lower temperatures mean lower
fuel economy.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system,
which can start a fire.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
154
Fuel and Refueling
Information Provided by:
Your vehicle is equipped with various
emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your
vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust
emission standards. To make sure that the
catalytic converter and other emission
control components continue to work
properly:
To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
continue to work properly:
•Use only the specified fuel listed.
•Avoid running out of fuel.
•Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
•Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system
If other than Ford, Motorcraft® or
Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service
of components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be equivalent
to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement
Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
that monitors the engine’s emission control
system. This system is commonly known
as the on-board diagnostics system
(OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle
continues to meet government emission
standards. The OBD-II system also assists
your authorized dealer in properly servicing
your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate. Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have been
properly closed. See Refueling (page
151).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
155
Fuel and Refueling
Information Provided by:
These temporary malfunctions can be
corrected by filling the fuel tank with good
quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill
inlet or letting the electrical system dry out.
After three driving cycles without these or
any other temporary malfunctions present,
the service engine soon indicator should
stay off the next time the engine is started.
A driving cycle consists of a cold engine
startup followed by mixed city/highway
driving. No additional vehicle service is
required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness, and
lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
Testing
Some state/provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, the vehicle may need
to be serviced. See On-Board Diagnostics.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, the vehicle is considered not ready
for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for
I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check
the emission control system during normal
driving. A complete check may take several
days. If the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing, the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway
driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway/highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight
hours without starting the engine. Then,
start the engine and complete the above
driving cycle. The engine must warm up to
its normal operating temperature. Once
started, do not turn off the engine until the
above driving cycle is complete. If the
vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the
above driving cycle will have to be
repeated.
156
Fuel and Refueling
Information Provided by:
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Using the Clutch
Note: Failure to fully press the clutch pedal
to the floor may cause increased shift
efforts, prematurely wear transmission
components or damage the transmission.
Note: Do not drive with your foot resting on
the clutch pedal or use the clutch pedal to
hold your vehicle at a standstill while
waiting on a hill. These actions will reduce
the life of the clutch.
E144954
Manual transmission vehicles have a
starter interlock that prevents cranking the
engine unless the clutch pedal is fully
pressed.
To start the vehicle:
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully set.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, then
put the gearshift lever in the neutral
position.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press the brake pedal and move the
gearshift lever to the desired gear; 1
(First) or R (Reverse).
5. Release the parking brake, then slowly
release the clutch pedal while slowly
pressing on the accelerator.
During each shift, the clutch pedal must
be fully pressed to the floor. Make sure the
floor mat is properly positioned so it
doesn't interfere with the full extension of
the clutch pedal.
Recommended Shift Speeds
Note: Do not downshift into 1 (First) when
your vehicle is moving faster than 15 mph
(24 km/h). This will damage the clutch.
Recommended upshifts (for best fuel
economy) when accelerating
Shift from:
15 mph (24 km/h)1 - 2
25 mph (40 km/h)2 - 3
40 mph (64 km/h)3 - 4
45 mph (72 km/h)4 - 5
50 mph (80 km/h)5 - 6
Reverse
Note: Make sure that your vehicle is at a
complete stop before you shift into R
(Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the
transmission.
1. Press the clutch pedal to the floor to
disengage clutch.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the
neutral position and wait at least three
seconds before shifting into R
(Reverse).
3. Shift into R (Reverse) by raising the
collar below the gearshift knob up, then
moving the lever fully to the left, then
forward.
157
Transmission
Information Provided by:
E99067
Note: The gearshift lever can only be
moved to R (Reverse) by raising the collar
below the gearshift knob up before shifting
to reverse. This is a lockout feature which
protects the transmission from accidentally
engaging R (Reverse) when intending to
select 1 (First).
If R (Reverse) is not fully engaged, press
the clutch pedal down and return the
gearshift to the neutral position. Release
the clutch pedal for a moment, then raise
the collar and shift to R (Reverse) again.
Parking Your Vehicle
WARNING
Do not park your vehicle in Neutral,
it may move unexpectedly and injure
someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set
the parking brake fully.
To park your vehicle:
1. Apply the brake and shift into the
neutral position.
2. Fully apply the parking brake, hold the
clutch pedal down, then shift into 1
(First).
3. Turn the ignition off.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
(IF EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition
to the off position and remove the key
whenever you leave your vehicle.
Do not apply the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously
for more than three seconds will limit
engine rpm, which may result in difficulty
maintaining speed in traffic and could lead
to serious injury.
Understanding the Positions of
Your Automatic Transmission
Putting your vehicle in gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Press and hold the button on the front
of the gearshift lever.
3. Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear.
4. Release the button and your
transmission will remain in the selected
gear.
P
R
N
D
S
E142628
158
Transmission
Information Provided by:
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the front wheels from turning.
Come to a complete stop before putting
your vehicle into and out of P (Park)
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the
vehicle will move backward. Always come
to a complete stop before shifting into and
out of R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the
vehicle can be started and is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down while in this
position.
D (Drive)
The normal driving position for the best
fuel economy. Transmission operates in
gears one through six.
S (Sport)
Moving the gearshift lever to S (Sport):
•Provides additional grade (engine)
braking and extends lower gear
operation to enhance performance for
uphill climbs, hilly terrain or
mountainous areas. This will increase
engine RPM during engine braking.
•Provides additional lower gear
operation through the automatic
transmission shift strategy.
•Gears are selected more quickly and
at higher engine speeds.
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission (If Equipped)
Your SelectShift automatic transmission
gives you the ability to manually change
gears if you'd like. To use SelectShift, move
the gearshift lever into S (Sport).
E142629
If equipped with the toggle on the gearshift
lever:
•Press the (+) button to upshift.
•Press the (-) button to downshift.
If equipped with steering wheel paddles:
•Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
•Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.
E144821
Note: After you have assumed manual
control with SelectShift your vehicle will
remain in this mode until you return the
gearshift lever from S (Sport), back to D
(Drive).
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating (recom-
mended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
15 mph (24 km/h)1 - 2
25 mph (40 km/h)2 - 3
159
Transmission
Information Provided by:
Upshifts when accelerating (recom-
mended for best fuel economy)
40 mph (64 km/h)3 - 4
45 mph (72 km/h)4 - 5
50 mph (80 km/h)5 - 6
The instrument cluster will display the
selected gear that you are currently in.
SelectShift will automatically make some
shifts for you in the event that your engine
speed is running at too high, or to low an
RPM.
Note: Engine damage may occur if
excessive engine revving is held without
shifting.
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are
working.
When doing this procedure, you will
be taking the vehicle out of park
which means the vehicle can roll
freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always fully set the parking
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use
wheel chocks if appropriate.
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized
dealer.
Note: See your authorized dealer as soon
as possible if this procedure is used.
Note: For some markets this feature will be
disabled.
Use the brake shift interlock lever to move
the gearshift lever from the park position
in the event of an electrical malfunction or
if your vehicle has a dead battery.
Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition off before performing this
procedure.
E155984
1. Remove the side panel on the right side
of the gearshift lever.
E155985
2. Locate the access hole.
160
Transmission
Information Provided by:
E155983
3. Insert the screwdriver (or similar tool)
into the access hole and press the lever
foreword while pulling the gearshift
lever out of the P (Park) position and
into the N (Neutral) position.
4. Remove the tool and reinstall the
panel.
5. Start the vehicle and release the
parking brake.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature is designed to increase
durability and provide consistent shift feel
over the life of the vehicle. A new vehicle
or transmission may have firm and/or soft
shifts. This operation is considered normal
and will not affect function or durability of
the transmission. Over time, the adaptive
learning process will fully update
transmission operation. Additionally,
whenever the battery is disconnected or a
new battery installed, the strategy must
be relearned.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
it may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
HILL START ASSIST (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking
brake and move the transmission selector
lever into position P (Park).
You must remain in your vehicle once
you have activated the system.
During all times, you are responsible
for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and
intervening, if required.
If the engine is revved excessively, or
if a malfunction is detected, the
system will be deactivated.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle will
remain stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows you time to move your
foot from the brake to the accelerator
pedal. The brakes are released
automatically once the engine has
developed sufficient drive to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
is an advantage when pulling away on a
slope, (for example from a car park ramp,
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
a parking space).
The system will activate automatically on
any slope which can result in significant
vehicle rollback.
161
Transmission
Information Provided by:
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep
the brake pedal pressed.
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system will be
activated automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle will remain
on the slope without rolling away for
approximately two or three seconds.
This hold time will automatically be
extended if you are in the process of
driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
brakes will be released automatically.
162
Transmission
Information Provided by:
USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
All-wheel drive uses all four wheels to
power the vehicle. This increases traction,
enabling you to drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel
drive vehicle cannot. The AWD system is
active all the time and requires no input
from the operator.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for
off-road use. The AWD feature gives your
vehicle some limited off-road capabilities
in which driving surfaces are relatively level,
obstruction-free and otherwise similar to
normal on-road driving conditions.
Operating your vehicle under other than
those conditions could subject the vehicle
to excessive stress which might result in
damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
Note: A warning message will be displayed
in the information display when an AWD
system fault is present See Information
Messages (page 91). An AWD system fault
will cause the AWD system to default to
front-wheel drive only mode. When this
warning message is displayed, have your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer
Note: A warning message will be displayed
in the information display if the AWD system
has overheated See Information
Messages (page 91). This condition may
occur if the vehicle was operated in extreme
conditions with excessive wheel slip, such
as deep sand. To resume normal AWD
function as soon as possible, stop the
vehicle in a safe location and stop the
engine for at least 10 minutes. After the
engine has been restarted and the AWD
system has adequately cooled, the warning
message will turn off and normal AWD
function will return.
Do not use a spare tire of a different size
other than the tire provided. If the
mini-spare tire is installed, the AWD
system may disable automatically and
enter front-wheel drive only mode to
protect driveline components. This
condition will be indicated by a warning in
the information display See Information
Messages (page 91). If there is a warning
message in the information display from
using the spare tire, this indicator should
turn off after reinstalling the repaired or
replaced normal road tire and cycling the
ignition off and on. It is recommended to
reinstall the repaired or replaced road tire
as soon as possible. Major dissimilar tire
sizes between the front and rear axles
could cause the AWD system to stop
functioning and default to front-wheel
drive or damage the AWD system.
Driving In Special Conditions With
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on
sand, snow, mud and rough roads and have
operating characteristics that are
somewhat different from conventional
vehicles, both on and off the highway.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect
overheating of the engine.
Basic operating principles in special
conditions
•Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
•Be extremely careful when driving on
pavement made slippery by loose sand,
water, gravel, snow or ice.
163
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the
Pavement
•If your vehicle goes off the edge of the
pavement, slow down, but avoid severe
brake application, ease the vehicle
back onto the pavement only after
reducing your speed. Do not turn the
steering wheel too sharply while
returning to the road surface.
•It may be safer to stay on the apron or
shoulder of the road and slow down
gradually before returning to the
pavement. You may lose control if you
do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
•It often may be less risky to strike small
objects, such as highway reflectors,
with minor damage to your vehicle
rather than attempt a sudden return to
the pavement which could cause the
vehicle to slide sideways out of control
or rollover. Remember, your safety and
the safety of others should be your
primary concern.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition
to the lock position and remove the key
whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized
dealer.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35
mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail
and injure a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a few minutes or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur or the
engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it
may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
Control™, it may be beneficial to
disengage the AdvanceTrac® with Roll
Stability Control™ system while
attempting to rock the vehicle.
Emergency Maneuvers
•In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be
made, remember to avoid
"over-driving" your vehicle (i.e., turn the
steering wheel only as rapidly and as
far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering will
result in less vehicle control, not more.
Additionally, smooth variations of the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
pressure should be utilized if changes
in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid
abrupt steering, acceleration or braking
which could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover and/or personal injury. Use all
available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
•In the event of an emergency stop,
avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel
movements.
•If the vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (i.e., from concrete
to gravel) there will be a change in the
way the vehicle responds to a
maneuver (steering, acceleration or
braking). Again, avoid these abrupt
inputs.
164
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not drive your AWD vehicle in deep
sand. This will cause the AWD system to
overheat. After the system has cooled
down, normal AWD function will return.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect
overheating of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle
momentum can work against you and
cause the vehicle to become stuck to the
point that assistance may be required from
another vehicle. Remember, you may be
able to back out the way you came if you
proceed with caution.
Mud and Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth; avoid water higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom
of the hubs (for trucks) (if possible) and
proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets
wet, the vehicle may stall.
E142667
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by moving your vehicle slowly
while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction
in slick mud. As when you are driving over
sand, apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of the vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts causes an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in
water, the axle lubricant and AWD PTU
(Power Transfer Unit) lubricant should be
checked and changed if necessary.
E143950
“Tread Lightly” is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities
in our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and
the Bureau of Land Management in
encouraging you to help preserve our
national forest and other public and private
lands by “treading lightly.”
165
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing
traction, slipping sideways and possibly
rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill,
determine beforehand the route you will
use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill
without seeing what conditions are on the
other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill
without the aid of an observer.
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should always
try to drive straight up or straight down.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround
because you might roll over. It is better to
back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually shift to a
lower gear. When descending a steep hill,
avoid sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. The front wheels have to be
turning in order to steer the vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump”
the brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery
conditions that require tire chains or
cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of
the vehicle slides while cornering, steer in
the direction of the slide until you regain
control of the vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
driveline damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD
vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like
any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
166
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an
AWD vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice,
it won’t stop any faster, because as in other
vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.
Do not become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. Since your vehicle is
equipped with a four wheel (ABS), do not
“pump” the brakes. See Hints on Driving
With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 168). for
more information on the operation of the
anti-lock brake system (ABS).
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty and durable load
carrying capability. For this reason, Ford
Motor Company strongly recommends that
you do not make modifications such as
adding or removing parts (such as lowering
kits or stabilizer bars) or by using
replacement parts not equivalent to the
original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise
the center of gravity can make it more likely
the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss
of control. Ford Motor Company
recommends that caution be used with
any vehicle equipped with a high load or
device (such as ladder or luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect driver and passenger safety.
Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis
components is recommended if the vehicle
is subjected to off-highway usage.
167
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out and should
be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the
vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder
in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an
authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 79).
E144522
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 79).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Turn the engine off, shift to position
P and apply the parking brake, and then
inspect the accelerator pedal for any
interferences. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake
rapidly by measuring the rate at which you
press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal, and can reduce stopping
distances in critical situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily
illuminates when the ignition is
turned on. If the light does not
illuminate during start up, remains on or
flashes, the anti-lock braking system may
be disabled and may need to be serviced.
E144522
If the system is disabled, normal
braking is still effective. If the
brake warning lamp illuminates
with the parking brake released, have your
brake system serviced immediately.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal will pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake
pedal. You may also hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.
The ABS will not eliminate the risks when:
•you drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you
•your vehicle is hydroplaning
•you take corners too fast
•the road surface is poor.
168
Brakes
Information Provided by:
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
The electric parking brake replaces the
conventional handbrake. The operating
switch is located in the center console.
WARNING
Always set the parking brake and
leave your vehicle with the
transmission selector lever in
position P (automatic transmission) or in
position 1 or position R(manual
transmission).
Note: When you apply the electric parking
brake in certain conditions e.g. on a steep
hill, the electric parking brake may reapply
the brakes within three to ten minutes.
Note: You may notice various noises when
you apply and release the electric parking
brake. This is normal and no cause for
concern.
Parking on a hill (vehicles with a
manual transmission)
If you park your vehicle facing uphill, move
the transmission selector lever to position
1 and turn the steering wheel away from
the curb. If you park your vehicle facing
downhill, move the transmission selector
lever to position R and turn the steering
wheel toward the curb.
Applying the electric parking brake
WARNING
If the brake system warning lamp
does not illuminate or flashes, there
could be a problem with your electric
parking brake. Have the system checked
by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Note: The brake system warning lamp will
illuminate for ten seconds, if the ignition is
turned off after the electric parking brake
has been applied, or the electric parking
brake has been applied after the ignition has
been turned off.
Note: The electric parking brake will not
automatically apply. You must apply the
electric parking brake using the electric
parking brake switch.
E147230
Pull the switch up to apply the electric
parking brake.
The brake system warning lamp will
illuminate to confirm that the electric
parking brake has been applied. See
Information Displays (page 83).
Applying the electric parking brake
when the vehicle is moving
WARNINGS
Applying the electric parking brake
while moving will result in use of the
anti-lock braking system. Do not use
the electric parking brake system when the
vehicle is moving unless the normal brake
system is unable to stop the vehicle.
169
Brakes
Information Provided by:
WARNINGS
With the exception of emergency
conditions (for example, the brake
pedal does not work or is blocked),
do not apply the electric parking brake
while the vehicle is moving. On bends, or
poor road surfaces or weather conditions,
emergency braking can cause the vehicle
to skid out of control or off the road.
If you apply the electric parking brake when
your vehicle is moving, the brake system
warning lamp will illuminate and a warning
chime will sound. See Information
Displays (page 83).
If your vehicle speed is above 4 mph (6
km/h), the braking force is applied as long
as the switch is pulled. Releasing or
pressing the switch or pressing the
accelerator pedal will stop the braking
force.
Releasing the electric parking
brake
E147231
You can release the electric parking brake
either manually by pressing the switch or
automatically.
Manual release
WARNING
If the brake system warning light
remains illuminated or flashes after
you have released the parking brake,
there could be a problem with you braking
system. Have the system checked by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
You can manually release the electric
parking brake by turning the ignition on,
pressing the brake pedal and then pressing
the electric parking brake switch.
When the electric parking brake is released,
the brake system warning lamp will turn
off.
Driving with a Trailer
Depending on the grade and the weight of
the trailer, your vehicle and trailer may roll
backwards slightly when you start on a
slope. To prevent this from happening, do
the following:
1. Pull the switch up and hold it in this
position.
2. Drive your vehicle, then release the
switch when you notice that the engine
has developed sufficient driving force.
Automatic release - drive away release
Note: On automatic transmission vehicles,
the driver's door must be closed and the
driver's safety belt must be fastened before
this feature will operate.
Note: If the electric parking brake warning
lamp stays illuminated, the electric parking
brake will not automatically release. You
must release the electric parking brake using
the electric parking brake switch.
Note: The engine must be running and the
accelerator pedal must be pressed before
the drive away release feature will operate.
170
Brakes
Information Provided by:
Note: On manual transmission vehicles, if
the transmission selector lever is in position
N when you release the clutch pedal and
press the accelerator pedal, the electric
parking brake will release automatically.
Note: On manual transmission vehicles, the
clutch pedal must be fully pressed before
the drive away release feature will operate.
Drive as normal using the accelerator and
clutch pedals and the electric parking brake
will be automatically released.
The brake system warning lamp will go off
to confirm that the electric parking brake
has been released.
Note: The electric parking brake drive away
release makes starting on a hill easier. This
feature will release the parking brake
automatically when the vehicle has
sufficient drive force to move up the hill. To
assure drive away release when starting
uphill, press the accelerator pedal quickly.
Battery With No Charge
WARNING
You will not be able to apply or
release the electric parking brake if
the battery is low or has no charge.
If the battery is low or has no charge, use
jumper cables and a booster battery.
171
Brakes
Information Provided by:
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
In certain situations (e.g. stuck in snow or
mud), turning the traction control off may
be beneficial as this allows the wheels to
spin with full engine power. Turn off the
traction control system through the
information display. See General
Information (page 83).
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
WARNING
If a failure has been detected within
the AdvanceTrac system, the
stability control light will illuminate
steadily. Verify that the AdvanceTrac
system was not manually disabled through
the information display. If the stability
control light still illuminates steadily, have
the system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle
with AdvanceTrac disabled could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
E138639
The stability control light
temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and flashes
when a driving condition activates the
stability system.
The stability control off light
temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and stays on
when the traction control system is turned
off.
When the traction control system is turned
off or on, a message appears in the
information display showing system status.
172
Traction Control
Information Provided by:
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving
braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics
of the vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the AdvanceTrac
system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and
adversely affect the AdvanceTrac system.
Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker
as far as possible from the front center
console, the tunnel, and the front seats in
order to minimize the risk of interfering with
the AdvanceTrac sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac system
could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
AdvanceTrac system is an indication that
at least some of the tires have exceeded
their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operator’s ability to control the
vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. If your AdvanceTrac
system activates, SLOW DOWN.
The AdvanceTrac Control system helps
you keep control of your vehicle when on
a slippery surface. The electronic stability
control portion of the system helps avoid
skids and lateral slides and roll stability
control helps avoid a vehicle rollover. The
traction control system helps avoid drive
wheel spin and loss of traction. See Using
Traction Control (page 172).
E72903
AA
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without AdvanceTrac
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with AdvanceTrac
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
AdvanceTrac®
The system automatically activates when
you start your engine. The AdvanceTrac
system cannot be completely turned off,
but the ESC system is disabled when the
transmission selector lever is in position R.
The traction control portion of the system
can be turned off independently. See
Using Traction Control (page 172).
173
Stability Control
Information Provided by:
PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, please
read and understand the limitations
of the system as contained in this
section. Sensing is only an aid for some
(generally large and fixed) objects when
moving in reverse on a flat surface at
parking speeds. Traffic control systems,
inclement weather, air brakes, and external
motors and fans may also affect the
function of the sensing system; this may
include reduced performance or a false
activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in R (Reverse) and
when using the sensing system.
This system is not designed to
prevent contact with small or moving
objects. The system is designed to
provide a warning to assist the driver in
detecting large stationary objects to avoid
damaging the vehicle. The system may not
detect smaller objects, particularly those
close to the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large
trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks
and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the system, may
create false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
MyKey®, it is possible to prevent turning the
sensing system off. See MyKey® (page 49).
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of the
bumper area. The system turns on
automatically whenever the ignition is
switched on.
When receiving a detection warning, the
radio volume is reduced to a
predetermined level. After the warning
goes away, the radio volume returns to the
previous level.
The system can be switched off through
the information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once the
transmission is shifted into R. See General
Information (page 83).
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
display and does not allow the driver to
switch the faulted system on. See
Information Messages (page 91).
Rear Sensing System
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in R. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the rate of the
audible warning increases. When the
obstacle is fewer than 10 inches (25
centimeters) away, the warning sounds
continuously. If a stationary or receding
object is detected farther than 10 inches
(25 centimeters) from the side of the
vehicle, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an
object approaching, the warning sounds
again.
174
Parking Aids
Information Provided by:
E130178
A
Coverage area of up to 6 feet (2
meters) from the rear bumper.
There is decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
A
The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in R:
•and moving toward a stationary object
at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less
•but not moving, and a moving object is
approaching the rear of the vehicle at
a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less
•and moving at a speed of less than 3
mph (5 km/h) and a moving object is
approaching the rear of the vehicle at
a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Front Sensing System
The front sensors are active when the
gearshift is in any position other than P
(Park) or N (Neutral) and the vehicle speed
is below 6 mph (10 km/h).
E130382
A
Coverage area of up to 27 inches
(70 centimeters) from the front
of the vehicle and about 6–14
inches (15–35 centimeters) to
the side of the front end of the
vehicle. Refer to the reverse
sensing section for details on
coverage area.
A
The system sounds an audible warning
when obstacles are near either bumper in
the following manner:
•Objects detected by the front sensors
are indicated by a high-pitched tone
from the front radio speakers.
•Objects detected by the rear sensors
are indicated by a lower pitched tone
from the rear radio speakers.
•The sensing system reports the
obstacle which is closest to the front
or rear of the vehicle. For example, if
an obstacle is 24 inches (60
centimeters) from the front of the
vehicle and, at the same time, an
obstacle is only 16 inches (40
centimeters) from the rear of the
vehicle, the lower pitched tone sounds.
•An alternating warning sounds from
the front and rear if there are objects
at both bumpers that are closer than
10 inches (25 centimeters).
175
Parking Aids
Information Provided by:
For specific information on the reverse
sensing portion of the system, refer to that
section.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING
This system is designed to be a
supplementary park aid. It may not
work in all conditions and is not
intended to replace the driver’s attention
and judgment. The driver is responsible for
avoiding hazards and maintaining a safe
distance and speed, even when the system
is in use.
Note: The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening if required.
The system detects an available parallel
parking space and automatically steers
the vehicle into the space (hands-free)
while you control the accelerator, gearshift
and brakes. The system visually and
audibly instructs you to park the vehicle.
The system may not function correctly if
something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space (i.e. a
pedestrian or cyclist) or if the edge of the
neighboring parked vehicle is high from the
ground (i.e. a bus, tow truck or flatbed
truck).
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
in heavy rain or other conditions that cause
disruptive reflections.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves.
The system should not be used if:
•a foreign object (i.e. bike rack or trailer)
is attached to the front or rear of the
vehicle or at another location close to
the sensors.
•an overhanging object (i.e. surfboard)
is attached to the roof.
•the front bumper or side sensors are
damaged (i.e. in a collision) or
obstructed by a foreign object (i.e. front
bumper cover).
•a mini-spare tire is in use.
Using Active Park Assist
E146186
Press the button located on the
center console near the gearshift
lever.
The touch screen displays a message and
a corresponding graphic to indicate it's
searching for a parking space. Use the turn
signal to indicate which side of the vehicle
you want the system to search on.
Note: If the turn signal is not on, the system
automatically searches on the vehicle's
passenger side.
A
E130107
176
Parking Aids
Information Provided by:
When a suitable space is found, the touch
screen displays a message and a chime
sounds. Slow down and stop at
approximately position (A), then follow
the instructions on the touch screen.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times in the maneuver.
Note: Vehicles with overhanging loads (e.g.
a bus or a truck), street furniture and other
items may not be detected by active park
assist. You must make sure the selected
space is suitable for parking.
Note: The vehicle should be driven as
parallel to other vehicles as possible while
passing a parking space.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (i.e. if the vehicle
detects multiple spaces while you are
driving, it offers the last one).
Note: If driven above approximately 20
mph (35 km/h), the touch screen shows a
message to alert you to reduce vehicle
speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking
Space
Note: If vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10
km/h), the system switches off and you
need to take full control of the vehicle.
Note: If a maneuver is interrupted before
completion, the system switches off. The
steering wheel position will not indicate the
actual position of the steering and you have
to full take control of the vehicle.
With your hands off the wheel (and
nothing obstructing its movement) and
the transmission in R (Reverse), the vehicle
steers itself as instructions to safely move
the vehicle back and forward in the space
are displayed in the touch screen. While
reversing, the touch screen displays a
message instructing you to check your
surroundings (for safety reasons) and to
back-up slowly, accompanied by a
corresponding graphic.
E130108
When you think the vehicle has enough
space in front and behind it, or you hear a
solid tone from the parking aid, bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
When automatic steering is finished, the
touch screen displays a message indicating
that the active park assist process is done.
The driver is responsible for checking the
parking job and making any necessary
corrections.
177
Parking Aids
Information Provided by:
Deactivating the Park Assist
Feature
The system can be deactivated manually
by:
•pressing the active park assist button
•grabbing the steering wheel
•driving above approximately 20 mph
(35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an
active park search
•driving above 6 mph (10 km/h) during
automatic steering
•turning off the traction control system.
Certain vehicle conditions can also
deactivate the system, such as:
•Traction control has activated on a
slippery or loose surface.
•There is an anti-lock brake system
activation or failure.
•Something touches the steering wheel.
If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message is displayed, followed
by a chime. Occasional system messages
may occur in normal operation. For
recurring or frequent system faults, contact
an authorized dealer to have your vehicle
serviced.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off
The system does not offer a particular space
Something may be contacting the front bumper or side sensors
There is not enough room on both sides of the vehicle in order to park
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking
space
The vehicle is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) from the parking space
The vehicle is closer than 16 in. (40 cm) from neighboring parked vehicles
The transmission is in R (Reverse); the vehicle must be moving forward to detect a
parking space
178
Parking Aids
Information Provided by:
The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space
The vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (i.e. rolling forward
when R [Reverse] is selected)
The transmission is in R (Reverse); the vehicle must be moving forward to detect a
parking space
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning the vehicle
properly
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly
The vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space. The system performs best when
you drive the same distance past the parking space
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (i.e. not inflated correctly, improper
size, or of different sizes)
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities
A parked vehicle has a high attachment (i.e. salt sprayer, snowplow, moving truck bed,
etc.)
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (i.e. driving from a heated garage
into the cold, or after leaving a car wash)
REAR VIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your
reaction time to stop the vehicle.
WARNINGS
Use caution when using the rear
video camera and the trunk is ajar. If
the trunk is ajar, the camera will be
out of position and the video image may
be incorrect. All guidelines (if enabled)
have been removed when the trunk is ajar.
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off while in R
(Reverse). Make sure the vehicle is
not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind the vehicle.
The image will be displayed in either in the
rear view mirror or the display in the center
of the instrument panel.
179
Parking Aids
Information Provided by:
During operation, lines appear in the
display which represent your vehicle’s path
and proximity to objects behind the vehicle.
E142435
The camera is located on the trunk.
Using the Rear View Camera
System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place
the transmission in R (Reverse).
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
•Active guidelines: Show the intended
path of your vehicle when reversing.
•Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
•Centerline (If applicable): Helps align
the center of your vehicle with an
object (i.e. a trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in R (Reverse)
and the luggage compartment is ajar, no
rear view camera features are displayed.
Note: If the image comes on while the
transmission is not in R (Reverse), have the
system inspected by your authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what is being towed behind your vehicle.
This might not provide adequate coverage
as it usually provides in normal operation
and some objects might not be seen. In
some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear
once the trailer tow connector is engaged.
Note: The camera may not operate
correctly under the following conditions:
•Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
•The camera's view is obstructed by
mud, water or debris. Clean the lens
with a soft, lint-free cloth and
non-abrasive cleaner.
•The rear of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
To access any of the rear view camera
system settings, make the following
selections in the touch screen when the
transmission is not in R (Reverse):
•Menu > Vehicle > Rear View Camera
After changing a system setting, the touch
screen shows a preview of the selected
features.
Guidelines and the Centerline
Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines
are only available when the transmission is
in R (Reverse).
Note: The centerline is only available if
Active or Fixed guidelines are on.
180
Parking Aids
Information Provided by:
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelinesA
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
Active guidelines are only shown with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guidelines
toward an intended path. If the steering
wheel position is changed while reversing,
the vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines are not
shown when the steering wheel position
is straight.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of the vehicle.
Selectable settings for this feature are
ACTIVE + FIXED, FIXED and OFF.
Visual Park Aid Alert
Note: Visual park alert is only available
when the transmission is in R (Reverse).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights which appear on top of the video
image when an object is detected by the
reverse sensing system. The alert highlights
the closest object detected. The reverse
sensing alert can be disabled and if visual
park aid alert is enabled, highlighted areas
are still displayed.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full
area behind the vehicle is not shown.
Be aware of your surroundings when
using the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in R (Reverse).
Note: When manual zoom is enabled, only
the centerline is shown.
181
Parking Aids
Information Provided by:
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind the vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in R
(Reverse). When the transmission is
shifted out of R (Reverse), the feature
automatically turns off and must be reset
when it is used again.
Selectable settings for this feature are OFF,
Level 1, Level 2 or Level 3. Press the up and
down arrows to change the view. The
selection level appears between the
buttons (i.e. Level 1). The default setting
for the manual zoom is OFF.
Rear Camera Delay
The camera image will be displayed upon
shifting out of R (Reverse) until the vehicle
speed reaches 5 mph (8 km/h). This will
occur when the rear camera delay feature
is on, or until the radio button is selected.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF. The default setting for the rear
camera delay is OFF.
182
Parking Aids
Information Provided by:
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal.
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control in heavy
traffic, on winding roads or when the
road surface is slippery.
When you are going downhill, your
speed may increase above the set
speed. The system will not apply the
brakes. Change down a gear to assist the
system in maintaining the set speed.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below your set speed while
driving uphill.
E144500
The cruise controls are located on the
steering wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
E71340
The indicator will appear in the
instrument cluster.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
The indicator will change colors in the
instrument cluster.
Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, you will return to the speed that you
previously set.
•Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
•Press and release SET+ or SET-. The
set speed will change in approximately
1 mph (2 km/h) increments.
•Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
and release SET+.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. You
will not erase the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You will erase the set speed if you
switch the system off.
Press and release OFF or switch the
ignition off.
183
Cruise Control
Information Provided by:
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to
changing road conditions, especially
when using adaptive cruise control.
Adaptive cruise control cannot replace
attentive driving. Failing to follow any of
the warnings below or failing to pay
attention to the road may result in a
collision, serious injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control is not a
collision warning or avoidance
system.
Adaptive cruise control will not
detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Adaptive cruise control will not
detect pedestrians or objects in the
roadway.
Adaptive cruise control will not
detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.
Do not use the adaptive cruise
control when entering or leaving a
highway, in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Do not use in poor visibility,
specifically fog, rain, spray or snow.
Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
The system is designed to automatically
adjust your speed to maintain a proper
distance between you and the vehicle in
front of you in the same lane. The driver
can select from one of four GAP settings,
the controls are located on the steering
wheel.
The system is designed to automatically
adjust your speed to maintain a proper
distance between you and the vehicle in
front of you in the same lane. The driver
can select from one of four GAP settings,
the controls are located on the steering
wheel.
E144501
The controls for using your cruise control
are located on the steering wheel.
Switching the System On
Press and release ON.
E144529
The information display will
show the grey indicator light.
E82311
The current gap setting and SET will also
display.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+. The vehicle
speed will be stored in the memory.
184
Cruise Control
Information Provided by:
3. The information display will show a
green indicator light, current gap
setting and desired set speed.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
E82312
5. A lead vehicle graphic will illuminate if
there is a vehicle detected in front of
you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the set speed displayed in the
information display may vary slightly from
the speedometer.
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle in front of
you, the vehicle will not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor will the
vehicle always decelerate quickly enough
to avoid a collision without driver
intervention. Always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failing to do so may result in a
collision, serious injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar
sensor. In some cases there may be
no warning or the warning may be delayed.
The driver should always apply the brakes
when necessary. Failing to do so may result
in a collision, serious injury or death.
Note: The brakes may emit a sound when
they are being modulated by the adaptive
cruise control system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed will adjust
automatically to maintain a preset gap
distance. The distance setting is
adjustable.
The lead vehicle graphic will be
illuminated.
The vehicle will maintain a constant
distance between the vehicle ahead until:
•the vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed
•the vehicle in front of you moves out of
your lane or out of view
•the vehicle speed falls below 12 mph
(20 km/h)
•a new gap distance is set.
The vehicle brakes will be automatically
applied to slow the vehicle to maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front. The
maximum braking which is applied by the
system is limited and can be overridden by
applying the brakes.
If the system predicts that its maximum
braking level will not be sufficient, an
audible warning will sound while the
system continues to brake. This is
accompanied by a heads-up display; a red
warning bar illuminating on the windshield.
You should take immediate action.
Setting the Gap Distance
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
185
Cruise Control
Information Provided by:
E144502
Gap decreaseA
Gap increaseB
The distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you can be decreased or
increased by pressing the gap control.
E82312
The selected gap will be displayed in the
message center as shown by the bars in
the graphic. Four gap distance settings are
available.
Dynamic behaviorFollowing distance
at 60 mph (100 km/
h)
Following distanceGraphic display
(bars between
vehicles)
Sporty29 yards (28 m)1 second1 bar
Normal44 yards (42 m)1.5 seconds2 bars
Normal56 yards (53 m)1.9 seconds3 bars
Comfort66 yards (64 m)2.3 seconds4 bars
Each time the vehicle is restarted, the last
chosen gap for the current driver will be
automatically selected.
Disengaging the System
Press the brake pedal or press CNCL. The
last set speed will be displayed with a
strikethrough but will not be erased.
Overriding the System
WARNING
Whenever the driver is overriding the
system by pressing the accelerator
pedal, the system will not
automatically apply the brakes to maintain
separation from any vehicle ahead.
The set speed and gap distance can be
overridden by pressing the accelerator
pedal.
E144529
When you override the system,
the green indicator light is
illuminated, and the follow
vehicle is not shown in the
information display.
The system will resume operation when
you release the accelerator pedal. The
vehicle speed will decrease to the set
speed, or a lower speed if following a
slower vehicle.
186
Cruise Control
Information Provided by:
Changing the Set Speed
•Accelerate or brake to the desired
speed, then press and release SET+.
•Press and hold SET+ or SET- until the
desired set speed is shown on the
information display. The vehicle speed
will gradually change to the selected
speed.
•Press and release SET+ or SET-. The
set speed will change in approximately
1 mph (2 km/h) increments.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed will display continuously in the
information display while the system is
active.
Resuming the Set Speed
Note: Resume should only be used if you
are aware of the set speed and intend to
return to it.
Press and release RES. The vehicle will
return to the previously set speed. The set
speed will display continuously in the
information display while the system is
active.
Low Speed Automatic
Cancellation
The system is not functional at vehicle
speeds below 12 mph (20 km/h). An
audible alarm will sound and the
automatic braking will be released if the
vehicle drops below this speed.
Hilly Condition Usage
Note: An audible alarm will sound and the
system will shut down if it is applying brakes
for an extended period of time. This allows
the brakes to cool down. The system will
function normally again when the brakes
have cooled down.
You should select a lower gear position
when the system is active in situations
such as prolonged downhill driving on
steep grades (i.e., driving in mountainous
areas). Additional engine braking is needed
in these situations to reduce the load on
the vehicle’s regular brake system to
prevent them from overheating.
Switching the System Off
Note: The set speed memory is erased
when you switch off the system.
Press and release OFF or turn off the
ignition.
Detection Issues
The radar sensor has a limited field of
vision. It may not detect vehicles at all or
detect a vehicle later than expected in
some situations. The lead vehicle graphic
will not illuminate if a vehicle is not
detected in front of you.
187
Cruise Control
Information Provided by:
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. These vehicles can only be
detected once they have moved
fully into your lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
C
In these cases the system may brake late
or unexpectedly. The driver should stay
alert and intervene when necessary.
If the front end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may be
altered causing missed or false vehicle
detections. See your authorized dealer to
have the radar checked for proper
coverage and operation.
System Not Available
Conditions which can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
•a blocked sensor
•high brake temperature
•a failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
WARNINGS
Do not use the system when towing
a trailer with brake controls.
Aftermarket trailer brakes will not
function properly when the system is
activated because the brakes are
electronically controlled. Failing to do so
may result in loss of vehicle control, which
could result in serious injury.
Do not use tires sizes other than
those recommended because this
can affect the normal operation of
the system. Failing to do so may result in
a loss of vehicle control, which could result
in serious injury.
E145632
188
Cruise Control
Information Provided by:
A message will display if the radar signals
from the sensor have been obstructed. The
sensor is located behind a fascia cover
near the driver side of the lower grille. A
vehicle ahead cannot be detected and the
system will not function when the radar
signals are obstructed. The following table
lists possible causes and actions for this
message being displayed.
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is no
longer obstructed
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
but the message remains in the display.
Do not use the system in these condition
because it may not detect, warn, or respond
to potential collisions.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the
radar signals.
Do not use the system in these condition
because it may not detect, warn, or respond
to potential collisions.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface
of the road may interfere with the radar
signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise
control.
You are in a desert or remote area with no
other vehicles and no roadside objects.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is
possible to get a blockage warning and not
be blocked. This can happen, for example,
when driving in sparse rural or desert
environments. A false blocked condition
will either self clear or clear after a key
cycle.
Switching to Normal Cruise
Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control will not brake
due to slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode is selected and
apply the brakes when necessary.
You can manually change from adaptive
cruise control to normal cruise control
through the information display.
E71340
The cruise control indicator light
will replace the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if normal
cruise control is selected. The gap setting
will not be displayed, the system will not
automatically respond to lead vehicles and
automatic braking will not be activated.
The system will default to adaptive cruise
control when the engine is started.
189
Cruise Control
Information Provided by:
DRIVER ALERT (IF EQUIPPED)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING
The driver alert system is designed
to aid you. It is not intended to
replace your attention and judgment.
You are still responsible to drive with due
care and attention.
Note: The system will store the on/off
setting in the information display menu
through ignition cycles.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
will be active at speeds above 40 mph (64
km/h).
Note: The system works as long as one lane
marking can be detected by the camera.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
Note: The system may not be available in
poor weather or other low visibility
conditions.
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using
a chime and a message in the cluster
display.
USING DRIVER ALERT
Switching the system on and off
By default, the system is enabled. You may
disable or re-enable the system by
selecting Setting then Driver Assist then
Driver Alert in the menu. When activated,
the system will monitor your alertness level
based upon your driving behavior in relation
to the lane markings, and other factors.
System Warnings
Note: Note: The system will not issue
warnings below approximately 40 mph (65
km/h).
The warning system is in two stages. At
first the system issues a temporary warning
that you need to take a rest. This message
will only appear for a short time. If the
system detects further reduction in driving
alertness, another warning may be issued
which will remain in the information display
for a longer time. Press OK on the steering
wheel control to clear the warning
System Display
When active the system will run
automatically in the background and only
issue a warning if required. You can view
the status at any time using the
information display. See General
Information (page 83).
The alertness level is shown by six steps
in a colored bar.
E131358
Alertness level is fine, no rest required.
E131359
Alertness level is critical, indicating that a
rest should be taken as soon as safely
possible.
190
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
The status bar will travel from left to right
as the calculated alertness level
decreases. As the rest icon is approached
the color turns from green to yellow and
then finally red when a rest break should
be taken.
•Green - No rest required.
•Yellow - First (temporary) warning.
•Red - Second warning.
Note: If you have recently received a
warning; you should consider resting, even
if the current assessment is with the typical
range.
Note: The alertness level will be shown in
grey if the camera sensor cannot track the
road lane markings or if the vehicle speed
drops below approximately 40 mph (65
km/h).
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
•Switching the ignition off and on.
•Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
This system is designed to be a
supplementary driving aid. It is not
intended to replace the driver’s
attention, and judgment, or the need to
apply the brakes. This system does NOT
activate the brakes automatically. Failure
to press the brake pedal to activate the
brakes may result in a collision.
The collision warning system with
brake support cannot help prevent
all collisions. Do not rely on this
system to replace driver judgment and the
need to maintain distance and speed.
Note: The system does not detect, warn or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
to the rear or sides of the vehicle.
Note: The collision warning system is active
at speeds above approximately 5 mph (8
km/h).
E156130
This system is designed to alert the driver
of certain collision risks. A radar detects if
your vehicle is rapidly approaching another
vehicle traveling in the same direction as
yours.
E156131
If it is, a red warning light illuminates and
an audible warning chime sounds.
The brake support system assists the driver
in reducing the collision speed by charging
the brakes. If the risk of collision further
increases after the warning light
illuminates, the brake support prepares
the brake system for rapid braking. This
may be apparent to the driver. The system
does not automatically activate the brakes
but, if the brake pedal is pressed, full force
braking is applied even if the brake pedal
is lightly pressed.
191
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
Using the Collision Warning System
WARNING
The collision warning system’s brake
support can only help reduce the
speed at which a collision occurs if
the driver applies the vehicle’s brakes. The
brake pedal must be pressed just like any
typical braking situation.
The warning system and chime can be
turned on and off separately by using the
information display control. See General
Information (page 83).
Note: If the system cannot be turned off in
a vehicle equipped with MyKey®, See
Principle of Operation (page 49).
Blocked Sensors
E145632
If a message regarding a blocked sensor
appears in the information display, the
radar signals from the sensor have been
obstructed. The sensors are located behind
a fascia cover near the driver side of the
lower grille. When the sensors are
obstructed, a vehicle ahead cannot be
detected and the collision warning system
does not function. The following table lists
possible causes and actions for this
message being displayed.
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or obstructed in some way
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is no
longer obstructed
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
but the message remains in the display
The collision warning system is temporarily
disabled. Collision warning should automat-
ically reactivate a short time after the
weather conditions improve
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering
with the radar signals
The collision warning system is temporarily
disabled. Collision warning should automat-
ically reactivate a short time after the
weather conditions improve
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface
of the road may interfere with the radar
signals
192
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
System Limitations
WARNING
The collision warning system’s brake
support can only help reduce the
speed at which a collision occurs if
the driver applies the vehicle’s brakes. The
brake pedal must be pressed just like any
typical braking situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology,
there may be certain instances where
vehicles do not provide a collision warning.
These include:
•Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
•Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
•Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
•Severe weather conditions (see
blocked sensor section).
•Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor
section).
•Small distance to vehicle ahead.
•Steering wheel and pedal movements
are large (very active driving style).
•
Certain conditions may reduce the visibility
of the warning lamp; therefore, it is
recommended to keep the audible warning
on.
If the front end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may be
altered causing missed or false collision
warnings. See your authorized dealer to
have your collision warning radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
WARNING
The system is designed to aid the
driver. It is not intended to replace
the driver’s attention and judgment.
The driver is still responsible to drive with
due care and attention.
Note: The system needs to be activated by
the driver at each key cycle.
Note: The system works above 40 mph (64
km/h).
Note: The system works as long as one lane
marking can be detected by the camera.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
Note: When Aid mode is on and the system
detects no driver steering activity for a short
continuous period of time, the system alerts
the driver to put their hands on the steering
wheel. The system may detect a light
grip/touch on the steering wheel as hands
off driving.
The system detects unintentional drifting
toward the outside of the lane and alerts
and/or aids the driver to stay in the lane
through the steering system and
instrument cluster display. The system
automatically detects and tracks the road
lane markings using a camera that is
mounted behind the interior rear view
mirror.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system defaults to off each time
the vehicle is started, unless a MyKey® is
detected. If a MyKey® is detected, the
system is defaulted to on and the Alert
mode is automatically selected.
193
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
Note: If a MyKey® is detected, pressing the
button will not affect the on/off status of
the system. Only the Mode, Sensitivity and
Intensity settings can be changed when a
MyKey® is present.
To turn the system on, press the
button located on the left
steering wheel stalk. The button
must be pressed each time the vehicle is
started. The system can be turned off by
pressing the button again.
System Settings
The system has three optional setting
menus available. To view or adjust them,
select Settings > Vehicle Settings > Driver
Assist > Lane Keeping Sys in the left-hand
instrument cluster display using the OK
button on the steering wheel. The
last-known selection for each of these
settings is stored by the system. You do
not need to readjust your settings each
time you turn on the system.
Mode: This setting allows the driver to
select which of the system features will be
enabled and turned on when the button is
pressed.
•Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when an unintended lane
departure is detected.
•Aid only – Provides a steering input
toward the lane center when an
unintended lane departure is detected.
•Both Alert + Aid
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
of the steering wheel vibration used for the
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting
does not impact the aid mode.
•Low
•Medium
•High
System Display
E151660
When the system is turned on, an overhead
graphic of a vehicle with lane markings will
be displayed in the left-hand instrument
cluster display. If the aid mode is selected
when the system is turned on, a separate
white icon will also appear in the
instrument cluster.
When the system is turned off, the lane
marking graphics will not be displayed.
Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may
still be displayed if adaptive cruise control
is enabled.
While the system is on, the color of the
lane markings will change to indicate the
system status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is
temporarily unable to provide a warning
or intervention on the indicated side(s).
This may be because:
•the vehicle is under the activation
speed
•the turn indicator is active
•the vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver
194
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
•the road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view
•the camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental conditions (e.g.
significant sun angles or shadows,
snow, heavy rain, fog), traffic
conditions (e.g. following a large
vehicle that is blocking or shadowing
the lane), or vehicle conditions (e.g.
poor headlamp illumination).
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning or
intervention, on the indicated side(s).
Yellow: Indicates that the system is
providing or has just provided a lane
keeping aid intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
The system can be temporarily suppressed
at any time by the following:
•Quick braking
•Fast acceleration
•Using the turn signal indicator
•Evasive steering maneuver
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature
Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves
Previous feature activation happened within the last one second
Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Too close to the vehicle in front of you
195
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road
Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
Lane width too narrow or too wide
Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
When driving on tight roads or on uneven roads
Why does the vehicle not come back into the middle of the lane always, as expected, in
the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds
Large road crown
Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure
If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been
modified
BLIND SPOT MONITOR
Blind Spot Information System
(BLIS®) with Cross Traffic Alert (If
Equipped)
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
BLIS as a replacement for using the
interior and exterior mirrors and
looking over your shoulder before changing
lanes. BLIS is not a replacement for careful
driving and only an assist.
A
A
E124788
196
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
BLIS aids you in detecting vehicles that
may have entered the blind spot zone (A).
The detection area is on both sides of the
vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 10 feet
(3 meters) beyond the bumper. The
system alerts you if certain vehicles enter
the blind spot zone while driving.
Cross traffic alert warns you of vehicles
approaching from the sides when the
transmission is in R (Reverse).
Note: BLIS is not designed to prevent
contact with other vehicles or objects; or to
detect parked vehicles, people, animals or
infrastructure (fences, guardrails, trees,
etc.). It is designed to alert the driver to
vehicles in the blind zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly
through the blind zone, typically fewer than
two seconds, the system does not trigger.
Using the Systems
BLIS turns on when the engine is started
and the vehicle is driven forward above 5
mph (8 km/h); it remains on while the
transmission is in D (Drive) and N
(Neutral). If shifted out of D (Drive) or N
(Neutral), the system enters cross traffic
alert mode. Once shifted back into D
(Drive), BLIS turns back on when the
vehicle is driven above 5 mph (8 km/h).
Note: BLIS does not function in R (Reverse)
or P (Park) or provide any additional
warning when a turn signal is on.
Note: Cross traffic alert detects
approaching vehicles from up to 45 feet (14
meters) away though coverage decreases
when the sensors are blocked. Reversing
slowly helps increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.
Note: For manual transmission vehicles,
CTA will be active only if the transmission
is in Reverse. If the vehicle is rolling
backwards and the transmission is not in
Reverse then CTA will not be active.
WARNING
To help avoid personal injury, NEVER
use the cross traffic alert system as
a replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors and looking over your
shoulder before backing out of a parking
space. Cross traffic alert is not a
replacement for careful driving and only
an assist.
197
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage is
nearly maximized.
Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at shallow angles. Here, the left
sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage
on that side is severely limited.
198
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
System Lights and Messages
E142442
The BLIS and cross traffic alert systems
illuminate a yellow alert indicator in the
outside mirror on the side of the vehicle
the approaching vehicle is coming from.
Note: The alert indicator dims when
nighttime darkness is detected.
Cross traffic alert also sounds a series of
tones and a message appears in the
information display indicating a vehicle is
coming from the right or left. Cross traffic
alert works with the reverse sensing
system which sounds its own series of
tones. See Parking Aid (page 174).
System Sensors
WARNING
Just prior to the system recognizing
a blocked condition and alerting the
driver, the number of missed objects
will increase. To help avoid injuries, NEVER
use the BLIS as a replacement for using
the side and rear view mirrors and looking
over your shoulder before changing lanes.
BLIS is not a replacement for careful
driving and only an assist.
Note: It is possible to get a blockage
warning with no blockage present; this is
rare and known as a false blockage warning.
A false blocked condition either
self-corrects or clears after a key cycle.
E142443
The system uses radar sensors which are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow these
areas to become obstructed by mud, snow
or bumper stickers, as this can cause
degraded system performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor or a message warning
of low visibility will appear in the
information display and the alert indicator
illuminates in the appropriate mirror(s).
The information display warning can be
cleared but the alert indicator remains
illuminated.
When the blockage is removed, the system
can be reset in two ways:
•when at least two objects are detected
while driving, or
•turn the ignition from on to off, then
back on.
If the blockage is still present after the key
cycle, the system senses again that it is
blocked after driving in traffic.
199
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
Reasons for messages being displayed
Clean the fascia area in
front of the radar or remove
the obstruction.
The radar
surface is
dirty or
obstructed
Drive normally in traffic for
a few minutes to allow the
radar to detect passing
vehicles so it can clear the
blocked state.
The radar
surface is
not dirty or
obstructed
No action required. The
system automatically
resets to an unblocked
state once the rainfall or
snowfall rate decreases or
stops. Do not use BLIS or
cross traffic alert in these
conditions.
Heavy rain-
fall/snow-
fall inter-
feres with
the radar
signals
System Limitations
The BLIS and cross traffic alert systems
do have their limitations; situations such
as severe weather conditions or debris
build-up on the sensor area may limit
vehicle detection.
The following are other situations that may
limit the BLIS:
•Certain maneuvering of vehicles
entering and exiting the blind zone.
•Vehicles passing through the blind zone
at very fast rates.
•When several vehicles forming a
convoy pass through the blind zone.
The following are other situations that may
limit the cross traffic alert system:
•Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
obstructing the sensors.
•Approaching vehicles passing at
speeds greater than 15 mph (24 km/h).
•Driving in reverse faster than 5 mph (8
km/h).
•Backing out of an angled parking spot.
False Alerts
Note: If a trailer is connected to the vehicle
the BLIS system may detect the trailer
causing a false alert. You may want to turn
the BLIS off manually.
There may be certain instances when
either the BLIS or cross traffic alert
systems illuminate the alert indicator with
no vehicle in the coverage zone; this is
known as a false alert. Some amount of
false alerts are normal; they are temporary
and self-correct.
System Errors
If either system senses a problem with the
left or right sensor, the BLIS telltale will
illuminate and a message will appear in
the information display.
All other system faults will only be
displayed by a message in the information
display.
Switching the Systems Off and On
One or both systems can be switched off
temporarily by using the information
display control. See General Information
(page 83). When the BLIS is switched off,
you will not receive alerts and a telltale
illuminates in the information display.
Note: The CTA system always switches on
whenever the ignition is switched on.
However, the BLIS system will remember
the last selected on or off setting.
One or both systems cannot be switched
off when MyKey is used. See Principle of
Operation (page 49).
200
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
One or both systems can also be switched
off permanently at your authorized dealer.
Once switched off, switching it back on
must also be done at your authorized
dealer.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING
Obtain immediate service if a system
error is detected. You may not notice
any difference in the feel of your
steering, but a serious condition may exist.
Failure to do so may result in loss of
steering control.
Note: Your vehicle is equipped with an
electric power-assisted steering system.
There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill.
The electric power steering system has
diagnostic checks that continuously
monitor the system to ensure proper
operation of the electronic system. When
an electronic error is detected, a message
will be displayed in the information display.
If this happens, stop the vehicle in a safe
place, and turn off the engine. After at least
10 seconds, reset the system by restarting
the engine, and watch the information
display for a steering message. If a steering
message returns, or returns while driving,
take the vehicle to your dealer to have it
checked.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving (or if the ignition is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually,
but it takes more effort. Extreme
continuous steering may increase the effort
it takes for you to steer. This occurs to
prevent internal overheating and
permanent damage to your steering
system. If this should occur, you will neither
lose the ability to steer the vehicle
manually nor will it cause permanent
damage. Typical steering and driving
maneuvers will allow the system to cool
and steering assist will return to normal.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
•an improperly inflated tire
•uneven tire wear
•loose or worn suspension components
•loose or worn steering components
•improper vehicle alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds
may also make the steering seem to
wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The EPS system adaptive learning helps
correct for road irregularities and improves
overall handling and steering feel. It
communicates with the vehicle's brake
system to help operate advanced stability
control and accident avoidance systems.
Additionally, whenever the battery is
disconnected or a new battery installed,
the vehicle must be driven a short distance
before the strategy is relearned and all
systems are reactivated.
201
Driving Aids
Information Provided by:
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle loading - with and without
a trailer
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer or both, to keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum
return of vehicle design
performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with
the following terms for
determining your vehicle’s weight
ratings, with or without a trailer,
from the vehicle’s Tire Label or
Safety Compliance Certification
Label:
Base Curb Weight - is the weight
of the vehicle including a full tank
of fuel and all standard
equipment. It does not include
passengers, cargo, or optional
equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight - is the
weight of your new vehicle when
you picked it up from your
authorized dealer plus any
aftermarket equipment.
E143816
PAYLOAD
Payload - is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle can be
found on the Tire Label on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s
door (vehicles exported outside
the US and Canada may not have
a Tire Label). Look for “THE
COMBINED WEIGHT OF
OCCUPANTS AND CARGO
SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX
kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by
the assembly plant. If any
aftermarket or authorized-dealer
202
Load Carrying
Information Provided by:
installed equipment has been
installed on the vehicle, the weight
of the equipment must be
subtracted from the payload
listed on the Tire Label in order to
determine the new payload.
WARNING
The appropriate loading capacity of
your vehicle can be limited either by
volume capacity (how much space
is available) or by payload capacity (how
much weight the vehicle should carry).
Once you have reached the maximum
payload of your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space available.
Overloading or improperly loading your
vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
Example only:
E142517
203
Load Carrying
Information Provided by:
Cargo Weight – includes all
weight added to the Base Curb
Weight, including cargo and
optional equipment. When towing,
trailer tongue load or king pin
weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is
the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) – including
vehicle curb weight and all
payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or
rear). These numbers are shown
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label
shall be affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next
to the driver's seating position.
The total load on each axle
must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer
to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided
by your authorized dealer.
204
Load Carrying
Information Provided by:
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) -
is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo
+ passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully
loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers
and cargo). The GVWR is shown
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label
shall be affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next
to the driver's seating position.
Example only:
E142523
205
Load Carrying
Information Provided by:
E142524
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety Compliance
Certification Label vehicle weight
rating limits could result in
substandard vehicle handling or
performance, engine, transmission and/or
structural damage, serious damage to the
vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
GCW (Gross Combined Weight)
- is the weight of the loaded
vehicle (GVW) plus the weight of
the fully loaded trailer
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating) -is the maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle
and the loaded trailer -including
all cargo and passengers - that
the vehicle can handle without
risking damage. (Important: The
towing vehicle’s braking system is
rated for operation at GVWR, not
at GCWR.) Separate functional
brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for
trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the GVWR of the towing
vehicle. The GCW must never
exceed the GCWR.
206
Load Carrying
Information Provided by:
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight - is the highest possible
weight of a fully loaded trailer the
vehicle can tow. It assumes a
vehicle with only mandatory
options, no cargo (internal or
external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or
king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth
wheel trailer), and driver only (150
lb. [68 kg]). Consult your
authorized dealer (or the RV
and Trailer Towing Guide
provided by your authorized
dealer) for more detailed
information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel
King Pin Weight - refers to the
amount of the weight that a trailer
pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5000 lb. (2268
kg) conventional trailer, multiply
5000 by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a
proper tongue load range of 500
to 750 lb. (227 to 340 kg). For an
11500 lb. (5216 kg) fifth wheel
trailer, multiply by 0.15 and 0.25
to obtain a proper king pin load
range of 1725 to 2875 lb. (782 to
1304 kg).
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
WARNINGS
Do not use replacement tires with
lower load carrying capacities than
the original tires because they may
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires with a higher
limit than the original tires do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating
limitation could result in serious
damage to the vehicle and/or
personal injury.
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =
650 lb.). In metric units (635-340
(5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
207
Load Carrying
Information Provided by:
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few
examples on how to calculate the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity:
*Suppose your vehicle has a 1400
lb. (635 kg) cargo and luggage
capacity. You decide to go golfing.
Is there enough load capacity to
carry you, 4 of your friends and all
the golf bags? You and four
friends average 220 lb. (99 kg)
each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg)
each. The calculation would be:
1400 - (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400
- 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635 kg
- (5 x 99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635
- 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
*Suppose your vehicle has a 1400
lb. (635 kg) cargo and luggage
capacity. You and one of your
friends decide to pick up cement
from the local home improvement
store to finish that patio you have
been planning for the past 2 years.
Measuring the inside of the vehicle
with the rear seat folded down,
you have room for 12-100 lb. (45
kg) bags of cement. Do you have
enough load capacity to transport
the cement to your home? If you
and your friend each weigh 220 lb.
(99 kg), the calculation would be:
1400 - (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) =
1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 lb. No,
you do not have enough cargo
capacity to carry that much
weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2
x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198
- 540 = -103 kg. You will need to
reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove
3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags,
then the load calculation would
be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) =
1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now
you have the load capacity to
transport the cement and your
friend home. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2
x 99 kg) - (9 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198
- 405 = 32 kg.
208
Load Carrying
Information Provided by:
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the Front or the Rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position.
209
Load Carrying
Information Provided by:
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the certification
label.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum
recommended gross trailer weight
exceeds the limit of the vehicle and
could result in engine damage,
transmission damage, structural damage,
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
Note: There may be electrical items such
as fuses or relays that can affect trailer
towing operation. See Fuses (page 229).
Your vehicle's load capacity is designated
by weight, not by volume, so you cannot
necessarily use all available space when
loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an additional load
on your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle,
brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during, and after,
any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer movement
affects the vehicle when driving:
•Load the heaviest items closest to the
trailer floor.
•Load the heaviest items so they are
centered between the left and right
side trailer tires.
•Load the heaviest items above the
trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not allow
the final trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the loaded
trailer weight.
•Select a tow bar with the correct rise
or drop. When both the loaded vehicle
and trailer are connected, the trailer
frame should be level, or slightly angled
down toward the vehicle, when viewed
from the side.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a
slight takeoff vibration or shudder may be
present due to the increased payload
weight. Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting your
vehicle up for towing is located in another
chapter of this manual. See Load Limit
(page 202). You can also find the
information in the RV & Trailer Towing
Guide, available at your authorized dealer.
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight for
your vehicle configuration listed in the chart
below.
Note: Make sure to take into consideration
trailer frontal area. Do not exceed 20 feet2
(1.86 meters2).
Note: For high altitude operation, reduce
the gross combined weight by 2% per 1000
feet (300 meters) starting at the 1000 foot
(300 meter) elevation point.
Note: Certain states require electric trailer
brakes for trailers over a specified weight.
Be sure to check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum trailer
weights listed may be limited to this
specified weight, as the vehicle’s electrical
system may not include the wiring
connector needed to activate electric trailer
brakes.
210
Towing
Information Provided by:
Your vehicle may tow a Class I trailer
provided the maximum trailer weight is
less than or equal to the maximum trailer
weight listed for your vehicle configuration
on the following chart.
Maximum Trailer Weight - lb (kg)Powertrain
1000 (454)1.6L GTDI
2000 (907)2.0L GTDI
1000 (454)2.5L TiVCT
211
Towing
Information Provided by:
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe
towing:
•Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle
has been driven at least 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers).
•Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
•Refer to the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
•Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. Refer to your
scheduled maintenance information.
•If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
Load specification terms found on the tire
label and Safety Compliance label and for
instructions on calculating your vehicle's
load can be found in another chapter of
this manual. See Load Limit (page 202).
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of the vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Hitches
•Do not use a hitch that either clamps
onto the bumper or attaches to the
axle.
•Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of
the total trailer weight is on the trailer
tongue.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains
to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross
the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning tight
corners. Do not allow the chains to drag
on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle
may not have enough braking power and
your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if
installed properly and adjusted to the
manufacturer's specifications. The trailer
brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
The braking system of the tow vehicle
is rated for operation at the GVWR not
GCWR.
Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1500 pounds (680 kilograms)
when loaded.
Trailer Lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working. Contact your authorized dealer
or trailer rental agency for proper
instructions and equipment for hooking up
the lamps.
212
Towing
Information Provided by:
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing-up
to get the feel of the vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
•Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113
km/h) during the first 500 miles (800
kilometers).
•Do not make full-throttle starts.
•Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 miles (80
kilometers).
•When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position P to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
•Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
•Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
•If your transmission is equipped with a
grade assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
•Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
•Avoid parking on a grade.
•However, if you must park on a grade:
•Turn the steering wheel to point the
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
•Set the vehicle parking brake.
•Place automatic transmission in
position P.
•Place wheel chocks in front and
back of the trailer wheels. (Chocks
not equipped with vehicle.)
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after the trailer is removed from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
•Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
•Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 inches (15 centimeters) above
the bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
•Causing internal damage to the
components.
•Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear
axle lubricant, which is not normally
checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.
213
Towing
Information Provided by:
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or,
if you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, your roadside
assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be
towed with a wheel lift and dollies or
flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a
slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not
approved a slingbelt towing procedure. If
the vehicle is towed incorrectly, or by any
other means, vehicle damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles can be
towed from the front if proper wheel lift
equipment is used to raise the front wheels
off the ground. The rear wheels can be left
on the ground when towed in this fashion
FWD vehicles can also be towed from the
rear using wheel lift equipment; however,
the front wheels must be placed on a dolly
to prevent damage to the transmission.
All-wheel drive (AWD) vehicles must be
towed with a wheel lift and dollies or
flatbed equipment, with all the wheels off
the ground, to prevent damage to the
transmission, AWD system or vehicle.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
In the event your vehicle becomes disabled
(without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport
vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels
on the ground, regardless of the
powertrain/transmission configuration)
under the following conditions:
•The vehicle is facing forward so that it
is towed in a forward direction.
•The transmission gear shift lever is
placed in position N. If the transmission
gear shift lever cannot be moved to
position N, it may need to be
overridden. See Transmission (page
157).
•Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
•Maximum distance is 50 miles (80
kilometers).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 118).
214
Towing
Information Provided by:
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example
of recreational towing would be towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. These
guidelines are designed to ensure that your
transmission is not damaged.
Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles can be
towed with the front wheels off the ground
by using a tow dolly. If you are using a tow
dolly follow the instructions specified by
the equipment provider.
All-wheel drive (AWD) vehicles cannot be
towed with any wheels on the ground, as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
It is recommended to tow your vehicle with
all four (4) wheels off the ground such as
when using a car-hauling trailer. Otherwise,
no recreational towing is permitted.
215
Towing
Information Provided by:
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480
kilometers). During this time, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000
miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things
such as how you drive, the conditions you
drive under and how you maintain your
vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that
may improve your fuel economy:
•Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
•Drive at steady speeds.
•Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
•Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
•When running errands, go to the
furthest destination first and then
work your way back home.
•Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
•Drive at reasonable speeds. (Traveling
at 65 mph/105 kph uses about 15%
less fuel than traveling at 75 mph/121
kph).
•Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
•Use the recommended engine oil.
•Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
There are also some things you may want
to avoid doing because they reduce your
fuel economy:
•Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.
•Avoid revving the engine before turning
off the car.
•Avoid long idle periods.
•Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
•Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat.
•Avoid using speed control in hilly
terrain.
•Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving.
•Avoid carrying unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4
kilometers/liter] is lost for every 400
lbs [180 kilograms] of weight carried).
•Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks).
•Avoid driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Note: Driving through deep water above
the recommended levels can cause vehicle
damage.
Note: Once through the water, always dry
the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly
while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle
as quickly as dry brakes.
216
Driving Hints
Information Provided by:
E142667
If driving through deep or standing water
is unavoidable, proceed very slowly. Never
drive through water that is higher than the
bottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or
brake capability may be limited. Also,
water may enter your engine’s air intake
and severely damage your engine or your
vehicle may stall.
FLOOR MATS
E142666
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that
leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only
use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
injury.
Always make sure that the floor
mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are
supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must
be properly secured to both retention posts
to ensure mats do not shift out of position.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering
with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always
rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and
not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
Check attachment of floor mats on
a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning or
replacement.
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while the vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
217
Driving Hints
Information Provided by:
WARNINGS
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause
interference with pedal operation causing
loss of control of vehicle.
To install floor mats, position the
floor mat so that the eyelet is over
the retention post and press down
to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
218
Driving Hints
Information Provided by:
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are
available online at www.fordowner.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
•U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State, or Zip Code
•Owner Manuals
•Maintenance Schedules
•Recalls
•Ford Extended Service Plans
•Ford Genuine Accessories
•Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling/servicing
authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.
219
Customer Assistance
Information Provided by:
In order to help you serve you better,
please have the following information
available when contacting a Customer
Relationship Center:
•Vehicle Identification Number.
•Your telephone number (home and
business).
•The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
•The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify
Ford in writing before pursuing remedies
under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is
also allowed a final repair attempt in some
states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute
must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
before taking action under the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the
extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18000 miles (29 000 km),
whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
220
Customer Assistance
Information Provided by:
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203-1833
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
221
Customer Assistance
Information Provided by:
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower
than is recommended for your vehicle,
contact a regional office or owner
relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company/Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using leaded fuel may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL
INITIATIVES
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
For customers in Guam, the
Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the
U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to call
our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD
(3673).
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
222
Customer Assistance
Information Provided by:
Ford International Business Development
Inc.
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 11957
Caparra Heights Station
San Juan, Puerto Rico 00922-1957
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
Ford Middle East
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 21470
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number for the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 800 8971409
Local Telephone Number for Kuwait:
24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Motor Company Export
Operations & Global Growth Initiatives by
emailing expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer employees cannot
help you, they can direct you to the nearest
Ford affiliate office.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
223
Customer Assistance
Information Provided by:
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspxWebsite
1–800–333–0510Phone
224
Customer Assistance
Information Provided by:
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold In The U.S.: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. The service is available:
•24-hours, seven days a week.
•for the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
•a flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit).
•battery jump start.
•lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
•fuel delivery — Independent Service
Contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall deliver up
to 2.0 gallons (7.5 liters) of gasoline or
5.0 gallons (18.9 liters) of diesel fuel
to a disabled vehicle. Fuel delivery
service is limited to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month period.
•winch out — available within 100 feet
(30.5 meters) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
•towing — Ford and Lincoln eligible
vehicles towed to an authorized dealer
within 35 miles (56 kilometers) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests to be towed to an authorized
dealer more than 35 miles (56
kilometers) from the disablement
location, the member shall be
responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56 kilometers).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the
disabled eligible vehicle requires service at
the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer
is disabled, but the towing vehicle is
operational, the trailer does not qualify for
any roadside services.
Vehicles Sold In The U.S. : Using
Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is
found in the owner's information portfolio
in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford vehicle customers who require
Roadside Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company will
reimburse a reasonable amount for towing
to the nearest dealership within 35 miles
(56 kilometers). To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford vehicle customers
call 1-800-241-3673. Customers will be
asked to submit their original receipts.
Vehicles Sold In Canada : Getting
Roadside Assistance
Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
Vehicles Sold In Canada : Using
Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In Canada, the
card is found in the warranty information
in the glove box.
Canadian Roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage. Please
refer to your warranty information or visit
our website at www.ford.ca for information
on Canadian services and benefits.
225
Roadside Emergencies
Information Provided by:
Canadian customers who need to obtain
roadside information, call
1-800-665-2006 or visit our website at
www.ford.ca.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Note: With extended use, the flashers may
run down your battery.
The hazard flasher control is
located on the instrument panel
by the radio. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety
hazard for other motorists.
•Press the flasher control and all front
and rear direction signals will flash.
•Press the flasher control again to turn
them off.
FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH
WARNING
Failure to inspect and if necessary
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious
injury. Ford Motor Company recommends
that the fuel system be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle is equipped with a
fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the
flow of fuel to the engine. Not every impact
will cause a shut-off.
Should your vehicle shut off after a
collision, you may restart your vehicle by
doing the following:
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Turn the ignition to crank.
3. Turn the ignition off.
4. Turn the ignition on again to re-enable
the fuel pump.
For vehicles equipped with a push button
start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to
turn the ignition off.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP button (crank
attempt).
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press the START/STOP button
(ignition off).
4. Press the START/STOP button again
to re-enable the fuel system.
JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
The gases around the battery can
explode if exposed to flames, sparks,
or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in injury or vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which
can burn skin, eyes and clothing, if
contacted.
Only use an adequate size cable with
insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle's electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle making sure the
two vehicles do not touch. Turn all
accessories off.
226
Roadside Emergencies
Information Provided by:
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components
as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
parts.
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the
bottom is used to designate the booster
vehicle.
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the assisting
battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine.
WARNING
Do not connect the end of the
second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped.
A spark may cause an explosion of the
gases that surround the battery.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
227
Roadside Emergencies
Information Provided by:
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the jumper cable from the
ground metal surface.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle's battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started
and the jumper cables removed, allow it
to idle for several minutes so the battery
can recharge.
228
Roadside Emergencies
Information Provided by:
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire.
E142430
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color
Color
J-type fusesM-type fusesDual micro fusesMicro fusesFuse rating
--TanTan5A
--BrownBrown7.5A
--RedRed10A
-GreyBlueBlue15A
BlueLight Blue-Yellow20A
WhiteWhite-White25A
PinkPink-Green30A
GreenGreen--40A
Red---50A
Yellow---60A
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high-current fuses.
WARNINGS
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
229
Fuses
Information Provided by:
The power distribution box is located in
the engine compartment. It has
high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle's main electrical systems from
overloads.
If the battery has been disconnected and
reconnected, some features will need to
be reset. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 248).
The high-current fuses are coded as
follows:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse/relay number
Wiper motor #2
25A3
1
Starter relay-2
Autowipers
15A1
3
Blower motor relay-4
Power point 3 - Back of console
20A3
5
Not used-6
230
Fuses
Information Provided by:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse/relay number
Powertrain control module - vehicle power
1
20A1
7
Powertrain control module - vehicle power
2
20A1
8
Powertrain control module relay-9
Power point 1 - driver front
20A3
10
Powertrain control module - vehicle power
4
15A2
11
Powertrain control module - vehicle power
3
15A2
12
Powertrain control module - vehicle power
5
10A2
13
Powertrain control module - vehicle power
6
10A2
14
Run/start relay-15
Power point 2 - console
20A3
16
Not used-17
Powertrain control module - keep alive
power
10A1
18
Electronic power assist steering
10A1
19
Run/start lighting
10A1
20
Run/start transmission control, Transmis-
sion oil pump start/stop
15A1
21
A/C clutch solenoid
10A1
22
Blind spot information system, Rear view
camera, Adaptive cruise control, Heads-up
display
15A1
23
Not used-24
Anti-lock brake system
10A2
25
231
Fuses
Information Provided by:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse/relay number
Powertrain control module
10A2
26
Not used (spare)
10A1
27
Not used-28
Not used-29
Not used-30
Not used-31
Electronic fan #1 relay-32
A/C clutch relay-33
Not used-34
Not used-35
Not used-36
Not used-37
Electronic fan #2 relay-38
Electronic fan #3 relay-39
Fuel pump relay-40
Horn relay-41
Not used-42
Not used-43
Not used-44
Not used-45
Alternator
10A2
46
Brake on/off switch
10A2
47
Horn
20A1
48
Mass air flow monitor
5A1
49
Not used-50
Not used-51
232
Fuses
Information Provided by:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse/relay number
Not used-52
Power seats
10A1
53
Not used-54
Not used-55
1Micro fuse
2 Dual micro fuse
3M-type fuse
Power Distribution Box - Bottom
There are fuses located on the bottom of
the fuse box. To access the bottom of the
fuse box, do the following:
E145983
1. Release the two latches, located on
both sides of the fuse box.
2. Raise the inboard side of the fuse box
from the cradle.
3. Move the fuse box toward the center
of the engine compartment.
4. Pivot the outboard side of the fuse box
to access the bottom side.
233
Fuses
Information Provided by:
The high-current fuses are coded as
follows:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse/relay number
Fuel pump feed
30A1
56
Not used-57
Not used-58
500W Electronic fan 3
30A1
59
500W Electronic fan 1
30A1
60
Not used-61
Body control module 1
50A2
62
500W Electronic fan 2
20A1
63
Not used-64
234
Fuses
Information Provided by:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse/relay number
Front heated seat
20A1
65
Not used-66
Body control module 2
50A2
67
Heated rear window
40A1
68
Anti-lock brake system valves
30A1
69
Passenger seat
30A1
70
Not used-71
Moonroof
30A1
72
Not used (spare)
20A1
73
Driver seat module
30A1
74
Not used-75
Transmission oil pump #2 stop/start
20A1
76
Not used (spare)
30A1
77
Not used-78
Blower motor
40A1
79
Not used (spare)
30A1
80
Inverter
40A1
81
Anti-lock brake system pump
60A2
82
Wiper motor #1
25A1
83
Starter solenoid
30A1
84
Not used (spare)
30A1
85
1 M-type fuse
2J-type fuse
235
Fuses
Information Provided by:
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel
The fuse panel is located under the
instrument panel to the left of the steering
column.
Note: It may be easier to access the fuse
panel if you remove the finish trim piece.
E145984
The fuses are coded as follows:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse/relay number
Lighting (ambient, glovebox, vanity, dome,
trunk)
10A1
1
Memory seats, Lumbar, Power mirror
7.5A1
2
Driver door unlock
20A1
3
Not used (spare)
5A1
4
Subwoofer amplifier
20A1
5
236
Fuses
Information Provided by:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse/relay number
Not used (spare)
10A2
6
Not used (spare)
10A2
7
Not used (spare)
10A2
8
Not used (spare)
10A2
9
Keypad
5A2
10
Not used
5A2
11
Climate control, Gear shift
7.5A2
12
Steering wheel column, Cluster, Datalink
logic
7.5A2
13
Not used
10A2
14
Datalink/Gateway module
10A2
15
Not used (spare)
15A1
16
Not used
5A2
17
Ignition, Push button stop/start
5A2
18
Passenger airbag disabled indicator,
Transmission range
5A2
19
Not used
5A2
20
Humid and incar temp
5A2
21
Occupant classification sensor
5A2
22
Delayed Accessory (Power inverter logic,
Moonroof logic)
10A1
23
Central lock/unlock
30A1
24
Driver's door (window, mirror)
30A1
25
Front passenger's door (window, mirror)
30A1
26
237
Fuses
Information Provided by:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse/relay number
Moonroof
30A1
27
Sony amplifier
20A1
28
Rear driver's side door (window)
30A1
29
Rear passenger's side door (window)
30A1
30
Not used (spare)
15A1
31
GPS, Voice control, Display, Adaptive cruise
control, Radio frequency receiver
10A1
32
Radio, Active noise control
20A1
33
Run/start bus (fuse #19, 20, 21, 22, 35, 36,
37, circuit breaker)
30A1
34
Restraints control module
5A1
35
All-wheel drive relay, Auto-dimming rear
view mirror
15A1
36
Not used (spare)
15A1
37
Not used30A38
1Micro fuse
2Dual micro fuse
238
Fuses
Information Provided by:
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of Ford
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we
provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine
service easy. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 420).
If your vehicle requires professional service,
your authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
•Do not work on a hot engine.
•Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
•Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
•Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P
(Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key
(if equipped).
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P
(Park).
2. Block the wheels
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
E142457
1. To open the hood, go inside the vehicle
and pull the hood release handle
located under the instrument panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
locate the secondary release lever,
which is located under the front of the
hood, to your right of the center of the
vehicle (driver's side), toward the
headlight.
239
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
3. Release the hood latch by pushing the
secondary release lever to your left,
toward the center of the vehicle.
E87786
4. Raise the hood and support it with the
prop rod.
5. To close the hood, lower and secure
the prop rod in the clip.
6. Lower the hood and allow it to drop the
last 8 to 11 inches (20 to 30
centimeters).
Note: Make sure that the hood is closed
properly.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.6L ECOBOOST®
240
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Engine coolant reservoirA
Engine oil filler capB
Engine oil dipstickC
Brake fluid reservoir capD
BatteryE
Power distribution boxF
Engine air filter assemblyG
Windshield washer fluid reservoir capH
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST®
Engine coolant reservoir capA
Engine oil dipstickB
Engine oil filler capC
Brake fluid reservoir capD
241
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
BatteryE
Power distribution boxF
Engine air filter assemblyG
Windshield washer fluid reservoir capH
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.5L
Engine coolant reservoir capA
Engine oil filler capB
Engine oil dipstickC
Brake fluid reservoir capD
BatteryE
Power distribution boxF
Air filter housing coverG
Windshield washer fluid reservoir capH
242
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6L
ECOBOOST®
E146020
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK -
2.5L/2.0L ECOBOOST®
E142462
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK - 2.5L/1.6L
ECOBOOST®/2.0L
ECOBOOST®
Note: Check the level before starting the
engine.
Note: Make sure that the level is between
the MIN and the MAX marks.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes
for the oil to drain into the oil pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the
dipstick and remove it again to check
the oil level.
If the level is at the MIN mark, add oil
immediately.
Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running.
Note: Do not add oil further than the MAX
mark. Oil levels above the MAX mark may
cause engine damage.
E142732
243
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC), comprised of
U.S. and Japanese automobile
manufacturers.
1. Remove the filler cap.
2. Add engine oil that meets the Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 286).
3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you
feel a strong resistance.
Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring
System
Note: Reset the oil life monitoring only after
an oil change.
1. Turn the ignition key to the on position.
Do not start the engine. For vehicles
with push-button start, press and hold
the start button for two seconds
without pressing the brake pedal. Do
not attempt to start the engine.
2. Press both the accelerator and brake
pedals at the same time.
3. Keep both pedals fully pressed.
4. After three seconds, the Service: Oil
reset in prog. message will be
displayed.
5. After 25 seconds, the Service: Oil reset
complete message will be displayed.
6. Release both the accelerator and brake
pedals.
7. The Service: Oil reset complete
message will no longer be displayed.
8. Rotate the key to the off position. For
vehicles with push-button start, press
the start button to turn the vehicle off
completely.
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK -
2.5L/1.6L ECOBOOST®/2.0L
ECOBOOST®
Checking the Engine Coolant
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the engine
coolant at the intervals listed in the
scheduled maintenance information. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 420).
Note: Make sure that the level is between
the MIN and MAX marks on the coolant
reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant
immediately. See Adding Engine Coolant
in this chapter.
The coolant concentration should be
maintained within 48% to 50%, which
equates to a freeze point between -30 F
degrees (-34 C) and -34 F (-37 C).
Note: For best results, coolant
concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Rotunda tool
300-ROB75240 available from your
authorized dealer. Ford does not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant
or antifreeze or windshield washer fluid
outside of its specified function and vehicle
location.
244
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Adding Engine Coolant
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling
system can burn you badly. Also, you can
be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine
parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine
coolant could make it difficult to see
through the windshield.
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure
relief cap. The cooling system is under
pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened
slightly.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or additives as they can
cause damage to the engine cooling or
heating systems. This damage would not
be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
engine coolant may change color from
orange to pink or light red. As long as the
engine coolant is clear and uncontaminated,
this color change does not indicate the
engine coolant has degraded nor does it
require the engine coolant to be drained, the
system to be flushed, or the engine coolant
to be replaced.
•Do not mix different colors or types of
coolant in your vehicle. Make sure the
correct coolant is used. Mixing of
engine coolants may harm your
engine’s cooling system. The use of an
improper coolant may harm engine and
cooling system components and may
void the warranty. Use prediluted
engine coolant meeting the Ford
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 286).
•In case of emergency, a large amount
of water without engine coolant may
be added in order to reach a vehicle
service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained,
chemically cleaned with Motorcraft®
Premium Cooling System Flush, and
refilled with prediluted engine coolant
as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause
engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
•Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or
any engine coolants mixed with alcohol
or methanol antifreeze (coolant).
Alcohol and other liquids can cause
engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
•Do not add extra inhibitors or additives
to the coolant. These can be harmful
and compromise the corrosion
protection of the engine coolant.
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will
escape as you unscrew the cap.
Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the
Ford specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 286).
Whenever coolant has been added, the
coolant level in the coolant reservoir
should be checked the next few times you
drive the vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the proper level.
245
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Recycled Engine Coolant
Ford Motor Company does not recommend
the use of recycled engine coolant since a
Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Always dispose of used automotive fluids
in a responsible manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
•It may be necessary to have a Ford
authorized dealer increase the coolant
concentration above 50%.
•A coolant concentration of 60% will
provide improved freeze point
protection. Engine coolant
concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection
characteristics of the engine coolant
and may cause engine damage
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
•It may be necessary to have a Ford
authorized dealer decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
•A coolant concentration of 40% will
provide improved overheat protection.
Engine coolant concentrations below
40% will decrease the corrosion/freeze
protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection.
What you Should Know About Fail-
Safe Cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted,
this feature allows the vehicle to be driven
temporarily before incremental component
damage is incurred. The “fail-safe”
distance depends on ambient
temperatures, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine
coolant temperature gauge will move to
the red (hot) area and:
The coolant temperature
warning light will illuminate.
The service engine soon
indicator will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still
operate. However:
•The engine power will be limited.
•The air conditioning system will be
disabled.
Continued operation will increase the
engine temperature and the engine will
completely shut down, causing steering
and braking effort to increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the
engine can be re-started. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to minimize engine damage.
246
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate the
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long
as necessary to bring the vehicle to rest in
a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will
have limited power, will not be able to
maintain high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down without warning,
potentially losing engine power, power
steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a
crash resulting in serious injury.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
You have limited engine power when in the
fail-safe mode, so drive the vehicle with
caution. The vehicle will not be able to
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine will run rough. Remember that the
engine is capable of completely shutting
down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to
an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish
if low.
5. Re-start the engine and take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving the vehicle without repairing
the engine problem increases the chance of
engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
Note: Transmission fluid should be checked
by an authorized dealer. If required, fluid
should be added by an authorized dealer.
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
Have an authorized dealer check and
change the transmission fluid and filter at
the correct service interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 420). Your
transmission does not consume fluid.
However, the fluid level should be checked
if the transmission is not working properly,
(i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts
slowly) or if you notice some sign of fluid
leakage.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX
lines are within the normal operating range;
there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid
levels are outside of the normal operating
range, the performance of the system
could be compromised; seek service from
your authorized dealer immediately.
POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.
247
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid with
antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and
increase the risk of injury or accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 286).
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
WARNINGS
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury
and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or
with your hands on opposite corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft® maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require additional
water during its life of service.
Note: If your battery has a cover/shield,
make sure it is reinstalled after the battery
has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry. Also,
make certain the battery cables are always
tightly fastened to the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative
battery cable terminal be disconnected
from the battery if you plan to store your
vehicle for an extended period of time.
248
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
To ensure proper operation of the battery
management system (BMS), any electrical
devices that are added to the vehicle
should not have their ground connection
made directly at the negative battery post.
A connection at the negative battery post
can cause inaccurate measurements of
the battery condition and potential
incorrect system operation.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories
or components added to the vehicle by the
dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability and may
also affect the performance of other
electrical systems in the vehicle.
When a battery replacement is required,
the battery should only be replaced with
a Ford recommended replacement battery
that matches the electrical requirements
of the vehicle.
When the battery is disconnected or a new
battery installed, the automatic
transmission must relearn its adaptive
strategy. As a result of this, the
transmission may shift firmly when first
driven. This operation is considered normal
and will fully update transmission
operation to its optimum shift feel.
If the battery has been disconnected or a
new battery has been installed, the clock
and the preset radio stations must be reset
once the battery is reconnected.
Note: Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner. Follow
your local authorized standards for disposal.
Call your local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling automotive
batteries.
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
The wiper arms can be manually moved
when the ignition is off. This allows for ease
of blade replacement and cleaning under
the blades.
E129990
1
1
2
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away
from the glass.
2. Press the locking buttons together.
3. Rotate and remove the wiper blade.
4. Install in the reverse order.
249
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade
back to the windshield. The wiper arms will
automatically return to their normal position
when the ignition is turned on.
Replace wiper blades at least once per
year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER - 2.5L/1.6L
ECOBOOST®/2.0L
ECOBOOST®
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
286).
For EcoBoost equipped vehicles: When
servicing the air cleaner, it is important that
no foreign material enter the air induction
system. The engine and turbocharger are
susceptible to damage from even small
particles.
Change the air filter element at the proper
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 420).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if the
correct air filter element is not used.
1.6L and 2.0L EcoBoost Engines
E144365
2.5L Engine
E146047
1. Release the clamps that secure the air
filter housing cover.
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
3. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and to make sure you
have a good seal.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter element
edges between the air filter housing
and cover. This could cause filter
damage and allow unfiltered air to
enter the engine if not properly seated.
250
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
6. Install the air filter housing cover.
7. Engage the clamps to secure the air
filter housing cover to the air filter
housing.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident, the
alignment of your headlamps should be
checked by your authorized dealer.
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters)A
Center height of lamp to groundB
25 feet (7.6 meters)C
Horizontal reference lineD
Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)
away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp
bulb center from the ground and mark
an 8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontal
reference line on the vertical wall or
screen at this height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood.
E142465
4. On the wall or screen you will observe
a flat zone of high intensity light
located at the top of the right hand
portion of the beam pattern. If the top
edge of the high intensity light zone is
not at the horizontal reference line, the
headlamp will need to be adjusted.
E145594
251
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp. The horizontal edge of the
brighter light should touch the
horizontal reference line.
6. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is not adjustable.
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
See an authorized dealer.
CHANGING A BULB
Lamp Assembly Condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to
accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a thin film of
mist can form on the interior of the lens.
The thin mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
•Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip
marks or droplets).
•Fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable moisture
(usually caused by a lamp water leak) are:
•Water puddle inside the lamp.
•Large water droplets, drip marks or
streaks present on the interior of the
lens.
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if
any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Replacing the Headlamp Bulbs
For any front bulb replacement, see your
authorized dealer.
Replacing the Tail, Brake, High-
Mount Brake Lamp, and Turn
Signal Lamp Bulbs
These lamps are designed with LED light
sources. For replacement, see your
authorized dealer.
Replacing a Reverse Lamp Bulb
1. Make sure the lighting control is in the
off position.
2. Open the trunk deck lid.
E145777
3. Remove the push pins and reposition
the inner body side trim.
252
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E145778
4. Remove the three lamp assembly nuts.
5. Gently pull the lamp assembly away
from the vehicle.
E145779
6. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove the bulb holder.
E145780
7. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing the License Plate Lamp
Bulb
3
2
1
E72789
1. Carefully release the spring clip.
2. Remove the lamp.
3. Remove the bulb.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for
North America to make sure they have the
proper lamp performance, light brightness,
light pattern, and safe visibility. The correct
bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and
will provide quality bulb illumination time.
253
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Trade nameFunction
H7LL*Headlamp high beam (Halogen)
H11LL*Headlamp low beam (Halogen)
LED*Side marker lamp - front
W5W*Park lamp - front
PWY24W*Turn lamp - front
H11*Fog lamp - front
LED*Tail and brake lamp - high series
LED*Tail and brake lamp - low series
921Reverse lamp
LED*Turn lamp - rear - high series
LED*Turn lamp - rear - low series
LED*Side marker lamp - rear
W5WLicense plate lamp
W5W*Trunk lamp
LED*High-mount brake lamp
LED*Side repeater lamp
LED*Interior lamp
*To replace these bulbs, see your authorized dealer.
To replace all instrument panel bulbs, see your authorized dealer.
254
Maintenance
Information Provided by:
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has
many quality products available to clean
your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42)
Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner
(ZC-15)
Motorcraft® Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft® Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo (Canada
only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield
Washer Fluid (Canada only) [CXC-37-(A,
B, D or F)]
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Washer
Concentrate (U.S. only) (ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet
& Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.
only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft® Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only)
(CXC-93)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner
(ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft® Detail
Wash.
•Never use strong household detergents
or soap, such as dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
•Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the
touch” or during exposure to strong,
direct sunlight.
•Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel in order to eliminate
water spotting.
•Immediately remove items such as
gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings and
insect deposits because they can cause
damage to the vehicle’s paintwork and
trim over time. Use Motorcraft® Bug
and Tar Remover.
•Remove any exterior accessories, such
as antennas, before entering a car
wash.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage any painted surface; if these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash off as soon as possible.
Exterior Chrome
Note: Never use abrasive materials such as
steel wool or plastic pads as they can
scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels and wheel
covers
255
Vehicle Care
Information Provided by:
•Wash the vehicle first, using cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft® Detail
Wash.
•Use Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal
Cleaner. Apply the product as you
would a wax to clean bumpers and
other chrome parts; allow the cleaner
to dry for a few minutes, then wipe off
the haze with a clean, dry rag.
•Do not apply cleaning product to hot
surfaces and do not leave cleaning
product on chrome surfaces for a
period of time exceeding that which is
recommended.
•Using other non-recommended
cleaners can result in severe and
permanent cosmetic damage.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your
vehicle frequently. Keep body and door
drain holes free from packed dirt.
Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts
Use only approved products to clean
plastic parts
•For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft®
Detail Wash.
•If tar or grease spots are present, use
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint
to match your vehicle’s color. Take your
color code (printed on a sticker in the
driver’s door jamb) to your authorized
dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
•Remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout
before repairing paint chips.
•Always read the instructions before
using the products.
WAXING
•Wash the vehicle first.
•Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
•Do not allow paint sealant to come in
contact with any non-body (low-gloss
black) colored trim, such as grained
door handles, roof racks, bumpers, side
moldings, mirror housings or the
windshield cowl area. The paint sealant
will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
•Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
•Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
•Spray Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo
and Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft® Engine
Shampoo.
•Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
256
Vehicle Care
Information Provided by:
•Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
•Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
The windows and wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe
properly, substances on the vehicle’s glass
or the wiper blades may cause squeaking
or chatter noise from the blades, and
streaking and smearing of the windshield.
To clean these items, follow these tips:
•The windows may be cleaned with a
non-abrasive cleaner such as
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner.
•The wiper blades can be cleaned with
isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield
Washer Concentrate in the U.S., or
Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid in Canada. Be sure to replace
wiper blades when they appear worn
or do not function properly.
•Do not use abrasives, as they may
cause scratches
•Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint
thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after
cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the
wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion,
clean the outer surface of the windshield
and the wiper blades using a sponge or
soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper
blades with clean water. The windshield
is clean if beads do not form when you
rinse the windshield with water.
Note: Do not use sharp objects, such as a
razor blade, to clean the inside of the rear
window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s
heated grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts,
as these actions may weaken the
belt webbing.
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong
detergents. Such products could
contaminate the side airbag system and
affect performance of the side airbag in a
collision.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
•Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
•Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft® Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
257
Vehicle Care
Information Provided by:
•If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover.
In Canada, use Motorcraftt
Multi-Purpose Cleaner.
•If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
•Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or
strong detergents when cleaning the
steering wheel or instrument panel
to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp, white cotton
cloth, then use a clean and dry white
cotton cloth to dry these areas.
•Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect the driver from
undesirable windshield reflection.
•Be certain to wash or wipe your hands
clean if you have been in contact with
certain products such as insect
repellent and suntan lotion in order to
avoid possible damage to the interior
painted surfaces.
•Do not use household or glass cleaners
as these may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
•Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Damage may not be covered by your
warranty.
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
white, cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean,
white cotton cloth. For more thorough
cleaning, use a mild soap and water
solution. If the spot cannot be
completely cleaned by this method,
the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning
product designed for automotive
interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, white, cotton cloth and press
the cloth onto the soiled area–allow
this to set at room temperature for 30
minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is
not soiled badly, use this cloth to clean
the area by using a rubbing motion for
60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a
clean, white, cotton cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF
EQUIPPED)
•Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
•Clean spills and stains as quickly as
possible.
258
Vehicle Care
Information Provided by:
•For routine cleaning, wipe the surface
with a soft, damp cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, wipe the surface
with a mild soap and water solution. In
Canada, use Motorcraft® Vinyl Cleaner.
Dry the area with a soft cloth.
•If the leather cannot be completely
cleaned using a mild soap and water
solution, the leather may be cleaned
using a commercially available leather
cleaning product designed for
automotive interiors.
•To check for compatibility, first test any
cleaner or stain remover on an
inconspicuous part of the leather.
•Do not use household cleaning
products, alcohol solutions, solvents
or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl
and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products
may cause premature wearing or
damage to the leather.
CLEANING THE ALLOY
WHEELS
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels and wheel
covers.
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are
coated with a clear coat paint finish. In
order to maintain their shine:
•Clean weekly with Motorcraft® Wheel
and Tire Cleaner. Heavy dirt and brake
dust accumulation may require
agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of
water.
•Never apply any cleaning chemical to
hot or warm wheel rims or covers.
•Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers.
Industrial-strength (heavy-duty)
cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in
combination with brush agitation to
remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over time.
•Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or
high caustic-based wheel cleaners,
steel wool, fuels or strong household
detergent.
•To remove tar and grease, use
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an
extended period of time (30 days or more),
read the following maintenance
recommendations to make sure your
vehicle stays in good operating condition.
All motor vehicles and their components
were engineered and tested for reliable,
regular driving. Long term storage under
various conditions may lead to component
degradation or failure unless specific
precautions are taken to preserve the
components.
General
•Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
•Protect from sunlight, if possible.
•If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
259
Vehicle Care
Information Provided by:
Body
•Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove
dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior
surfaces, rear-wheel housing and
underside of front fenders.
•Periodically wash vehicles stored in
exposed locations.
•Touch-up raw or primed metal to
prevent rust
•Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when the vehicle is washed.
•Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid
hinges, and latches with a light grade
oil.
•Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
•Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
•The engine oil and filter should be
changed prior to storage, as used
engine oil contain contaminates that
may cause engine damage.
•Start the engine every 15 days. Run at
fast idle until it reaches normal
operating temperature
•With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
Fuel system
•Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
Note: During extended periods of vehicle
storage (30 days or more), fuel may
deteriorate due to oxidation. Add a quality
gas stabilizer product to the vehicle fuel
system whenever actual or expected
storage periods exceed 30 days. Follow the
instructions on the additive label. The
vehicle should then be operated at idle
speed to circulate the additive throughout
the fuel system.
Cooling system
•Protect against freezing temperatures.
•When removing vehicle from storage,
check coolant fluid level. Confirm there
are no cooling system leaks, and fluid
is at the recommended level.
Battery
•Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
•If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, it
may be advisable to disconnect the
battery cables to ensure battery charge
is maintained for quick starting.
Note: If battery cables are disconnected, it
will be necessary to reset memory features.
Brakes
•Make sure brakes and parking brake
are fully released.
Tires
•Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
•Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under vehicle are covered with
grease to prevent rust.
•Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8
meters) every 15 days to lubricate
working parts and prevent corrosion.
260
Vehicle Care
Information Provided by:
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
•Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
•Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
•Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage (mice/squirrel nests).
•Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
•Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
•Check brake pedal operation. Drive the
vehicle 15 feet (4.5 meters) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
•Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
•If the battery was removed, clean the
battery cable ends and inspect.
Contact your authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
261
Vehicle Care
Information Provided by:
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system
is NOT a substitute for manually
checking tire pressure. The tire
pressure should be checked periodically
(at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see
Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure
to properly maintain your tire pressure
could increase the risk of tire failure, loss
of control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
262
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
Changing Tires with a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Care
must be taken when changing the tire to
avoid damaging the sensor
It is recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked
periodically (at least monthly) using an
accurate tire gauge, refer to Inflating your
tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to
your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning
light will turn on if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is
illuminated, your tires are under-inflated
and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked. Visit
www.checkmytires.org for additional
information.
When your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the tire
pressure monitoring system will continue
to identify an issue to remind you that the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
needs to be repaired and put back on your
vehicle.
To restore the full functionality of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When you Believe your System is not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. Please refer to
the following chart for information
concerning your tire pressure monitoring
system:
263
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure
warning light
1. Make sure tires are at the proper pres-
sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. 2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system functionality. For a
description on how the system functions,
refer to When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system functionality. For a
description on how the system functions,
refer to When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning
light
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
When Inflating your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at
a gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure
264
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
How Temperature Affects your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi (14
to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If
the vehicle is stationary overnight with the
outside temperature significantly lower
than the daytime temperature, the tire
pressure may decrease approximately 3
psi (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in
ambient temperature. This lower pressure
value may be detected by the TPMS as
being significantly lower than the
recommended inflation pressure and
activate the TPMS warning light for low
tire pressure. If the low tire pressure
warning light is on, visually check each tire
to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary.) Check
air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is
under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle
to the nearest location where air can be
added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to
the recommended inflation pressure.
TIRE CARE
Important information for 235/40R19
low-profile tires and wheels If your
vehicle is equipped with 235/40R19 tires,
they are low-profile tires. These tires and
wheels are designed to give your vehicle a
sport appearance. With low-profile tires,
you may notice an increase in road noise
and faster tire wear, depending on road
conditions and driving styles. Due to their
design, low-profile tires and wheels are
more prone to road damage from potholes,
rough or unpaved roads, car wash rails and
curb contact than standard tires and
wheels.
Note: Your vehicle’s warranty does not
cover these types of damage. Tires should
always be kept at the correct inflation
pressures and extra caution should be taken
when operating on rough roads to avoid
impacts that could cause wheel and tire
damage.
Information About Uniform Tire
Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The Quality
grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are determined
by standards that the United States
Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver or temporary use spare
tires, light truck or LT type tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part
575.104 (c)(2).
265
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
U.S. Department of Transportation Tire
quality grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford Motor
Company to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as
the government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 ½) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest
are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C, representing the tire’s
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
* Tire label: A label showing the
OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
266
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at 35 psi
[37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi
[43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door.
*B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door
* Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
* Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall
Both U.S. and Canada Federal
regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
267
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
CDEFG
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans
and light trucks. Note: If your tire
size does not begin with a letter
this may mean it is designated by
either ETRTO (European Tire and
Rim Technical Organization) or
JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing
Association).
B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on
all tires because it is not required by federal
law.
268
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph (130
km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h).
These ratings are listed in the
following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on
all tires because it is not required by federal
law.
Speed rating - mph (km/
h)
Letter rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
Speed rating - mph (km/
h)
Letter rating
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed
capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire
manufacturers sometimes use the letters
ZR. For those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN): This begins with
the letters DOT and indicates that
the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers
or letters are the plant code
designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are
the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
269
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire. Refer to the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), for the correct tire
pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear The treadwear grade
is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
270
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be
set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load,
radial tubeless, etc.
Additional Information Contained on
the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply to
this type of tire.
A
BC
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for
service on light trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual;
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single; defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for your
vehicle may be different from this example.
Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type
of tire.
271
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
A
BCDE
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the
tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to
sidewall edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label
containing tire inflation pressure
by tire size and other important
information located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver’s door.
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
272
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by Ford Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital
or dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold
inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most common
cause of tire failures and may result
in severe tire cracking, tread
separation or blowout, with unexpected
loss of vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall
flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in
heat buildup and internal damage to the
tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire
stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
control and accidents. A tire can lose up
to half of its air pressure and not appear
to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the
Ford recommended inflation
pressure even if it is less than the
maximum inflation pressure
information found on the tire. The
Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. Failure to
follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles
Maximum Inflation Pressure is
the tire manufacturer's maximum
permissible pressure and the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the manufacturer’s recommended
cold inflation pressure which can
be found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
273
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be
set lower than the recommended
pressure on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature
changes occur, tire inflation
pressures also change. A 10°F
(6°C) temperature drop can
cause a corresponding drop of 1
psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure.
Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the
proper pressure which can be
found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your
tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.
Note: If you are checking tire pressure when
the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more than 1 mile
[1.6 km]), never bleed or reduce air pressure.
The tires are hot from driving and it is normal
for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at
or below recommended cold inflation
pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get
air for your tire(s), check and record the tire
pressure first and add the appropriate air
pressure when you get to the pump. It is
normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve
on one tire, then firmly press the
tire gauge onto the valve and
measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by
pressing on the metal stem in the center of
the valve. Then recheck the pressure with
your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each
tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher
inflation pressure than the other tires. For T
type mini-spare tires (refer to the Dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly information
for a description): Store and maintain at 60
psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar
spare tires (refer to the Dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly information for a
description): Store and maintain at the
higher of the front and rear inflation pressure
as shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to
make sure there are no nails or
other objects embedded that
could poke a hole in the tire and
cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make
sure there are no gouges, cuts or
bulges.
274
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve
Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm),
tires must be replaced to help
prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread
will appear on the tire when the
tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 mm)
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
275
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
or suspected have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time depending
on many factors such as weather,
storage conditions, and conditions
of use (load, speed, inflation pressure, etc.)
the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after
six years regardless of tread wear.
However, heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions can
accelerate the aging process and may
require tires to be replaced more
frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when
you replace the road tires or after six years
due to aging even if it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal
regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires and
wheels that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type (such
as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire
and wheel size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of
the driver’s door. If this information is not
found on these labels then you should
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
276
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
WARNINGS
possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. Additionally the
use of non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension, axle,
transfer case or power transfer unit failure.
If you have questions regarding tire
replacement, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
When mounting replacement tires
and wheels, you should not exceed
the maximum pressure indicated on
the sidewall of the tire to set the beads
without additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate
and try again
When inflating the tire for mounting
pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater
than the maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following precautions must
be taken to protect the person mounting
the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire
and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead
seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m)
away from the wheel and tire assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the maximum
pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service
professional should do the mounting.
WARNINGS
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a
remote air fill with the person inflating
standing at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m)
away from the wheel and tire assembly
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle
It is recommended that the two
front tires or two rear tires
generally be replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels (originally installed
on your vehicle) are not designed
to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing,
your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your TPMS, or
some component of the TPMS
may be damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud,
sand, etc., do not rapidly spin the
tires; spinning the tires can tear the
tire and cause an explosion. A tire can
explode in as little as three to five seconds.
277
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
WARNINGS
Do not spin the wheels at over 35
mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail
and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do
with your tire mileage and safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there’s always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you’re
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension (if
equipped) may require alignment
of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask
an authorized dealer to check for and correct
any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved before tire
rotation.
278
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with
a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and wheels.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated,
inflation pressure must be checked and
adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval (as
indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life.
Front-wheel drive vehicles (front
tires on the left side of the
diagram)
E142547
Four-wheel drive vehicles (front
tires on the left side of the
diagram)
E142548
Sometimes irregular tire wear can
be corrected by rotating the tires.
Summer Tires
Your Ford vehicle may be
equipped with summer tires to
provide superior performance on
wet and dry roads. Summer tires
do not have the Mud and Snow
(M+S or M/S) tire traction rating
on the tire side wall. Since
summer tires do not have the
same traction performance as
All-season or Snow tires, Ford
does not recommend using
summer tires when temperatures
drop to approximately 40°F (5°C)
or below (depending on tire wear
and environmental conditions) or
in snow and ice conditions. Like
any tire, summer tire performance
is affected by tire wear and
environmental conditions. If you
must drive in those conditions,
Ford recommends using Mud and
Snow (M+S, M/S), All-season or
Snow tires.
279
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING
Snow tires must be the same size,
load index, speed rating as those
originally provided by Ford. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended by
Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure.
The tires on your vehicle may have
all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates,
you may need to use snow tires and cables.
If you need to use cables, it is
recommended that steel wheels (of the
same size and specifications) be used, as
cables may chip aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and traction devices
•If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle
•Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body
to tire dimension restrictions.
•Use no larger than 15 mm cables or
chains ONLY on front axle with
215/60R16 tires. Do not use chains or
cables on any other size tires.
•The snow chains or cables must be
mounted in pairs on the front axle.
•When driving with tire cables do not
exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or the
maximum speed recommended by the
chain manufacturer, whichever is less.
•Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables
rub or bang against the vehicle, stop
and retighten them. If this does not
work, remove the cables to prevent
vehicle damage.
•Remove the cables when they are no
longer needed. Do not use cables on
dry roads.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealants may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should not be used. However, if
you must use a sealant, the tire pressure
monitoring system sensor and valve stem
on the wheel must be replaced by an
authorized Ford dealer.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 262). If the tire
pressure monitor sensor becomes
damaged, it will no longer function.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full functionality
of the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
280
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the
tire pressure monitoring system sensors.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 262). Replace the spare tire with a
road tire as soon as possible. During
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
the authorized dealer inspect the tire
pressure monitoring system sensor for
damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
begins with the letter T for tire size and
may have Temporary Use Only molded in
the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY.
When driving with one of the dissimilar
spare tires listed above, do not:
•Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
•Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
•Tow a trailer.
•Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
•Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
•Use commercial car washing
equipment.
•Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
listed above at any one wheel location can
lead to impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking
performance.
•Comfort and noise.
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
•Winter weather driving capability.
•Wet weather driving capability.
•All-wheel driving capability (if
applicable).
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
•Exceed 70 miles per hour (113
kilometers per hour).
•Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
•Use commercial car washing
equipment.
•Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
281
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking
performance.
•Comfort and noise.
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
•Winter weather driving capability.
•Wet weather driving capability.
•All-wheel driving capability (if
applicable).
•Load leveling adjustment (if
applicable).
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
•Towing a trailer.
•Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
•Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off
the ground, the transmission alone
will not prevent the vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack, even if the
transmission selector lever is in position P.
To help prevent your vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
sure to place the transmission
selector lever in position P, set the parking
brake and block (in both directions) the
wheel that is diagonally opposite (other
side and end of the vehicle) to the tire
being changed.
WARNINGS
Never get underneath a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack. If your
vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on
the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission selector lever
in position P (automatic transmission)
or position R (manual transmission)
and turn the engine off.
3. Remove the carpeted wheel cover.
4. Remove the spare tire bolt securing the
spare tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Remove the spare tire from the spare
tire compartment.
E142550
282
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
6. Remove the lug wrench and jack from
the foam holder.
E142551
7. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.
8. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half
turn counterclockwise but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised
off the ground.
9. The vehicle jacking points are shown
here, and are depicted on the yellow
warning label on the jack. Jack at the
specified locations to avoid
damage to the vehicle.
E145908
10. Small arrow-shaped marks on the
sills show the location of the jacking
points.
E142553
11. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
12. Replace the flat tire with the spare
tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts
until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts
until the wheel has been lowered.
13. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1
2
34
5
E75442
14. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page
284).
283
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
Stowing the flat tire
The full-size road wheel can be stowed in
the spare tire compartment.
1. Lift the carpeted wheel cover at an
angle to access the spare tire
compartment.
2. Place the wheel in the spare tire well
with the valve stem facing down. Use
the mini-spare bolt to secure the wheel
through one of the lug holes.
3. Place the jack, tools and foam block
back into the spare tire compartment.
4. Replace the carpeted wheel cover.
E146026
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces
of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel
mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while
the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.
Ib-ft (Nm)*
Bolt size
100 (135)M12 x 1.5
*Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 km) after any wheel
disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
284
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot bore and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
285
Wheels and Tires
Information Provided by:
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
2.5L engine2.0L EcoBoost engine1.6L EcoBoost engineEngine
15212298Cubic inches
Minimum 87 octaneMinimum 87 octaneMinimum 87 octaneRequired fuel
9.7:19.3:110.0:1Compression
ratio
0.049-0.053 in.
(1.25-1.35 mm)
0.027-0.031 in.
(0.70-0.80 mm)
0.027-0.031 in. (0.70-
0.80 mm)
Spark plug gap
Drivebelt Routing
1.6L engine
E142479
2.0L and 2.5L engines
A
B
E142480
Long drivebelt is on first pulley
groove closest to engine
A
Short drivebelt is on second
pulley groove farthest from
engine
B
MOTORCRAFT PARTS
2.5L Engine2.0L EcoBoost Engine1.6L EcoBoost EngineComponent
FA-1912Air filter
element1
FL-910S
Oil filter2
BXT-96R-500Battery
BXT-96R-590
286
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
2.5L Engine2.0L EcoBoost Engine1.6L EcoBoost EngineComponent
SP-530SP-527SP-532
Spark plugs3
FP-71Cabin air filter
WW-2700 (driver side)Windshield
wiper blade WW-2601 (passenger side)
1 Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter
element is not used.
2 Only use the specified replacement oil filter. The use of a non-specified oil filter can
result in engine damage.
3 For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 420).
Note: Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications
for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft® or equivalent replacement parts. The customer
warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used.
287
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
E142478
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
288
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E142806
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.
CodeDescription
WSix-speed automatic transmission
BSix-speed manual transmission
289
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Ford Part Number /
Ford Specification
Ford Part Name or
Equivalent
CapacityItem
PM-1-C / WSS-
M6C65-A2 and ISO
4925 Class 6
Motorcraft® DOT 4
LV High Perform-
ance Brake Fluid
Between MIN
and MAX on
reservoir
Brake fluid 1
XG-4 or XL-5 or equi-
valent / ESB-M1C93-
B
Multi-Purpose
Grease (lithium
grease)
Not applicableDoor latch, hood latch,
auxiliary hood latch,
trunk latch, seat tracks.
XL-1 / NoneMotorcraft® Penet-
rating and Lock
Lubricant
Not applicableLock cylinder
XT-10-QLV
MERCON® LV
Motorcraft®
MERCON® LV ATF
9.0 qt (8.5 L)Automatic transmission
fluid 2, 3
XY-80W90-QL /
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE
80W-90 Premium
Rear Axle Lubricant
1.2 qt (1.15 L)Rear differential (AWD)
fluid
XY-75W140-QL /
WSL-M2C192-A
Motorcraft® SAE
75W-140 Synthetic
Rear Axle Lubricant
11.8fl oz (0.35 L)Power Transfer Unit
(PTU) fluid (AWD) 4
- XO-5W30-QSP
(U.S.)
- Motorcraft® SAE
5W-30 Premium
Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil (U.S.)
5.7 qt (5.4 L)2.0L EcoBoost engine
oil 5, 6
- XO-5W30-QFS
(U.S.)
- Motorcraft® SAE
5W-30 Full
Synthetic Motor Oil
(U.S.)
- CXO-5W30-LSP12
(Canada)
- CXO-5W30-LFS12
(Canada)
- Motorcraft® SAE
5W-30 Super
Premium Motor Oil
(Canada)
/ WSS-M2C946-A
with API Certification
Mark
- Motorcraft® SAE
5W-30 Synthetic
Motor Oil (Canada)
- XO-5W20-QSP
(U.S.)
- Motorcraft® SAE
5W-20 Premium
Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil (U.S.)
4.3 qt (4.1 L)1.6L EcoBoost engine oil
5, 6
- XO-5W20-QFS
(U.S.)
5.7 qt (5.4 L)
2.5L engine oil 5, 6
290
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
Ford Part Number /
Ford Specification
Ford Part Name or
Equivalent
CapacityItem
- CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada)
- Motorcraft® SAE
5W-20 Full
Synthetic Motor Oil
(U.S.)
- CXO-5W20-LFS12
(Canada)
- Motorcraft® SAE
5W-20 Super
Premium Motor Oil
(Canada)
/ WSS-M2C945-A
and API Certification
Mark
- Motorcraft® SAE
5W-20 Synthetic
Motor Oil (Canada)
- VC-3DIL-B (U.S.)Motorcraft® Orange
Antifreeze / Coolant
Prediluted
9.7 qt (9.2 L)2.0L EcoBoost engine
coolant 7- CVC-3DIL-B
(Canada)
8.5 qt (8 L)1.6L EcoBoost engine
coolant 7
/ WSS-M97B44-D2
9.2 qt (8.7 L)
2.5L engine coolant 7
- ZC-32-A (U.S.)- Motorcraft®
Premium Windshield
Washer Concentrate
(U.S.)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
- CXC-37-(A, B, D,
and F) (Canada)
/ WSB-M8B16-A2
Premium Quality
Windshield Washer
Fluid (Canada)
291
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
Ford Part Number /
Ford Specification
Ford Part Name or
Equivalent
CapacityItem
Not applicableNot applicable16.5 gal (62.5 L)Front-wheel drive fuel
tank
17.5 gal (66.2 L)All-wheel drive fuel tank
1Use only Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Brake Fluid, or equivalent, meeting
WSS-M6C65-A2 and ISO 4925 Class 6. Use of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause brake system damage.
2Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
3Automatic transmissions that require Motorcraft® MERCON® LV transmission fluid
should only use Motorcraft® MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter at the correct service interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 420).
4See your authorized dealer for fluid level checking or filling.
5Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet
the requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C946-A, SAE 5W-30 (2.0L engine) or
WSS-M2C945-A, SAE 5W-20 (1.6L and 2.5L engines) and display the API Certification
Mark.
6Your engine has been designed to be used with Ford engine oil, which gives a fuel economy
benefit while maintaining the durability of your engine.
Using oils other than the one specified can result in longer engine cranking periods, reduced
engine performance, reduced fuel economy and increased emission levels.
7Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
292
Capacities and Specifications
Information Provided by:
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your dealer or visit our online store
at: Accessories.Ford.com (U.S. only).
Ford Custom Accessories are available for
your vehicle through your local Ford or Ford
of Canada dealer. Ford Motor Company
will repair or replace any properly
dealer-installed Ford Custom Accessories
found to be defective in factory-supplied
materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component
damaged by the defective accessories. The
accessories will be warranted for
whichever provides you the greatest
benefit:
•12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000
km) (whichever occurs first), or
•the remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy
of the warranty.
Exterior style
•Hood deflectors
•Side window deflectors
•Splash guards
•Rear spoiler
•Wheels
•Bumper protectors
Interior style
•All-weather floor mats
•Rear seat entertainment*
•Premium carpeted floor mats
•Lighted door sill plates
•Electrochromatic
compass/temperature interior mirrors
Lifestyle
•Ash cup / smoker's packages
•Roof racks and carriers*
•Cargo area protectors
•Cargo net
•Cargo organizers
•Interior light kit
Peace of mind
•Remote start
•Vehicle security systems
•Wheel locks
•Bumper-mounted parking sensor*
•Locking fuel plug for capless fuel
system
*Ford Licensed Accessories (FLA) are
warranted by the accessory
manufacturer's warranty. Ford Licensed
Accessories are fully designed and
developed by the accessory manufacturer
and have not been designed or tested to
Ford Motor Company engineering
requirements. Contact your Ford dealer for
details regarding the manufacturer's
limited warranty and a copy of the FLA
product limited warranty offered by the
accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
293
Accessories
Information Provided by:
•When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Consult your
authorized dealer for specific weight
information.
•The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems —
such as two-way radios, telephones
and theft alarms - that are equipped
with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle
should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed
only by a qualified service technician.
•Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if they are not properly
designed for automotive use.
•To avoid interference with other vehicle
functions, such as anti-lock braking
systems, amateur radio users who
install radios and antennas onto their
vehicle should not locate the amateur
radio antennas in the area of the
driver's side hood.
•Any non-Ford custom electrical or
electronic accessories or components
that are added to the vehicle by the
authorized dealer or the owner, may
adversely affect battery performance
and durability, and may also adversely
affect the performance of other
electrical systems in the vehicle.
294
Accessories
Information Provided by:
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. only)
More than 32 million Ford and Lincoln
owners have discovered the powerful
protection of Ford Extended Service Plan.
It is the only extended service plan backed
by Ford Motor Company, and provides
peace of mind protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four, new-vehicle Extended
Service Plans with different levels of
coverage. Ask your dealer for details.
1. PremiumCare - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
500 covered components, this plan is
so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered!
2. ExtraCare - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCare - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCare - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by
all Ford and Lincoln Dealers in the U.S. and
Canada. It is the only extended service plan
authorized and backed by Ford Motor
Company. That means you get:
•Reliable, quality service anywhere you
go.
•Factory-trained technicians.
•Ford Authorized Parts used with every
covered repair.
Rental Car Reimbursement
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including Bumper-to-Bumper
warranty repairs, or manufacturer’s recalls.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Extended Service Plan coverage expires,
you can transfer any remaining coverage
to the new owner. Whenever you’re ready
to sell your car, prospective buyers may
feel better about taking a risk on your used
vehicle. Ford Extended Service Plan may
add resale value!
Plus, exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
•Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts.
•Out-of-fuel and lock-out assistance.
•Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
•Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,
rental car coverage and emergency
transportation.
Ford Extended Service Plan Can
Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and
labor – can easily exceed the price of your
Ford Extended Service Plan Service
Contract. With a Ford Extend Service Plan,
you minimize your risk for unexpected
repair bills and rising repair costs.
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly
Maintaining Your Vehicle!
Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a
Premium Maintenance Plan that covers
items that routinely wear out.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never have
to worry about affording your vehicle
maintenance. It covers regular checkups,
routine inspections, preventive care and
replacement of items that require periodic
attention for normal wear:
•Wiper blades
•Spark plugs (except California)
•Clutch disc
295
Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Information Provided by:
•Brake pads and linings
•Shock absorbers
•Belts and hoses
Contact your selling Ford or Lincoln
dealership today so they can customize a
Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your
driving lifestyle and budget.
Interest Free Finance Options
Available
Take advantage of our installment
payment plan, just a 10% down payment
will provide you with an affordable no
interest, no-fee payment opportunity.
For More Information
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
To learn more, call our Ford ESP specialists
at 800-367-3377, and don't forget to ask
about our interest free payment program,
allowing you all the security and benefits
Ford ESP has to offer while paying over
time. your pre-approved with no credit
checks, no hassles!
Or, complete the information below and
mail to:
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 8072
Royal Oak, MI 48068-0039
Name (PLEASE PRINT)
APT.#ADDRESS
ZIPSTATECITY
E-MAIL
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended
Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan
is the only service contract backed by Ford
Motor Company of Canada, Limited.
Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford
Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
•Rental reimbursement
•Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items
•Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires
•Roadside Assistance benefits
There are several Ford Extended Service
Plans available in various time, distance
and deductible combinations. Each plan
is tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental.
296
Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Information Provided by:
When you purchase Ford Extended Service
Plan, you receive added peace-of-mind
protection throughout Canada and the
United States, provided by a network of
participating Ford Motor Company dealers.
The Lincoln Maintenance Protection Plan
is honored at authorized Lincoln dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada
and the United States are not eligible for
Ford Extended Service Plan coverage.
This information is subject to change.
For more information, visit your local Ford
of Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find
the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right
for you.
297
Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Information Provided by:
GENERAL INFORMATION
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and
portable media player. This allows you to:
•Make and receive calls.
•Access and play music from your
portable music player.
•Use 911 Assist™, Vehicle Health Report
and SYNC Services (Traffic, Directions
& Information) (if equipped).
•Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
•Stream music from your connected
phone.
•Text message.
•Use the advanced voice recognition
system
•Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).
Make sure that you review your device's
user guide before using it with SYNC.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you cannot
answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.
In the United States, call: 1-888-270-1055.
In Canada, call: 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
298
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
•Required to activate Vehicle Health
Report and to view the reports online.
•Required to activate the
subscription-based SYNC Services and
to personalize your Saved Points and
Favorites.
•Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
•Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, accident and
injury. Ford strongly recommends
that drivers use extreme caution when
using any device that may take their focus
off the road. Your primary responsibility is
the safe operation of the vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving, encourage
the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of
applicable state and local laws that may
affect use of electronic devices while
driving.
When using SYNC:
•Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Carefully place cords and
cables where they cannot be stepped
on or interfere with the operation of
pedals, seats, compartments or safe
driving abilities.
•Do not leave playing devices in the
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
•Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See your authorized dealer.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
299
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the sections on 911 Assist
(if equipped), Vehicle Health Report (if
equipped), and Traffic, Directions and
Information (if equipped).
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is in front of you.
Helpful Hints
Make sure the interior of the vehicle is as
quiet as possible. Wind noise from open
windows and road vibrations may prevent
the system from correctly recognizing
spoken commands.
After pressing the voice icon, wait until
after the tone sounds and Listening
appears before saying a command. Any
command spoken prior to this does not
register with the system.
Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
At any time you can interrupt the system
while it is speaking by pressing the voice
icon.
Initiating a Voice Session
E142599
Push the voice icon; a tone
sounds and Listening appears in
the display. Say any of the
following:
If You Want ToSay
Stream audio from your phone."Bluetooth audio"
Cancel the requested action."Cancel"
Access the device connected to the auxiliary input jack."Line in"
Access mobile applications.
"Mobile apps" *
Make calls."Phone"
Access the SYNC Services portal.
"Services" *
Return to the main menu."SYNC"
Access the device connected to your USB port."USB"
Run a vehicle health report.
"Vehicle health report" *
300
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
If You Want ToSay
Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback."Voice settings"
Hear a list of voice commands available in the current
mode.
"Help"
* If equipped, U.S. only.
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction (voice settings). You can
customize the voice recognition system to
provide more or less instruction and
feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
E142599
Push the voice icon. Say "Voice
settings" when prompted, then
any of the following:
The SystemWhen You Say
Provides less audible interaction and more
tone prompts.
"Interaction mode advanced"
Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance.
"Interaction mode standard"
The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there are multiple possible
responses to your request. For example,
the system may ask "Phone, is that
correct?".
The SystemWhen You Say
Makes a best guess from the command;
you may still occasionally be asked to
confirm settings.
"Confirmation prompts off"
Clarifies your voice command with a short
question.
"Confirmation prompts on"
301
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
The system creates candidate lists when
it has the same confidence level of several
options based on your voice command.
When turned on, you may be prompted
with as many as four possibilities for
clarification.
For example, say "Say 1 after the tone to
call John Doe at home. Say 2 after the tone
to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after
the tone to call Jane Doe at home." You
could also say "Say 1 after the tone to play
John Doe, Say 2 after the tone to play
Johnny Doe."
The SystemWhen You Say
Makes a best guess from the media
candidate list; you may still occasionally be
asked questions.
"Media candidate lists off"
Clarifies your voice command for media
candidates.
"Media candidate lists on"
Makes a best guess from the phone
candidate list; you may still occasionally be
asked questions.
"Phone candidate lists off"
Clarifies your voice command for phone
candidates
"Phone candidate lists on"
USING SYNC® WITH YOUR
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cellular phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cellular
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
•Answering an incoming call.
•Ending a call.
•Using privacy mode.
•Dialing a number.
•Redialing.
•Call waiting notification.
•Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone's compatibility, see
your phone's user manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing a Phone for the First Time
Note: SYNC can support downloading up
to approximately 2000 entries per
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and
radio are turned on and the transmission is
in position P.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC
allows you to make and receive hands-free
calls.
302
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
1. Press the phone button; when the
display indicates no phone is paired,
press OK.
2. When Add Bluetooth Device appears,
press OK.
3. When Find SYNC appears in the
display, press OK.
4. Put your phone into Bluetooth
discovery mode. See your phone's user
guide if necessary.
5. When prompted on your phone's
display, enter the six-digit PIN provided
by SYNC in the radio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is
successful
Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up), downloading
your phone book, etc.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and
radio are turned on and the transmission is
in position P.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
1. Press the phone button and scroll until
System Settings is selected.
2. Press OK and scroll until Bluetooth
Devices is selected, then press OK.
3. Scroll until Add Bluetooth Device is
selected, then press OK.
4. When Find SYNC appears in the
display, press OK.
5. Put your phone into Bluetooth
discovery mode. See your phone's user
guide if necessary.
6. When prompted on your phone's
display, enter the six-digit PIN provided
by SYNC in the radio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
The system then prompts with questions,
such as if you would like to set the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up), download your
phone book, etc.
Phone Voice Commands
"PHONE"
"Go to privacy"
"Call <name>"1
"Hold"
"Call <name> at home"1
"Join"
"Call <name> at work"1
"Menu"2,4
"Call <name> in office"1
"Phone book <name>"2
"Call <name> on mobile OR cell"1
"Phone book <name> at home"2
"Call <name> on other"1
303
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
"PHONE"
"Phone book <name> at office"2
"Call history incoming"2
"Phone book <name> at work"2
"Call history missed"2
"Phone book <name> on mobile OR cell"2
"Call history outgoing"2
"Phone book <name> on other"2
"Connections"2
"Dial"1,3
1 These commands do not require you to say "Phone" first.
2 These commands are not available until phone information is completely downloaded
using Bluetooth.
3 See Dial table below.
4 See Menu table below.
Phone book commands: When you ask
SYNC to access a phone book name,
number, etc., the requested information
appears in the display to view. Press the
phone button and say "Call" to call the
contact.
"DIAL"
"411 (four-one-one)", "911" (nine-one-one), etc.
"700" (seven hundred)
"800" (eight hundred)
"900" (nine hundred)
"Pound", "Slash" (#,/)
"Number <0-9>"
"Asterisk" (*)
"Clear" (deletes all entered digits)
"Delete" (deletes one digit)
"Plus"
"Star"
304
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the
phone button or press Menu to go to the
Phone menu.
"MENU"
"(Phone) connections"
"(Phone) settings (message) notification off"
"(Phone) settings (message) notification on"
"(Phone) settings (set) phone ringer"
"(Phone) settings (set) ringer 1"
"(Phone) settings (set) ringer 2"
"(Phone) settings (set) ringer 3"
"(Phone) settings (set) ringer off"
"Battery"
"Phone name"
"Signal"
"Text message inbox"
Words in ( ) are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system to understand
the command.
Making Calls
Press the voice icon and when prompted
say:
1. Say "Call <name>" or "Dial", then the
desired number.
2. When the system confirms the number,
say "Dial" again to initiate the call.
To erase the last spoken digit, say "Delete"
or press the left arrow button. To erase all
spoken digits, say "Clear" or press and hold
the left arrow button.
To end the call, press and hold the phone
button.
Receiving Calls
When receiving a call, you can:
•Answer the call by pressing the phone
button.
•Reject the call by pressing and holding
the phone button.
•Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Phone Options during an Active
Call
During an active call, you have additional
menu features which become available,
such as putting a call on hold, joining calls,
etc. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through
the menu options.
305
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
To access:
•Press Menu during an active call.
•When Active Call Menu is selected,
press OK.
•Scroll to cycle through the following
options:
You CanWhen You Select
Mute the call.Mute Call?
Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to
your cellular phone for a more private conversation.
Privacy
Press OK when Privacy on/off appears. (The display
indicates In Privacy and the system transfers your call.)
Put an active call on hold.Call Hold
Press OK when Hold on/off appears. To answer another
call at this time, press the phone button.
Enter "tones", such as numbers for passwords.Enter Tones
Scroll until the desired number appears in the display, then
press OK; a tone sounds as confirmation. Repeat as
necessary.
Join two separate calls. (SYNC supports a maximum of
three callers on a multi-party/conference call.)
Join Calls
1. Press the phone button.
2. Access the desired contact through SYNC or use voice
commands to place the second call. Once actively in the
second call, press Menu.
3. Scroll until Join Calls appears and press OK. Press OK
again when Join Calls? appears.
Access your phonebook contacts.Phonebook
1. Press OK to select, then scroll through your phonebook
contacts.
2. Press OK again when the desired selection appears in
the display.
3. Press the phone button.
Access your call history log.Call History
1. Press OK to select, then scroll through your call history
options (incoming, outgoing or missed).
2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the
display.
3. Press the phone button to call the selection.
Exit the current menu.Return
306
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
Accessing Features through the
Phone Menu
The phone menu allows you to redial a
number, access your call history and phone
book and send text messages as well as
access phone and system settings. You
can also access advanced features, such
as 911 Assist™, Vehicle Health Report and
SYNC Services.
1. Press the phone button to enter the
Phone menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through:
You CanWhen You Select
Redial the last number called (if available). Press OK to
select, then press OK again to confirm.
Phone Redial
Allows you to access any previously dialed, received or
missed calls while your phone has been connected to the
system.
Call History1
1. Press OK to select.
2. Scroll to select from Call History Incoming,Call
History Outgoing or Call History Missed. Press OK
make your selection.
3. Press OK or the phone button to call the desired selec-
tion.
The system attempts to automatically re-download your
phone book and call history each time your phone
connects to SYNC (if the auto download feature is on and
your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone supports this
feature).
Allows you to access your downloaded phonebook.
Phonebook1,2
1. Press OK to confirm and enter. If your phonebook has
fewer than 255 listings, they appear alphabetically in flat
file mode. If there are more, they are organized into
alphabetical categories.
2. Scroll until the desired contact appears, then press OK.
3. Press OK or the phone button.
Enables you to send, download and delete text messages.
Text Message1
Allows you to view your phone's status, set ring tones,
select your message notification, change phone book
entries and automatically download your cellular phone
among other features.
Phone Settings 1
Access the SYNC Services portal where you can request
various types of information, traffic reports and directions.
SYNC Services3
307
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
You CanWhen You Select
Place an emergency call to a 911 operator for you after an
accident (if the feature is used properly).
911 Assist4
Create and receive a diagnostic report card on your vehicle.
Vehicle Health Report3
Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your
smartphone.
Mobile Apps3
Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings (add, connect,
set as primary, on/off, delete) as well as Advanced menu
listings (prompts, languages, defaults, master reset, install
application and system information).
System Settings
Exit the phone menu by pressing OK.Exit Phone Menu
1 This is a phone-dependent feature.
2 This is a phone-dependent and speed-dependent feature.
3 If equipped, U.S. only.
4 If equipped, U.S. and Canada only.
Text Messaging
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages. The
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have
to take your eyes off the road.
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
Your phone must support downloading text
messages using Bluetooth to receive
incoming text messages.
Note: Forwarding a text message is a
speed-dependent feature and can only be
done when the vehicle is traveling at 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text
message.
308
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
When a new message arrives, an audible
tone sounds and the display indicates you
have a new message. You have these
options:
•Press the voice button, wait for the
prompt and say "Read message" to
have SYNC read the message to you.
•Press OK to receive and open the text
message or do nothing and the
message goes into your text message
inbox. Press OK again and SYNC reads
your message aloud as you are not able
to view the message. You can then also
choose whether you'd like to reply or
forward the message.
•Press OK and scroll to choose
between:
•Reply to Text Message: Press OK
to access and then scroll through
the list of pre-defined messages to
send.
•Forward Text Message: Press OK
to forward the message to anyone
in your Phonebook or Call
History. You can also choose Enter
Number.
Sending, Downloading and Deleting
Your Text Messages
Text messaging is a phone-dependent
feature. If your phone is compatible, SYNC
allows you to receive, send, download and
delete text messages.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Scroll until Text Message appears,
then press OK.
Scroll to select from the following options:
•Send Text Message? enables you to
send a new text message based on a
pre-defined set of 15 messages.
•Download Unread Msgs allows you
to download your unread messages
(only) to SYNC. To download the
messages, press OK to select. The
display indicates your messages are
being downloaded. When complete,
SYNC takes you to your inbox.
•Delete All Messages? allows you to
delete current text messages from
SYNC (not your phone). To delete the
messages, press OK to select. The
display indicates when all your text
messages have been deleted and
SYNC returns you to the text message
menu
•Return exits the current menu when
you press OK.
When you select Send Text Message?
(and your phone supports this feature),
you have the following choices of
pre-defined messages:
•Be there in 10 minutes
•Be there in 20 minutes
•Call me
•Call U later
•Can't talk right now
•Can't wait to see you
•I love you
•I need more directions
•I'm stuck in traffic
•No
•Thanks
•Too funny
•Where R you?
•Why?
•Yes
To send the message:
309
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
1. Press OK when the desired selection is
in the display. The system now needs
to know who to send the message to.
2. Scroll to cycle through Phonebook or
Call History entries. You can also
select Enter Number to audibly enter
the desired number.
3. Press OK to enter the desired menu
and scroll to select the specific
contact.
4. Press OK when the contact appears
and press OK again to confirm when
the system asks if you would like to
send the message. Each text message
is sent with the following signature:
"This message was sent from my
<Ford or Lincoln>".
Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are phone-dependent features. Your
phone settings allow you to access and
adjust features, such as your ring tone, text
message notification, modify your phone
book and also set up automatic download.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Scroll until Phone Settings appears,
then press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following
options:
You CanWhen You Select
See the provider, name, signal power, battery power and
roaming status of your connected phone.
Phone Status
Press OK to select and scroll to view the information. When
done, press OK again to return to the phone status menu.
Select which ring tone sounds during an incoming call (one
of the system's or your phone's).
Set Ringer
1. Press OK to select and scroll to hear Ringer 1,Ringer
2,Ringer 3 and Phone Ringer.
2. Press OK to select.
If your phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringer
sounds when Phone Ringer is chosen.
Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you
when a text message arrives.
Message Notification
1. Press OK to select and scroll between Message Noti-
fication On or Message Notification Off.
2. Press OK to select.
Modify the contents of your phone book (i.e., add, delete,
download). Press OK to select and scroll between:
Modify Phonebook
Add Contacts: Press OK to add more contacts from your
phone book. Push the desired contact(s) on your phone.
See your phone's user guide on how to push contacts.
310
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
You CanWhen You Select
Delete Phonebook: Press OK to delete the current phone
book and call history. When Delete Phonebook appears,
press OK to confirm. SYNC takes you back to the Phone
Settings menu.
Download Phonebook: Press OK to select and press OK
again when Confirm Download? appears.
Automatically download your phone book each time your
phone connects to SYNC. (Downloading times are phone-
dependent and quantity-dependent.)
Auto Download
Press OK to select. When Auto Download On? appears,
press OK to have your phonebook automatically down-
loaded each time. (When auto download is on, any
changes, additions or deletions saved since your last
download are deleted.)
Select Off to NOT download your phonebook every time
your phone connects to SYNC. Your phonebook, call
history and text messages can only be accessed when
your specific phone is connected to SYNC.
Exit the current menu.Return
System Settings
This menu provides access to your
Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu
features. Use the arrow buttons to scroll
through the menu options.
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to add, connect and delete devices, set a
phone as primary as well as turn your
Bluetooth feature on and off.
The Advanced menu allows you to access
and set prompts, languages, defaults,
perform a master reset, install an
application and view system information.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
1. Press the phone button to enter the
Phone menu
2. Scroll until System Settings appears,
then press OK.
3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices
appears, then select OK.
4. Scroll to select from the following
options:
You CanIf You Select
Pair additional phones to the system.
Add Bluetooth Device*
1. Press OK to select, then again when Find SYNC appears
in the display.
311
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
You CanIf You Select
2. Follow the directions in your phone's user guide to put
your phone into discovery mode. A six-digit PIN appears
in the display.
3. When prompted on your phone's display, enter the six-
digit PIN provided by SYNC.
4. When Set as Primary Phone? appears, press OK. Scroll
to toggle between Yes and No, then press OK.
5. Depending on the functionality of your phone, you may
be asked additional questions (i.e. if you would like to
download your phonebook). Scroll and use OK to select
your responses.
Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone.
(Only one device can be connected at a time. When
another phone is connected, the previous one is discon-
nected.)
Connect Bluetooth Device
1. Press OK to select and view a list of previously paired
phones.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen, then press OK
to connect the phone.
Set a previously paired phone as your primary phone.Set as Primary Phone?
Press OK to select and scroll to select the desired phone.
Press OK to confirm.
SYNC attempts to connect with the primary phone at every
ignition cycle. When a phone is selected as primary, it
appears first in the list and is marked with an *
Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.Set Bluetooth On/Off
Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off. When
the desired selection is chosen, press OK. (Turning
Bluetooth off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and
deactivates all Bluetooth features. )
Delete a paired phone.Delete Device
Press OK and scroll to select the device. Press OK to
confirm.
Delete all previously paired phones (and all information
originally saved with those phones).
Delete All Devices
Press OK to select.
Exit the current menu.Return
* This is a speed-dependent feature.
312
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
Advanced Menu Options
1. Press the phone button to enter the
Phone menu
2. Scroll until System Settings appears,
then press OK.
3. Scroll until Advanced appears, then
select OK.
4. Scroll to select from the following
options:
You CanIf You Select
Get help from SYNC by using questions, helpful hints or
asking you for a specific action. To turn these prompts on
or off:
Prompts
1. Press OK to select and scroll to select between on or
off.
2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the
display. SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.
Choose between English,Français and Español. Once
selected, all of the radio displays and prompts are in the
selected language.
Languages
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages.
2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the
display. If you change the language setting, the display
indicates that the system is updating. When complete,
SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.
Return to the factory default settings. This selection does
not erase your indexed information (phonebook, call
history, text messages and paired devices).
Factory Defaults
1. Press OK to select and then press OK again when
Restore Defaults? appears in the display.
2. Press OK to confirm.
Completely erase all information stored on SYNC
(phonebook, call history, text messages and paired
devices) and return to the factory default settings.
Master Reset
Press OK to select. The display indicates when complete
and SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.
Install applications you have downloaded.Install Application?
Press OK and scroll to select. Press OK to confirm.
Delete all previously paired phones (and all information
originally saved with those phones).
Delete All Devices
Press OK to select.
Access the Auto Version number as well as the FDN
number.
System Info
313
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
You CanIf You Select
Press OK to select.
This is a Bluetooth component which can further help your
phone with the exchange of text messages.
MAP Profile
Exit the current menu.Return
SYNC® APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES (IF EQUIPPED)
In order for the following features to work,
your cellular phone must be compatible
with SYNC. To check your phone's
compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
•SYNC Services (if equipped, U.S. only):
Provides access to traffic, directions
and information such as travel,
horoscopes, stock prices and more.
•911 Assist™: Can alert 911 in the event
of an emergency.
•Vehicle Health Report (if equipped,
U.S. only): Provides a diagnostic and
maintenance report card of your
vehicle.
911 Assist
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
prior to a crash, the system will not
dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
WARNINGS
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
Always place your phone in a secure
location in the vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a collision. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, ensure
that you read the 911 Assist privacy notice
later in this section for important
information.
Note: If 911 Assist is turned on or off by any
user, that setting applies for all paired
phones. If 911 Assist is turned off, either a
voice message plays or a display
message/icon comes on (or both) when the
vehicle is started after a previously paired
phone connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
314
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
If a crash deploys an airbag or activates
the fuel pump shut-off, your
SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to
contact emergency services by dialing 911
through a paired and connected
Bluetooth-enabled phone. For more
information about 911 Assist visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 34). Important information
regarding airbag deployment is in this
chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 225).
Important information regarding the fuel
pump shut-off is in this chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On
1. Press the phone button to enter the
Phone menu.
2. Scroll until 911 Assist is selected.
3. Press OK to confirm and enter the 911
Assist menu.
4. Scroll to choose between the On and
Off selections.
5. Press OK when the desired option
appears in the radio display. Set On or
Set Off appears in the display as
confirmation.
Off selections include: Off with reminder
and Off without reminder. Off with
reminder provides a display and voice
reminder at phone connection at vehicle
start. Off without reminder provides a
display reminder only without a voice
reminder at phone connection.
To make sure that 911 Assist works
properly:
•SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
•The 911 Assist feature must be set on
prior to the incident.
•A Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
phone has to be paired and connected
to SYNC.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
•The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (which would
activate 911 Assist); however, if 911 Assist
is triggered, SYNC tries to contact
emergency services. If a connected phone
is damaged or loses connection to SYNC,
SYNC searches for, and tries to connect
to, any available previously paired phone
and tries to make the call to 911.
Before making the call:
•SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
Failure to cancel the call results in
SYNC attempting to dial 911.
•SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
If the call is not cancelled and a successful
call is made, a pre-recorded message is
played for the 911 operator, then the
occupant(s) in the vehicle is able to talk
with the operator. Be prepared to provide
your name, phone number and location
immediately, because not all 911 systems
are capable of receiving this information
electronically.
315
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
911 Assist May Not Work If
•Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware was damaged in a crash.
•The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
•The phone(s) paired and connected to
the system was thrown from the
vehicle.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
Once 911 Assist is set on, it may disclose to
emergency services that the vehicle has
been in a crash involving the deployment
of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump
shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of
electronically or verbally disclosing to 911
operators the vehicle location or other
details about the vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not turn the feature on.
Vehicle Health Report
WARNING
Always follow scheduled
maintenance instructions, regularly
inspect your vehicle, and seek repair
for any damage or problem you suspect.
Vehicle Health Report supplements, but
cannot replace normal maintenance and
vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report
only monitors certain systems that are
electronically monitored by the vehicle and
will not monitor or report the status of any
other system, (i.e., brake lining wear).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regularly inspect your vehicle may
result in vehicle damage and serious injury.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature
requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There
is no fee or subscription associated with
Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Before
running a report, review the Vehicle Health
Report privacy notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for
your vehicle, you may not be able to create
a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle
odometer has reached 200 miles.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set
your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,
you can request a Vehicle Health Report
(inside your vehicle). Return to your
account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view
your report. You can also choose for SYNC
to automatically remind you to run reports
at specific mileage intervals. Cellular phone
airtime usage may apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your
vehicle's overall health in the form of a
diagnostic report card. The vehicle health
report contains valuable information such
as:
•Vehicle diagnostic information
•Scheduled maintenance
•Open Recalls and Field Service Actions
•Unserviced items from vehicle
inspections by your authorized dealer.
To run a report (after the vehicle has been
running a minimum of 60 seconds):
1. Press the phone button to enter the
Phone menu.
2. Scroll until Vehicle Health is selected
and press OK.
3. Scroll to select from User
Preferences or Run Report.
316
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
Vehicle Health Report Options
Automatic Reports: Press OK and select on or off. Select
On to have SYNC automatically prompt you to run a health
report at certain mileage intervals. You must first turn this
feature on before you can select the mileage intervals at
which you would like to be prompted.
User Preferences: Press
OK to select and enter the
menu. Scroll to select from:
Mileage Intervals: Press OK. Scroll to select between
5000, 7500 or 10000 mile intervals and press OK to make
your selection.
Return: Press OK to exit the menu.
Press OK for SYNC to run a health report of your vehicle's
diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford where it
is combined with scheduled maintenance information,
open recalls and other field service actions and unserviced
vehicle inspection items from your authorized dealer.
Run Report?
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you run a Vehicle Health Report,
Ford Motor Company may collect your
cellular phone number (to process your
report request) and diagnostic information
about your vehicle. Certain versions or
updates to Vehicle Health Report may also
collect additional vehicle information. Ford
may use the vehicle information it collects
for any purpose. If you do not want to
disclose your cellular phone number or
vehicle information, do not run the feature
or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile
at www.SYNCMyRide.com. See Vehicle
Health Report Terms and Conditions, and
Privacy Statement at
www.SYNCMyRide.com for more
information.
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions
& Information (TDI)
Note: SYNC Services requires activation
prior to use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com
to register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone
and message rates may apply. Subscription
may be required. You must also have the
active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use,
SYNC Services. See Using SYNC® With
Your Phone (page 302).
Note: This feature does not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Make sure
your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID
before using SYNC Services.
317
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible
for the safe operation of the vehicle, and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe
to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features are provided only as an
aid. Make your driving decisions based on
your observations of local conditions and
existing traffic regulations. Do not follow
the route suggestions if doing so would
result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation, or
if you would be directed into an area that
you consider unsafe. Maps used by this
system may be inaccurate because of errors,
changes in roads, traffic conditions or driving
conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle's current
location, travel direction and speed to help
provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request.
Further, to provide the services you request
and for continuous improvement, the service
may collect and record call details and voice
communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want
Ford or its service providers to collect the
vehicle travel information or other
information identified in the Terms and
Conditions, do not activate or use the
service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle
sensors, integrated GPS technology and
comprehensive map and traffic data, to
give you personalized traffic reports,
precise turn-by-turn directions, business
search, news, sports, weather and more.
For a complete list of services, or to learn
more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using
Voice Commands
1. Press the voice button.
2. When prompted, say "Services". This
initiates an outgoing call to SYNC
Services using your paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular
phone.
3. Once you are connected to the service,
follow the voice prompts to request
the desired service, such as Traffic or
Directions. You can also say "What are
my choices?" to receive a complete list
of available services from which to
choose.
4. Say "Services" to return to the Services
main menu or for help, say "Help".
Connecting to SYNC Services Using
the Phone Menu
1. Press the phone button to enter the
Phone menu.
2. Scroll until Services appears in the
display.
3. Press OK to confirm and enter the
Services menu. The display indicates
the system is connecting.
4. Press OK. SYNC initiates the call to the
services portal.
5. Once you are connected to the service,
follow the voice prompts to request
the desired service, such as Traffic or
Directions. You can also say "What are
my choices?" to receive a complete list
of available services from which to
choose.
6. Say "Services" to return to the Services
main menu or for help, say "Help".
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services,
say "Directions" or "Business search".
To find the closest business or type of
business to your current location, just
say "Business search" and then
"Search near me". If you need further
assistance in finding a location, you can
318
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
say "Operator" at any time within a
directions or business search to speak
with a live operator. You may also be
prompted to speak with an operator.
The live operator can assist you by
searching for businesses by name or
by category, residential addresses by
street address or by name or specific
street intersections. Operator Assist is
a feature of your SYNC Services
subscription. For more information on
Operator Assist, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your
destination. Once your destination is
selected, your current vehicle location
is uploaded and a route based on
current traffic conditions is calculated
and sent back to your vehicle. After the
route download is complete, the phone
call is automatically ended. You then
receive audible and visual driving
instructions as you travel toward your
destination.
3. While on an active route, you can select
or say "Route summary" or "Route
status" to view the Route Summary
turn list or the Route Status ETA. You
can also turn voice guidance on or off,
cancel the route or update the route.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks
if you want the route updated. Just say
"Yes" when prompted and a new route is
delivered to your vehicle.
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the phone button on
the steering wheel.
2. Say "Goodbye" from the SYNC
Services main menu.
SYNC Services Quick Tips
You can personalize your Services feature to provide
quicker access to your most used or favorite information.
You can save address points such as work or home. You
can also save favorite information like sports teams or a
news category. To learn more, log onto
www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Personalizing
Press the voice button at any time (while you are
connected to SYNC TDI Services) to interrupt a voice
prompt or an audio clip (such as a sports report), wait for
the listening tone, then say your voice command.
Push to interrupt
Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-
enabled cellular phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle
Identification Number). You can pair and connect your
phone to any vehicle equipped with Traffic, Directions and
Information and continue enjoying your personalized
services.
Portable
319
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
SYNC Services Quick Tips
You can even access your account outside the vehicle.
Just use the number on your phone's call history. Traffic
and Directions features do not function properly but
Information services and the 411 connect and text message
features are available.
SYNC AppLink
Note: Your smartphone must be paired and
connected to SYNC to access AppLink.
Note: iPhone® users need to connect the
phone to the USB port in order to start the
application. It is recommended to lock your
iPhone® after starting an application.
Note: The AppLink feature is not available
if your vehicle is equipped with the MyFord
Touch® or MyLincoln Touch™ system.
Note: Depending on your display type, you
can access AppLink from the media menu,
the phone menu, or by using voice
commands. Once an app is running through
AppLink, you can control main features of
the app through voice commands and
steering wheel controls.
To Access Using the Phone Menu
1. Press the phone button to access the
SYNC phone menu on-screen.
2. Scroll to Mobile Apps and press OK to
access a list of available applications.
3. Scroll through the list of available
applications and press OK to select a
particular app.
4. Once an app is running through SYNC,
you can access an app’s menu by
pressing the MENU button to first
access the SYNC menu.
5. Select "SYNC-Media" by pressing OK.
6. Scroll until "<App name> Menu" is
displayed (i.e., Pandora Menu), then
press OK. From here, you can access
an application's features, such as
Thumbs up, Thumbs down, etc. For
more information, please visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com.
To Access Using the Media Menu
1. Press AUX button on the center
console.
2. Press MENU to access the SYNC menu.
3. Select "SYNC-Media" by pressing OK.
4. Then scroll to Mobile Apps and press
OK to access a list of available
applications.
5. Scroll through the list of available
applications and press OK to select a
particular app.
6. Once an app is running through SYNC,
you can access an app’s menu by
pressing the MENU button to first
access the SYNC menu.
7. Select "SYNC-Media" by pressing OK.
8. Scroll until "<App name> Menu" is
displayed (i.e., Pandora Menu), then
press OK. From here, you can access
an application's features, such as
Thumbs up, Thumbs down, etc. For
more information, please visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com.
To Access Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice icon.
2. When prompted, say "Mobile Apps".
320
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
3. Say the name of the application after
the tone.
4. The app should start. While an app is
running through SYNC, you can press
the voice button and speak commands
specific to the app, such as "Play
Station Quickmix". Say "Help" to
discover available voice commands.
USING SYNC® WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your
digital music player over the vehicle's
speaker system using the system's media
menu or voice commands. You can also
sort and play your music by specific
categories, such as artists, albums, etc.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player including: iPod®,
Zune™, Plays from device players, and
most USB drives. SYNC also supports
audio formats, such as MP3, WMA, WAV
and ACC.
Connecting Your Digital Media
Player to the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a
power switch, ensure that the device is
turned on.
To Connect Using Voice Commands
1. Plug the device into the vehicle's USB
port.
2. Press the voice icon and when
prompted, say "USB".
3. You can now play music by saying any
of the appropriate voice commands.
See the media voice commands.
To Connect Using the System Menu
1. Plug the device into the vehicle's USB
port.
2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter
the Media menu.
3. Scroll until Select Source appears,
then press OK.
4. Scroll to select USB and press OK.
5. Depending on how many digital media
files are on your connected device,
Indexing may appear in the radio
display. When indexing is complete, the
screen returns to the Play menu.
Press OK and scroll through selections of:
•Play All
•Albums
•Genres
•Playlists
•Tracks
•Explore USB
•Similar Music
•Return
What's Playing?
At any time when a track is playing, you
can press the voice icon and ask the
system "What's playing?". The system
reads the metadata tags (if populated) of
the playing track to you.
Media Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice icon and, when
prompted, say "USB", then any
of the following:
321
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
"USB"
"Refine album <name>"1,2
"Autoplay off"
"Refine artist <name>"1,2
"Autoplay on"
"Refine song <name>"1
"Connections"
"Refine track <name>"1,2
"Pause"
"Repeat off""Play"
"Repeat on"
"Play album <name>"1,2
"Search album <name>"1,2
"Play all"
"Search artist <name>"1,2
"Play artist <name>"1,2
"Search genre <name>"1
"Play genre <name>"1,2
"Search song <name>"1
"Play next folder"3
"Search track <name>"1,2
"Play next track"
"Shuffle off"
"Play playlist <name>"1,2
"Shuffle on"
"Play previous folder"3
"Similar music""Play previous track"
"What's playing?"
"Play song <name>"1
"Play track <name>"1,2
1 <name> is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of any desired group,
artist, song, etc.
2 Voice commands which are not available until indexing is complete.
3 Voice commands which are only available in folder mode.
Voice Command Guide
· Turn on to listen to music which has already been
randomly indexed during the indexing process.
"Autoplay"
322
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
Voice Command Guide
· Turn off and the system does not begin to play any of
your music until all media has all been indexed. Indexing
times can vary from device to device and also with regard
to the number of songs being indexed.
The system searches all the data from your indexed music
and, if available, begins to play the chosen type of music.
You can only play genres of music which are present in
the GENRE metadata tags that you have on your digital
media player.
"Search genre" or "Play
genre"
The system compiles a playlist and then plays similar
music to what is currently playing from the USB port using
indexed metadata information.
"Similar music"
The system searches for a specific artist, track or album
from the music indexed through the USB port.
"Search", "Play", "Artist",
"Track, "Album"
This allows you to make your previous command more
specific. For example, if you asked to search and play all
music by a certain artist, you could then say "Refine album"
and choose a specific album from the list to view. If you
then select Play, the system only plays music from that
specific album.
"Refine"
Press the voice icon and when prompted
say "Bluetooth audio", then any of the
following:
"BLUETOOTH AUDIO"
"Connections"
"Pause"
"Play"
"Play next track"
"Play previous track"
Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select your
media source, how to play your music (by
artist, genre, shuffle, repeat, etc.), and also
to add, connect or delete devices.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter
the Media menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through:
323
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
You CanWhen You Select
Play your music by artist, album, genre, playlists, tracks,
similar music or to simply, play all. You can also choose
to Explore USB to view the supported digital music files
on your playing device.
Play Menu
· Select and play music from your USB port, auxiliary input
jack (line in) or stream music from your Bluetooth-enabled
phone.
Select Source
· Press OK to select, then scroll to choose from USB,
Bluetooth Audio, and Line In.
· When you select USB, and Autoplay is on, you can
access media files randomly as they are indexed. If turned
off, indexed media is not available until the indexing
process is complete. SYNC is capable of indexing thou-
sands of average size media and notifies you if the
maximum indexing file size is reached.
· Users who have Bluetooth phones that are capable of
streaming audio can press SEEK to play the previous or
next track.
· When you have already connected a device to the USB
port, you cannot access the line in feature. Some digital
media players require both USB and line in ports to stream
data and music separately.
· Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and select your
Autoplay settings. Once these selections are turned on,
they remain on until turned off.
Media Settings
· Some digital media players require both USB and line in
ports to stream data and music separately. Press OK to
select and then scroll to choose from Shuffle,Repeat or
Autoplay.
Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your
smartphone.
Mobile Apps
Access Bluetooth Device menu listings (add, connect,
set as primary, on/off, delete) as well as Advanced menu
listings (prompts, languages, defaults, master reset, install
application and system information).
System Settings
Press OK to exit the media menu.Exit Media Menu
324
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
Accessing Your Play Menu
This menu allows you to select and play
your media by artist, album, genre, playlist,
track, similar music or even to explore what
is on your USB device.
1. Make sure that your device is plugged
into the USB port and is turned on.
2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter
the Media menu.
3. Scroll to select the Play menu, then
press OK.
If there are no media files to access, the
display indicates there is no media. If there
are media files, you have the following
options to scroll through and select from:
You CanWhen You Select
· Play all indexed media (tracks) from your playing device
in flat file mode, one at a time in numerical order.
Play All
· Press OK to select. The first track title appears in the
display.
Sort all indexed media by artist. Once selected, the system
lists and then play all artists and tracks alphabetically. If
there are fewer than 255 indexed artist, they are listed
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more, they are
categorized in alphabetical categories.
Artists
1. Press OK to select. You can select to play All Artists or
any indexed artist.
2. Scroll until the desired artist is chosen and press OK.
Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are fewer than
255 indexed albums, they are listed alphabetically in flat-
file mode. If there are more, they are organized into
alphabetical categories.
Albums
1. Press OK to enter the album menu and select from
playing all albums or from any individual indexed album.
2. Scroll until the desired album is chosen, then press OK.
· Sort indexed music by genre (category) type. SYNC lists
the genres alphabetically in flat-file mode. If there are
more than 255, SYNC automatically organizes them into
alphabetical categories.
Genres
· Press OK to select. Scroll to select the desired genre, then
press OK.
· Access your playlists (from formats, such as .ASX, .M3U,
.WPL or .MTP). The system lists your playlists alphabetic-
ally in flat-file mode. If there are more than 255, they are
organized into alphabetical categories.
Playlists
· Press OK to select. Scroll to select the desired playlist,
then press OK.
325
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
You CanWhen You Select
· Search for and play a specific track which has been
indexed. SYNC lists your tracks alphabetically in flat-file
mode. If there are more than 255, SYNC automatically
organizes them into alphabetical categories.
Tracks
· Press OK to select. Scroll to select the desired track, then
press OK.
· Explore all supported digital media on your media device
connected to the USB port. You can only view media
content which is compatible with SYNC; other files saved
are not visible.
Explore USB
· Press OK to select. Scroll to explore indexed media on
your flash drive.
· Play music similar to what is currently playing from the
USB port. The system uses the metadata information of
each song to compile a playlist for you.
Similar Music
· Press OK to select. The system creates a new list of
similar songs and begins playing. The metadata tags must
be populated for this feature to include each track.
· With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags are
not populated, the tracks won't be available in voice
recognition, play menu or similar music. However, if you
place these tracks onto your playing device in Mass
Storage Device Mode they are available in voice recogni-
tion, Play menu browsing and Similar Music. Unknowns
are placed into any unpopulated metadata tag.
Exit the current menu.Return
System Settings
System settings provide access to your
Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu
features.
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to add, connect and delete a device as turn
the Bluetooth feature on and off.
The Advanced menu allows you to access
and set prompts, languages, defaults and
perform a master reset.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter
the Media menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears
and select OK, then press OK.
3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices
appears.
4. Press OK and then scroll to select from:
326
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
You CanWhen You Select
Allows you to pair additional devices to the system.
Add Bluetooth Device*
1. Press OK to select and press OK again when Find SYNC
appears in the display.
2. Follow the directions in your phone's user guide to put
your phone into discovery mode. A six-digit PIN appears
in the display.
3. When prompted on your phone's six-digit display, enter
the PIN.
Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone.Connect Bluetooth Device
1. Press OK to select and view a list of devices.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen and press OK
to connect the device.
· Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.Set Bluetooth On/Off
· Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off. When
the desired selection is chosen, press OK. Turning
Bluetooth off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and
deactivates Bluetooth features.
· Delete a paired media device.Delete Device
· Press OK and scroll to select the device. Press OK to
confirm.
· Delete all previously paired devices.Delete All Devices
· Press OK to select.
Exit the current menu.Return
*This is a speed-dependent feature.
Advanced Menu Options
1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter
the Media menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears
and select OK, then press OK.
3. Scroll until Advanced appears.
4. Press OK and then scroll to select from:
You CanWhen You Select
Have SYNC guide you by asking questions, helpful hints
or ask you for a specific action.
Prompts
1. Press OK to select and scroll to select between on or
off.
327
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
You CanWhen You Select
2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the
display. SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.
Choose from English,Français or Español. The displays
and prompts are in the selected language.
Languages
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages.
2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the
display.
3. If you change the language setting, the display indicates
that the system is updating. When complete, SYNC takes
you back to the Advanced menu.
Return to the factory default settings. This selection does
not erase your indexed information (phonebook, call
history, text messages and paired devices).
Factory Defaults
1. Press OK to select and then press OK again when
Restore Defaults? appears in the display.
2. Press OK to confirm.
Completely erase all information stored on SYNC (all
phonebook, call history, text messages and all paired
devices) and return to the factory default settings.
Master Reset
Download new software applications (if available) and
then load the desired applications through your USB port.
See the web site for more information.
Application
Exit the current menu.Return
SYNC® TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, please refer to the
tables below.
Use the website at any time to check your
phone's compatibility, register your
account and set preferences as well as
access a customer representative via an
on-line chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca for more
information.
328
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
Phone Issues
Possible Solution(s)Possible Cause(s)Issue
Review your phone's user
guide regarding audio
adjustments.
The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC perform-
ance.
A lot of background noise
during a phone call.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Possible phone malfunction.During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
· Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
· This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to down-
load my phonebook.
· Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's, then
trying again.
· Possible phone malfunc-
tion.
· Try "pushing" your phone-
book contacts to SYNC by
using the Add Contacts
feature.
· Use the "SYNCmyphone"
feature available on the
website.
· Try "pushing" your phone-
book contacts to SYNC by
using the Add Contacts
feature.
Limitations on your phone's
capability.
The system says "Phone-
book downloaded" but my
phonebook in SYNC is
empty or is missing
contacts. · If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
· Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
· Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
· This is a phone-dependent
feature.
I'm having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC. · Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's, then
trying again.
· Possible phone malfunc-
tion.
329
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
Phone Issues
Possible Solution(s)Possible Cause(s)Issue
· Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
· Check the security and
"auto accept/prompt
always" settings relative to
the SYNC Bluetooth
connection on your phone.
· Update your device's firm-
ware.
· Turn off the Auto phone-
book download setting.
· Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
· This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.
· Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's, then
trying again.
· Possible phone malfunc-
tion.
USB/Media Issues
Possible Solution(s)Possible Cause(s)Issue
· Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Possible device malfunction.I'm having trouble
connecting my device.
· Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
· Make sure the USB cable is
properly inserted into the
device and the vehicle's USB
port.
330
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
USB/Media Issues
Possible Solution(s)Possible Cause(s)Issue
· Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.
Make sure the device is
connected to SYNC and that
you have pressed play on
your device.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
The device is not connected.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
· Make sure that all song
details are populated.
· Your music files may not
contain the proper artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device.
· Some devices require you
to change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.
· The file may be corrupted.
· The song may have copy-
right protection which does
not allow it to play.
Vehicle Health Report/Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) Issues
Possible Solution(s)Possible Cause(s)Issue
· This is a free feature, but
you must first register online
to use it.
· Your account may not be
activated on the website.
· You may have the wrong
VIN (vehicle identification
number) listed.
I received a text that the
Vehicle Health Report is not
activated.
331
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
Vehicle Health Report/Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) Issues
Possible Solution(s)Possible Cause(s)Issue
· Make sure that your VIN is
correctly listed in your
account.
When you register your
account, you must list a
preferred dealer. If one is
already listed, try selecting
another dealer and logging
out. Log back in and change
it back to your preferred
dealer and retrieve the
report.
The preferred dealer
information did not load
correctly.
I'm unable to retrieve the
report on the website, or I
receive a system error.
· Update your mobile
number in your account on
the website.
· This could be due to your
phone's compatibility.
· Bad signal strength.
I'm unable to submit a
report.
· Make sure you have full
signal strength and that your
Bluetooth volume level has
been turned up.
· Your phone may not be
activated on the website.
· Try deleting your phone
and performing a clean
pairing.
· This is a free feature, but
you must first register online
to use it.
· The phone in use is not
activated.
· Your phone has ID blocker
active.
I heard a commercial when
I tried to use Traffic, Direc-
tions and Information.
· Turn off ID blocker on your
phone as the system recog-
nizes you by your phone
number.
· Make sure the currently
connected phone is the
same one that is registered
on your SyncMyRide
account.
332
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
Voice Command Issues
Possible Solution(s)Possible Cause(s)Issue
· Review the phone voice
commands and the media
voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.
· You may be using the
wrong voice commands.
· You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.
SYNC does not understand
what I am saying.
· Be aware that SYNC's
microphone is either in your
rear view mirror or in the
headliner just above the
windshield.
· Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
of the media section.
· You may be using the
wrong voice commands.
· You may not be saying the
name exactly as it is saved.
SYNC does not understand
the name of a song or artist.
· Say the song or artist
exactly as they are listed. If
you say "Play Artist Prince"
the system does not play
music by Prince and the
Revolution or Prince and the
New Power Generation.
· The system may not be
"reading" the name the
same way you are saying it.
· Make sure you are saying
the complete title such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
· If the songs are saved in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
· Do not use special charac-
ters in the title as the system
does not recognize them.
· Review the phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
· You may be using the
wrong voice commands.
· You may not be saying the
name exactly as it is saved.
SYNC does not understand
or is calling the wrong
contact when I want to
make a call. · Make sure you are saying
the contacts exactly as they
are listed. For example, if a
contact is saved as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
· Contacts in your phone-
book may be very short and
similar, or they may contain
special characters.
· Your phonebook contacts
may be saved in CAPS.
333
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
Voice Command Issues
Possible Solution(s)Possible Cause(s)Issue
· The system works better if
you list full names such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
· Do not use special charac-
ters such as 123 or ICE as the
system does not recognize
them.
· If contacts are saved in
CAPS, you have to spell
them. JAKE requires you to
say "Call J-A-K-E".
334
SYNC®
Information Provided by:
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, accident and
injury. Ford strongly recommends
that drivers use extreme caution when
using any device or feature that may take
their focus off the road. Your primary
responsibility is the safe operation of the
vehicle. We recommend against the use
of any handheld device while driving,
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you
become aware of applicable state and
local laws that may affect use of electronic
devices while driving.
Note: Some features are not available while
the vehicle is moving.
Note: Your system is equipped with a
feature that allows you to access and
control audio features for 30 minutes after
the ignition has been turned off (as long as
no doors are opened).
This system uses a four-corner strategy to
provide quick access to vehicle features
and settings. The comprehensive
touchscreen provides easy interaction with
your cellular phone, multimedia, climate
control and navigation system. The corners
display any active modes within those
menus, such as your phone being
connected or the climate temperature.
E142607
SETTINGS
Press to select any of the following:
•Clock
•Display
•Sound
•Vehicle
•Settings
•Help
E142608
INFORMATION
Press to select any of the following:
•Services
•Travel Link
•Alerts
•Calendar
•Apps
PHONE
Press to select any of the following:
•Phone
•Quick Dial
•Phonebook
•History
•Messaging
•Settings
NAVIGATION
Press to select any of the following:
•My Home
•Favorites
•Previous Destinations
•Point of Interest
•Emergency
•Previous Starting Point
•Latitude/Longitude
•Street Address
•Intersection
•City Center
•Map
•Edit Route Cancel Route
•Freeway Entrance/Exit
ENTERTAINMENT
335
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Press to select any of the following:
•AM
•FM
•SIRIUS
•CD
•USB
•BT Stereo
•SD Card
•A/V In
CLIMATE
Press to select any of the following:
•Driver Settings
•Recirculated Air
•Auto
•Dual
•Passenger Settings
•A/C
•Defrost
E142613
HOME
Press to access your home
screen. Depending on your
vehicle’s option package and software,
your screens may vary in appearance from
the screens shown in this section. Your
features may also be limited depending on
your market. Check with your authorized
dealer for availability.
Using the Touch-Sensitive
Controls on Your System
To turn a feature on and off, just touch the
graphic with your finger. To get the best
performance from the touch-sensitive
controls:
•Make sure your hands are clean and
dry.
•Since the touchscreen operates based
on the touch of a finger, you may have
trouble using it if you are wearing
gloves.
•Use your bare finger to touch the center
of a touch-control graphic. Touching
off-center of the graphic may cause a
nearby control to turn on or off.
•Do not press hard on the controls. They
are sensitive to light touch.
•Metal and other conductive material
should be kept away from the surface
of the touchscreen as this may cause
electronic interference (i.e. control
activation).
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you may also have these controls
on your bezel:
•Power: Turn the media (or climate
features) on or off.
•VOL: Increase or decrease the volume.
•Fan: Increase or decrease the fan
speed.
•Seek and Tune buttons: Use as you
normally would in media modes.
•Eject: Eject a CD.
•SOURCE: Touch the word repeatedly
to see all available media modes. The
screen does not change, but you see
the media change in the lower left
status bar.
•SOUND: Touch the word to access the
Sound menu where you can make
adjustments to settings such as: Bass,
Midrange, Treble, Balance and Fade,
DSP (if equipped), Occupancy Mode
(if equipped) and Speed Compensated
Volume.
•Hazard flasher: Press the button to turn
the hazard flashers on or off.
336
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Cleaning the Touchscreen Display
Clean the display with a clean, soft cloth
such as one used for cleaning glasses. If
dirt or finger prints are still visible, apply a
small amount of alcohol to the cloth. Do
not pour or spray alcohol onto the display.
Do not use detergent or any type of solvent
to clean the display.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you are not
able to answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm.
In the United States, call: 1-888-270-1055
In Canada, call: 1-800-565-3673
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, accident and
injury. Ford strongly recommends
that drivers use extreme caution when
using any device or feature that may take
their focus off the road. Your primary
responsibility is the safe operation of the
vehicle. We recommend against the use
of any handheld device while driving,
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you
become aware of applicable state and
local laws that may affect use of electronic
devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
•Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Carefully place cords and
cables where they cannot be stepped
on or interfere with the operation of
pedals, seats, compartments or safe
driving abilities.
•Do not leave playing devices in the
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
•Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See your authorized dealer.
•For your safety, some SYNC functions
are speed-dependent and cannot be
performed when the vehicle is traveling
at speeds greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Make sure that you review your device's
user guide before using it with SYNC.
Speed-Restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while the vehicle is in
motion so they are restricted from being
modified unless the vehicle is not moving.
Some examples of these are listed below:
•Screens that are too crowded with
information, such as Point of Interest
(POI) reviews and ratings, SIRIUS
Travel Link sports scores, movie times,
ski conditions, etc.
•Any action that requires using a
keyboard, such as entering a navigation
destination or editing information.
•All lists are limited so the user can view
fewer entries (e.g., phone contacts,
recent phone call entries).
Listed below are more specific features
that can only be modified while the vehicle
is not moving:
337
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Restricted Features
Pairing a Bluetooth phoneCellular Phone
Adding phonebook contacts or uploading phonebook
contacts (from a USB)
List entries are limited for phone contacts and recent
phone call entries
Editing the keypad codeSystem Functionality
Enabling Valet Mode
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active
Editing wireless settingsWi-Fi and Wireless
Editing the list of wireless networks
Playing videoVideos, Photos and Graphics
Editing the screen's wallpaper or adding new wallpaper
Composing text messagesText Messages
Viewing received text messages
Editing preset text messages
Using the keyboard to enter a destinationNavigation
Demo navigation route
Adding or editing Address Book entries or Avoid Areas
338
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cell
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log remain in the vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in the vehicle when the
cellular phone or media player is
connected. If you no longer plan to use the
system or the vehicle, we recommend you
perform a Master Reset to erase all stored
information.
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada do not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the sections on 911
Assist® (if equipped), Vehicle Health
Report (if equipped), and Traffic,
Directions and Information (if equipped).
339
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Accessing and Adjusting Modes Through Your Right Vehicle Information
Display (If Equipped)
The display is located on the right side of
your instrument cluster (A). It allows you
to view and make minor adjustments to
active modes without taking your hands
off the wheel. For example:
•In entertainment mode, you can view
what is now playing, change the audio
source, select presets and make some
adjustments.
•In phone mode, you can accept or
reject an incoming call.
•In navigation mode (if equipped), you
can view the current route or activate
a route.
•In climate mode, the driver side
temperature can bet set as well as fan
speed.
E144811
Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right
side of your steering wheel to scroll
through the available modes:
E142611
Entertainment
E142609
Phone
E142610
Navigation
340
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
E142612
Climate Control
You can make selections from the menu
by using the OK button. The selection
menu expands and you are allowed
different options.
•Press the up and down arrows to scroll
through the modes.
•Press the right arrow to enter the mode.
•Press the left or right arrows to make
adjustments within the chosen mode.
•Press OK to confirm your selection.
Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, Compass appears in the display
instead of Navigation. If you press the right
arrow to go into the Compass menu, you
can see the compass graphic. The compass
displays the direction in which the vehicle
is traveling, not true direction (i.e., if the
vehicle is traveling west, the middle of the
compass graphic displays west; north
displays to the left of west though its true
direction is to the right of west).
Using Voice Recognition
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is in front of you.
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
of your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
When using voice commands, words and
icons may also appear in the lower left
status bar indicating the status of the voice
session (i.e., listening, success, failed,
paused or try again).
How to Use Voice Commands with Your
System
E142599
Press the voice icon; after the
tone, speak your command
clearly.
What Can I Say?
To access the available voice commands
for the current session, do one of the
following:
•During a voice session, press the help
icon (?) in the lower left status bar of
the screen.
•Say "What can I say?" for an on-screen
listing of the possible voice commands
associated with your current voice
session.
•Press the voice icon. After the tone, say
"Help" for an audible list of possible
voice commands.
Helpful Hints
•Make sure the interior of the vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
•After pressing the voice icon, wait until
after the tone sounds and Listening
appears before saying a command. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.
•Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
•At any time you can interrupt the
system while it is speaking by pressing
the voice icon.
341
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Basic commands
If You Want ToSay
Make calls."Phone"
Access the device connected to your USB port."USB"
Stream audio from your phone."Bluetooth audio"
Access the device connected to the auxiliary input jack."Line in"
Cancel the requested action."Cancel"
Return to the main menu."SYNC"
Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback."Voice settings"
Run a vehicle health report.*
"Vehicle health report"
Access the SYNC Services portal.*
"Services"
Access mobile applications.*
"Mobile apps"
Hear a list of voice commands available in the current
mode.
"Help"
* If equipped, U.S. only
These commands can be said at any time during a voice session
"Main menu"
"List of commands"
"What can I say?"
"Next page"
"Previous page"
"Go back"
"Cancel"
"Exit"
"Help"
342
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Accessing a List of Available Commands
1. Using the touchscreen, press the
Settings icon, Help, then Voice
Command List.
2. Using the steering wheel control, press
the voice icon. After the tone, speak
your command clearly.
Available Voice Commands
"Radio list of commands""Audio list of commands"
"SD card list of commands""Bluetooth audio list of commands"
"Sirius satellite list of commands" *
"Browse list of commands"
"Travel link list of commands" *
"CD list of commands"
"USB list of commands""Climate control list of commands"
"Voice instructions list of commands""List of commands"
"Voice settings list of commands"
"Navigation list of commands" *
"Help""Phone list of commands"
* If equipped
Voice Settings
Voice settings allow you to customize the
level of system interaction, help and
feedback. The system defaults to standard
interaction which uses candidate lists and
confirmation prompts as these provide the
highest level of guidance and feedback.
•Interaction Mode: Novice mode
provides more detailed interaction and
guidance while the advanced mode
has less audible interaction and more
tone prompts.
•Confirmation Prompts: These are
short questions the system asks when
it is not sure of your request or when
there are multiple possible responses
to your request. If turned off, the
system simply makes a best guess as
to what you requested and you may
still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
•Phone and Media Candidate Lists:
Candidate lists are lists of possible
results from your voice commands. The
system creates these lists when it has
the same confidence level of several
options based on your voice command.
To access these settings using the
touchscreen:
343
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
1. Press the Settings icon, Settings, then
Voice Control.
2. Select from the following:
•Interaction Mode
•Confirmation Prompts
•Media Candidate Lists
•Phone Candidate Lists
•Voice Control Volume.
To access these settings using voice
commands:
1. Press the voice icon; after the tone
sounds, the system says "Please say a
command". Another tone sounds to let
you know the system is listening.
2. Say any of the following commands:
Voice Settings Using Voice Commands
"Interaction mode novice"
"Interaction mode advanced"
"Confirmation prompts on"
"Confirmation prompts off"
"Phone candidate lists on"
"Phone candidate lists off"
"Media candidate lists on"
"Media candidate lists off"
"Help"
Using Voice Commands with the
Touchscreen Options
Your voice system has a dual mode feature
which allows you to switch between using
voice commands and making on-screen
selections. This is most often available
when using navigation.
On-screen buttons are outlined in blue to
indicate the selections that are part of the
dual mode feature. For example, if while
you are in a voice session rather than
saying the command "Enter street name"
to change the field, you can press Street
and the voice session does not end.
Instead, the voice system changes to the
Street field and asks you to say the street
name. The buttons not outlined in blue
cannot be used as voice commands; if they
are touched during a voice session, the
voice session is canceled.
For example, you can choose from the
following on the Navigation home screen:
•My Home
•Favorites
344
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
•Previous Destinations
•Point of Interest (POI)
•Emergency
•Street Address
•Intersection
•Cancel Route.
Some of the voice commands that are
available while viewing this screen are:
Destination
"Destination my home"
"Destination street address"
"Destination favorites"
"Destination previous destinations"
"Destination POI"
"Destination intersection"
"Destination emergency"
If you choose Street Address from the
navigation screen, you can choose from
the following:
•Number
•City
•Street Name
•State/Prov.
Some of the voice commands that are
available while viewing this screen are:
Street Address
"Enter house number"
"Change house number"
"Enter street name"
"Change street name"
"Enter city"
"Change city"
"Enter state"
"Change state"
345
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
If you choose Points of Interest from the
navigation screen, you can choose from
the following:
•Search Area
•Search By Name
•Fuel Station
•ATM
•All Restaurants
•Accommodations
•Parking.
Some of the voice commands that are
available while viewing this screen are:
Points of Interest or POI
"Destination <POI category name>"
"Search by name"
"Search by category"
"Change search area"
"Change state"
Note: These are just a sample of the voice
commands available within the Points of
Interest section; the categories themselves
are also technically voice commands.
If you choose Intersection from the
navigation screen, you can choose from
the following:
•1st Street
•2nd Street
•City
•State/Prov.
Some of the voice commands that are
available while viewing this screen are:
Intersection
"Enter first street name"
"Change first street name"
"Enter second street name"
"Change second street name"
"Enter city"
"Change city"
"Enter state"
"Change state"
346
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
The dual mode feature is also available
when the voice system displays a list of
items to pick from during a voice session,
where you would be able to touch the line
item or say "Line 2". If a command is not
understood or there are multiple options,
the system returns a list for you to choose
from.
SETTINGS
Under the menu setting, you can set your
clock, access and make adjustments to
the display, sound and vehicle settings as
well as access settings for specific modes
or the help feature.
Clock
Note: The date is set by your vehicle's GPS;
you cannot manually set the date.
Note: If the battery has been disconnected,
the vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signal
to update the clock. Once your vehicle
acquires the signal, it may take a few
minutes for the update to display the correct
time.
1. Press the Settings icon > Clock.
2. Press + and - to adjust the time.
From this screen, you can also make other
adjustments such as 12-hour or 24-hour
mode, activate GPS time synchronization
and have the system automatically update
new time zones.
You can also turn the outside air
temperature display on and off. When the
outside air temperature is displayed, it
appears at the top center of the
touchscreen next to the time and date.
Once you update any settings, they are
automatically saved.
Display
You can make adjustments to the
touchscreen display through the
touchscreen or by pressing the voice
button on your steering wheel controls and
when prompted, say "Display settings".
To access and make adjustments using
the touchscreen, press the Settings icon >
Display.
•Brightness allows you to make the
screen display brighter or dimmer.
•Mode allows you to set the screen to
a certain brightness or have the system
automatically change based on the
outside light level.
•If you select AUTO or NIGHT, you
have the options of turning the
display's Auto Dim feature on or off
and changing the Auto Dim Manual
Offset feature.
•Edit Wallpaper
•You can have your touchscreen
display the default photo or upload
your own.
Uploading Photos for Your Home
Screen Wallpaper
Note: You cannot load photos directly from
your camera. You must access the photos
from either your USB mass storage device
or from an SD card.
Note: Photographs with extremely large
dimensions (i.e., 2048 x 1536) may not be
compatible and appear as a blank (black)
image on the display.
Your system allows you to upload and view
up to 32 photos.
To access, press the Settings icon >
Display > Edit Wallpaper, then follow the
system prompts to upload your
photographs.
347
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Only the photograph(s) which meets the
following conditions display:
•Compatible file formats are as follows:
.jpg, .gif, .png, .bmp
•Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.
•Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384
Sound
Press the Settings icon > Sound, then
select from the following:
Sound Settings
DSP*
Bass
Occupancy Mode*
Midrange
Speed Compensated VolumeTreble
Set Balance and Fade
* If equipped.
Vehicle
Press the Settings icon > Vehicle, then
select from the following:
•Active Park Assist
•Ambient Lighting
•Vehicle Health Report
•Door Keypad Code
•Rear View Camera
•Enable Valet Mode.
Active Park Assist (If Equipped)
When activated, your system displays
directions for you regarding the active park
assist process. See Active Park Assist
(page 176).
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
When activated, ambient lighting
illuminates footwells and cupholders with
a choice of colors. To access and make
adjustments:
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle >
Ambient Lighting.
2. Touch the desired color.
3. Use the scroll bar to increase or
decrease the intensity.
To turn the feature on or off, press the
power button.
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped)
Turn Automatic Reminders on and off and
set the mileage interval at which you would
like to receive the reports. Press the ? for
more information on these selections.
When done making your selections, press
Run Vehicle Health Report Now if you want
your report.
Door Keypad Code (If Equipped)
To change the keypad code for your
keyless entry keypad system:
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle >
Door Keypad Code.
2. Enter your current factory code, then,
when prompted, enter your new code.
Rear View Camera (If Equipped)
This menu allows you to access settings
for your rear view camera.
348
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Press the Settings icon > Vehicle > Rear
View Camera, then select from the
following settings:
•Rear Camera Delay
•Visual Park Aid Alert
•Guidelines.
Enable Valet Mode
Note: If you are locked out and need to
reset the PIN, you can enter 3681 and the
system unlocks.
Valet mode allows you to lock the system
so that none of your information on the
system can be accessed until it is unlocked
with the correct PIN.
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle >
Enable Valet Mode.
2. When prompted, enter a four-digit PIN.
After you press Continue the system is
locked until the correct PIN is entered
again.
Settings
Access and adjust system settings, voice
features, as well as phone, navigation and
wireless settings. Some of these settings
can also be accessed with regard to their
specific modes (i.e., phone and media).
System
Press the Settings icon > Settings >
System, then select from the following:
System
Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish
or French.
Language
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance
Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature
Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the system.System Prompt Volume
Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made
through the touchscreen.
Touch Screen Button Beep
Select to have the system beep to confirm button choices
made through the climate or audio system.
Touch Panel Button Beep
Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or
ABC format.
Keyboard Layout
Install any downloaded applications or view the current
software licenses.
Install Applications
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal
settings and personal data.
Master Reset
Voice Control
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Voice
Control, then select from the following:
349
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Voice Control
Standard interaction mode provides more detailed inter-
action and guidance. Advanced mode has less audible
interaction and more tone prompts.
Interaction Mode
Have the system ask you short questions if it has not
clearly heard or understood your request.
Confirmation Prompts
Note: Even with confirmation prompts turned off, you
may be asked to confirm settings occasionally.
Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. If these are turned off, the system simply
makes a best guess at your request.
Media Candidate Lists
Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. If these are turned off, the system simply
makes a best guess at your request.
Phone Candidate Lists
Allows you to adjust the voice volume level.Voice Control Volume
Media Player
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Media
Player, then select from the following:
350
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Media Player
With this feature on, the system automatically switches
to the media source upon initial connection and you can
listen to music which has already been randomly indexed
during the indexing process. With this feature off, the
system does not automatically switch to the inserted
media source.
Autoplay
Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device. You
can also set a device as your favorite so that the system
automatically attempts to connect to that device at every
ignition cycle.
Bluetooth Devices
Allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote
Database.
Gracenote® Database Info
With this feature on, metadata information is pulled from
the Gracenote Database for your music files. This overrides
information from your device. This feature defaults to off.
Gracenote® Mgmt
With this feature on, cover art is pulled from the Gracenote
Database for your music files. This overrides any art from
your device. This feature defaults to Media Player.
Cover Art Priority
Navigation
Press the Settings icon > Settings >
Navigation, then select from the following:
Navigation
Turn breadcrumbs on and off.Map Preferences
Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or
bottom to top.
Turn the Parking POI notification on and off.
Have the system display the shortest route, fastest route
or most ecological route.
Route Preferences
Have the system avoid freeways.
Have the system avoid tollroads.
Have the system avoid ferries or car trains.
Have the system use HOV (high-occupancy vehicle) lanes.
351
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Navigation
Have the system use guidance prompts.Navigation Preferences
Have the system automatically fill-in State/Province
information.
Have the system display areas where road work occurs.Traffic Preferences
Have the system display incident map icons on the map.
Have the system display areas where difficult driving
conditions may occur.
Have the system display areas with snow and ice on the
road may occur.
Have the system display any smog alerts.
Have the system display weather warnings.
Have the system display where there may be reduced
visibility.
Have the system turn on your radio for traffic announce-
ments.
Enter specific areas that would like to avoid on planned
navigation routes.
Avoid Areas
Phone
Press the Settings icon > Settings > Phone,
then select from the following:
Phone
Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as
save it as a favorite.
Bluetooth Devices
Turn Bluetooth on and off.Bluetooth
Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring
inside the vehicle. With this feature turned on, text
message notifications are also suppressed and do not ring
inside the vehicle.
Do Not Disturb
Turn 911 Assist on and off. See Information (page 382).911 Assist
Select the type of notification for phone calls - ring tone,
beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.
Phone Ringer
352
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Phone
Select the type of notification for text messages - alert
tone, beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.
Text Message Notification
If compatible with your phone, you can make adjustments
to your internet data connection. Select to make your
connection profile with the PAN (personal area network)
or to turn off your connection. You can also choose to
make adjustments to your settings or have the system
always connect, never connect when roaming or query on
connect. Press ? for additional information.
Internet Data Connection
Access features, such as automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your
phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Manage Phonebook
Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode.Roaming Warning
Wireless & Internet
Your system has a Wi-Fi feature which
creates a wireless network within your
vehicle, thereby allowing other devices (i.e.,
personal computers or phones) in your
vehicle to speak to each other, share files,
play games, etc. Using this Wi-Fi feature,
everyone in your vehicle can also gain
access the internet if you have a USB
mobile broadband connection inside the
vehicle, your phone supports PAN
(personal area networking) and if you are
parked outside of a wireless hotspot.
Press the Settings icon > Settings >
Wireless & Internet, then select from the
following:
353
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi Network (Client) Mode Turn the Wi-Fi feature on
and off in your vehicle. Make sure it is turned on for
connectivity purposes.
Wi-Fi Settings
Choose a Wireless Network Use a previously stored
wireless network. You can categorize by alphabetical
listing, priority and signal strength. You can also choose
to search for a network, connect to a network, disconnect
from a network, receive more information, prioritize a
network or delete a network.
Gateway (Access Point) Mode Make SYNC an access
point for a phone or a computer by turning this feature on.
This forms the local area network within the vehicle for
things, such as game playing, file transfer, internet
browsing, etc. Press ? for more information.
Gateway (Access Point) Settings View and change
settings for using SYNC as the internet gateway.
Gateway (Access Point) Device List View who has
connected to your Wi-Fi connection recently.
Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also use a USB
mobile broadband connection to access the internet. (You
must activate your mobile broadband device on your PC
prior to connecting it to the system.) This screen allows
you to set up what is your typical area for your USB mobile
broadband connection. (USB mobile broadband settings
may not be displayed if the device is already activated.)
You can select the following: Country, Carrier, Phone
Number, User Name and Password.
USB Mobile Broadband
Shows you what device is currently paired with the system
as well as giving you your typical Bluetooth options to
connect, disconnect, set as favorite, delete and add device.
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.
Bluetooth Settings
Choose your connection methods and change them as
needed. You can select to Change Order and have the
system either always attempt to connect using a USB
mobile broadband or using Wi-Fi.
Prioritize Connection
Methods
354
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
E142626
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification
mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Help
Press the Settings icon > Help, then select
from the following:
Help
View the vehicle's current location, if your vehicle is
equipped with navigation. If your vehicle is not equipped
with navigation, nothing is displayed.
Where Am I?
Touchscreen system serial numberSystem Information
Your vehicle identification number (VIN)
Touchscreen system software version
Navigation system version (if applicable)
Map database version (if equipped with navigation)
Sirius satellite radio ESN (if activated)
Gracenote® Database Information and Library version
View the licenses for any software and applications
installed on your system.
Software Licenses
Certain features are disabled when your vehicle is moving.Driving Restrictions
Turn 911 Assist on and off. See Information (page 382).911 Assist
In Case of Emergency (ICE) Quick Dial: This feature
allows you to save up to two numbers as ICE contacts for
quick access in the event of an emergency. Select Edit to
access your phonebook and then select the desired
contacts. The numbers then appear as options on this
screen for the ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons. The ICE contacts
you select are presented to you at the completion of the
911 Assist call process for quick access.
View categorized lists of voice commands.Voice Command List
355
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
To access Help using the voice commands,
press the voice button, then, after the tone,
say "Help". The system provides voice
commands that can be used in the current
mode.
ENTERTAINMENT
Your system offers many media options.
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
Browsing Device Content
When listening to any type of audio, you
can browse through other devices without
having to change sources. For example, if
you are currently listening to the radio, you
can browse all the artists that are stored
on your USB device.
E142599
Press the voice icon on the
steering wheel. When prompted,
you can say:
"BROWSE" within Devices
"Browse"*
"Browse <league> games"**
"Browse <Sirius category> channels"**
"Browse CD track list"
"Browse SD card"
"Browse Sirius channel guide"**
"Browse USB"
"Help"
* If you only say "Browse", you can then say any commands in the following chart.
** If equipped with SIRIUS® satellite radio.
"BROWSE"
"<League> Games"*
"<Sirius category> channels"*
"CD Track List"
"SD card"*
"Sirius Channel Guide"*
356
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
"BROWSE"
"USB"**
"Help"
* If equipped with SIRIUS® satellite radio.
** For more commands in SD card or USB mode, see the "SD Card and USB Port" section
of this chapter.
AM/FM Radio
E142611
Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen and then select the
AM or FM tabs.
To change between AM and FM presets,
just touch the AM or FM tabs.
You CanWhen You Select
Save a station by pressing and holding one of the memory
preset areas. There is a brief mute while the station is being
saved, then sound returns when it is done.
Presets
Turn the feature on. This enables you to receive radio
broadcasts digitally (where available), providing free,
crystal-clear sound.
HD Radio
Go to the next strong AM or FM radio station.Scan
Sound Settings allows you to adjust Bass, Midrange,
Treble, Balance and Fade, DSP (if equipped), Occupancy
Mode (if equipped), and Speed Compensated Volume
settings.
Options
Set PTY for Seek/Scan allows you to select a category
of music you would like to search for and then choose to
either seek or scan for the stations.
RDS Text Display allows you to always view the inform-
ation broadcast by FM stations by selecting On.
357
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
You CanWhen You Select
Auto Presets (AST) allows you to have the system
automatically store the six strongest stations in your
current location.
TAG Button (if available) allows you to tag a song to
download later. When you select On, TAG appears on-
screen when HD Radio is active. You can press TAG to
save the information of the song that is playing. When you
plug in your portable music player, the information is
transferred (if supported by your device). When you are
connected to iTunes®, the tags appear to remind you of
the songs you would like to download.
Enter the desired station number when prompted. Press
Enter.
Direct Tune
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver which allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When this feature is enabled and you are
tuned to a station broadcasting HD Radio
technology, you may notice the following
indicators on your screen:
E142616
The HD Radio logo blinks when a digital
station is being acquired and is solid when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen .
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The numbers that are highlighted signify
available digital channels where new or
different content is available. HD1 signifies
the main programming status and is
available in analog and digital broadcasts.
Any additional multicast stations (HD2
through HD7) are only broadcast digitally.
TAG allows you to save a song to
download later. When you are on an
acquired HD Radio station, the TAG button
is available (provided the feature has been
turned on). To use the tag feature:
358
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
1. Press AM or FM > Options > TAG
Button > On.
2. When you hear a song you like, touch
TAG.
3. The system automatically saves the
song's information and transfers it to
your portable music player (if
supported) when it is connected to the
system. If your music player is
connected at the time, the system
automatically transfers the tag to your
player and a pop-up confirms the
transfer.
4. When you access iTunes® with your
portable music player, the tags appear
to you as a reminder. The system
allows you to tag up to approximately
100 songs. For a list of devices that
support tagging, see
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
You CanWhen You Select
Hear a brief sampling of all available stations.Scan
This feature still works when HD Radio reception is activ-
ated, although it does not scan for HD2-HD7 channels.
You may see the HD logo appear if the station has a digital
broadcast.
When the channel is active on-screen, press and hold a
memory preset slot until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute, then the sound returns signifying it was saved. When
recalling a HD2 or HD3 memory preset, there is a mute
before the digital audio is played as the system must once
again acquire the digital signal. As with any saved radio
station, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle
is outside the station's reception area.
To save a multicast station
as a preset
359
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
Reception area
When a station is first received (aside from HD2-HD7
multicast stations), the system first plays the station in
the analog version and then, if the receiver verifies the
station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version.
Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight
sound change when the station changes from analog to
digital. This shift from analog to digital sound or digital
back to analog, is known as blending.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, a contact form has been
developed to report any station issues
found while listening to a station
broadcasting with HD Radio technology.
Every station is independently owned and
operated. These stations are responsible
for ensuring all audio streams and data
fields are accurate.
360
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Potential Station Issues
ActionCauseIssues
None. Broadcast issue.Poor time-alignment by the
radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio. Increase or
decrease in audio volume.
None. Reception issue that
may clear up as you
continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or blending in
and out.
None. This is normal beha-
vior. Wait until the audio is
available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
Audio mute delay when
selecting HD2/HD3,
multicast preset or Direct
Tune.
None. The station is not
available in your current
location.
The previously stored
multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your
current reception area.
Cannot access HD2/HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
No text information shown
for currently selected
frequency.
None. This is normal beha-
vior.
Pressing Scan disables HD2-
HD7 channel search.
HD2-HD7 stations not found
when Scan is pressed.
* http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not
responsible for the content sent using HD
Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.
Radio Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to the radio,
press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the following
commands.
If you are not listening to the radio, press
the voice button and, after the tone, say
"Radio", then any of the following
commands.
361
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
"RADIO"
"FM autoset preset <#>""<87.9-107.9>"
"FM preset <#>"
"<87.9-107.9> HD"1
"FM 1""<530-1710>"
"FM 1 preset <#>""AM"
"FM 2""AM <530-1710>"
"FM 2 preset <#>""AM autoset"
"HD <#>"1
"AM autoset preset <#>"
"Preset <#>""AM preset <#>"
"Radio off"
"Browse"2
"Radio on""FM"
"Set PTY""FM <87.9-107.9>"
"Tune"3
"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"1
"Help""FM autoset"
1 If available
2 If you have said "Browse", see the "Browse" chart later in this section.
3 If you have said "Tune", see the following "Tune" chart.
"TUNE"
"FM autoset""<530-1710>"
"FM autoset preset <#>"
"<87.9-107.9> HD <#>"*
"FM preset <#>""AM"
"FM1""AM <530-1710>"
"FM1 preset <#>""AM preset <#>"
"FM2""AM autoset"
"FM2 preset <#>""AM autoset preset <#>"
362
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
"TUNE"
"HD <#>"*
"<87.9-107.9>"
"Preset <#>""FM"
"Help""FM <87.9-107.9>"
"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"
* If available
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)
E142611
Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, then select the
SIRIUS tab.
You CanWhen You Select
Save a station by pressing and holding one of the memory
preset areas. There is a brief mute while the station is being
saved, then sound returns when it is done.
Presets
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The
system alerts you when it plays again on any SIRIUS
channel.
ALERT
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay
approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you have
remained tuned to the current station. If you change
stations, the previous audio is erased.
Replay
1. Press and release the seek buttons to hear the previous
or next song.
2. Press and hold the seek buttons to reverse or fast
forward in the current track.
3. Press play or pause to play or pause the audio.
4. Press Replay again to return to live audio if you have
been using the replay feature to replay audio.
Hear a brief sampling of channels.Scan
Sound Settings allows you to adjust Bass, Midrange,
Treble, Balance and Fade, DSP (if equipped), Occupancy
Mode (if equipped) and Speed Compensated Volume.
Options
363
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
You CanWhen You Select
Set Category for Seek/Scan allows you to select the
desired category (Rock, Country, etc.) and then use Seek
or Scan to initiate a search for those channels.
Parental Lockout allows you to lock and unlock channels,
change or reset your PIN or unlock all channels. To use
this feature, you need your initial PIN which is 1234.
Artist/Title/Team Alerts allows you to select Artists,
Titles and Teams that you would like the system to alert
you to when they are playing on other channels. Press Edit
Alerts to delete or turn off alerts. You can also set all alerts
to on or off. When an alert appears on the screen, you can
choose to Tune to the channel, to Cancel the alert or to
Disable Alerts. If you are listening to a sporting event, you
can save your favorite teams so that the system can alert
you when they are playing on a satellite radio channel.
Note: SIRIUS does not support the Alert feature on all
channels. Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible
for Alert feature variation.
Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is required when
communicating with SIRIUS about your account.
Enter the desired satellite channel number using the on-
screen keypad.
Direct Tune
View a list of all available stations. Scroll and select the
desired station.
Browse
You can also lock or skip unwanted channels or view the
song and artist on other stations.
* SIRIUS does not support the Alert feature on all channels. Ford Motor Company shall
not be responsible for Alert feature variation.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
364
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
E142593
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SIRIUS satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
which begins on the date of sale or lease
of the vehicle. See your authorized dealer
for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at
1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. The ESN
is found on the System Information Screen
(SR ESN:XXXXXXXXXXXX). To access
your ESN, touch the bottom left corner of
the touchscreen. Touch SIRIUS, Options,
then ESN.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the
interference and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
365
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Troubleshooting Tips
ActionCauseRadio Display
None. This message should
disappear shortly.
Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
Acquiring...
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an igni-
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See your
authorized dealer for service.
Internal module or system
failure present.
Sat Fault/SIRIUS System
Failure.
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
Channel no longer available.Invalid Channel.
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
Subscription not available
for this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel.
The signal is currently being
blocked. When you move
into an open area, the signal
should return.
Loss of signal from the
SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS
tower to the vehicle
antenna.
No Signal.
None. The process may take
up to three minutes.
Update of channel
programming in progress.
Updating.
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
539-7474 to reactivate or
resolve subscription issues.
Satellite service has been
deactivated by SIRIUS
satellite radio.
Call SIRIUS
1-888-539-7474.
Using the channel guide,
unlock or unskip the chan-
nels.
All the channels in the
selected category are
skipped or locked.
No Channels Available.
None.SIRIUS has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
Subscription Updated.
366
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Voice
Commands
E142599
If you are listening to SIRIUS
satellite radio, press the voice
button on the steering wheel
controls. When prompted, say any of the
following commands.
If you are not listening to SIRIUS satellite
radio, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say "SIRIUS", then any of the
following commands.
"SIRIUS"
"SAT 2 preset <#>""<0-223>"
"SAT 3""<Channel name>"
"SAT 3 preset <#>""Preset <#>"
"SIRIUS off""SAT"
"SIRIUS on""SAT preset <#>"
"Sports game"*
"SAT 1"
"Tune"**
"SAT 1 Preset <#>"
"Help""SAT 2"
* Late availability. If you have said "Sports game", see the following "Sports game" chart.
** If you have said "Tune", see the following "Tune" chart.
"SPORTS GAME"
"Tune to the <college name> game"
"Tune to the <team city> game"
"Tune to the <team city> <team name> game"
"Tune to the <team name> game"
"Help"
367
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
"TUNE"
"<0-223>"
"<Channel Name>"
"Preset <#>"
"SAT"
"SAT 1"
"SAT 1 preset <#>"
"SAT 2"
"SAT 2 preset <#>"
"SAT 3"
"SAT 3 preset <#>"
"Help"
CD
E142611
Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, then select the CD
tab.
You CanWhen You Select
Choose to repeat the currently playing track, all tracks on
the disc or turn the feature off if already on.
Repeat
Play the tracks or entire albums in random order, or turn
the feature off if already on.
Shuffle
Hear a brief sampling of all available tracks.Scan
See disc information.More Info
Sound Adjust Bass, Treble, Midrange, Balance and Fade,
DSP (if equipped), Occupancy Mode (if equipped), and
Speed Compensated Volume settings.
Options
Compression Turn the compression feature on and off.
Look through all available audio sources.Browse
368
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
You can also advance and reverse the
current track or current folder (if
applicable).
CD Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a CD, press
the voice button on the steering
wheel controls. When prompted,
say any of the following commands.
If you are not listening to a CD, press the
voice button and, after the tone, say "CD",
then any of the following commands.
"CD"
"Pause"
"Play"
"Play next track"
"Play previous track"
"Play track <1-512>"
"Repeat"
"Repeat folder"*
"Repeat off"
"Repeat track"
"Shuffle"
"Shuffle CD"*
"Shuffle folder"*
"Shuffle off"
"Help"
*WMA or MP3 only.
369
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
SD Card Slot and USB Port
SD Card
Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded.
To remove the SD card, press the card in
and the system ejects it. Do not attempt to
pull the card to remove it as this could cause
damage.
The card slot can also be used for your
navigation system (if equipped). See
Navigation (page 395).
E142619
The SD card slot is located either in the
center console or behind a small access
door in the instrument panel. To access
and play music from your device, press the
lower left corner of the touchscreen.
E142620
SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
USB Port
E142621
The USB ports are located either in the
center console or behind a small access
door in the instrument panel. To access
and play music from your device, press the
lower left corner of the touchscreen.
This feature allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and also charge devices
if they support this feature.
In order to playback video from your iPod®
or iPhone® (if compatible), you MUST
have a special combination USB/RCA
composite video cable (available for
purchase from Apple®). When the cable
is connected to your iPod® or iPhone®,
plug the other end into both the RCA jacks
and the USB port.
Playing Music from Your Device
E142611
Insert your device and select the
USB or SD Card tab once the
system recognizes it. You can
choose from the following options:
370
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
You CanWhen You Select
Repeat the currently playing song or album.Repeat
Play music on the selected album or folder in random
order.
Shuffle
Choose music similar to that which is currently playing.Similar Music
Displays information such as current track, artist name.
album and genre.
More Info
Sound Settings allows you to adjust Bass, Midrange,
Treble, Balance and Fade, DSP (if equipped), Occupancy
Mode (if equipped) and Speed Compensated Volume.
Options
Media Player Settings allows you to select more
settings, which can be found under Media Player. See
Settings (page 347).
Device Information displays software and firmware
information about the currently connected media device.
Update Media Index indexes the device each time it is
connected to make sure you have the latest voice
commands available for all media on the device.
Browse the contents of the device. It also allows you to
search by genre, artist, album, etc.
Browse
To view song information such as Title,
Artist, File, Folder, Album, and Genre, touch
the on-screen album art. You can also
press What's Playing? to hear how the
system pronounces the current band and
song. This can be helpful when using voice
commands to make sure the system
correctly plays your request.
Playing Video from Your Device
To access and play video from your device,
your vehicle's transmission must be in
position P (automatic transmission) or
neutral (manual transmission) with the
ignition in accessory mode. See Keyless
Starting (page 143).
USB and SD Card Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a USB
device or an SD card, press the
voice button on the steering
wheel controls. When prompted, say any
of the following commands.
If you are not listening to a USB device or
an SD card, press the voice button and,
after the tone, say "USB" or "SD card",
then any of the following commands.
371
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
"USB" or "SD CARD"
"Play podcast episode <name>"
"Browse"1
"Play similar music""Next"
"Play song <name>""Pause"
"Play TV show episode <name>"2
"Play"
"Play video <name>"2
"Play album <name>"
"Play video podcast episode <name>"2
"Play all"
"Play video playlist <name>"2
"Play artist <name>"
"Previous""Play audiobook <name>"
"Repeat all""Play author <name>"
"Repeat off""Play composer <name>"
"Repeat one""Play folder <name>"
"Shuffle""Play genre <name>"
"Shuffle off"
"Play movie <name>"2
"What's this?""Play playlist <name>"
"Help""Play podcast <name>"
1 If you have said you would like to browse your USB or SD card, the system prompts you
to specify what you would like to browse. When prompted, see the following "Browse"
chart.
2 These commands are only available in USB mode and are device-dependent.
"BROWSE"
"All video podcasts"*
"Album <name>"
"All videos"*
"All albums"
"Artist <name>""All artists"
"Audiobook <name>""All audiobooks"
372
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
"BROWSE"
"Author <name>""All authors"
"Composer <name>""All composers"
"Folder <name>""All folders"
"Genre <name>""All genres"
"Playlist <name>"
"All movies"*
"Podcast <name>"
"All music videos"*
"TV show <name>"*
"All playlists"
"Video <name>"*
"All podcasts"
"Video playlist <name>"*
"All songs"
"Video podcast <name>"*
"All TV shows"*
"Help"
"All video playlists"*
* These commands are only available in USB mode and are device-dependent.
Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player, including iPod®,
Zune™, plays from device players, and
most USB drives. Supported audio formats
include MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.
It is also able to organize your indexed
media from your playing device by
metadata tags. Metadata tags are
descriptive software identifiers embedded
in the media files which provide
information about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC may classify the empty
metadata tags as Unknown.
In order to playback video from your iPod®
or iPhone®, (if compatible), you MUST
have a special combination USB/RCA
composite video cable (available for
purchase from Apple® ). When the cable
is connected to your iPod® or iPhone®,
plug the other end into both the RCA jacks
and the USB port.
Bluetooth Audio
Your system allows you to stream audio
over your vehicle's speakers from your
connected, Bluetooth-enabled cellular
phone.
E142611
To access, press the lower left
corner on the touchscreen, then
select the BT tab.
373
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands
Note: If your Bluetooth device supports
streaming metadata, all the commands
below are available. If your device does not,
only "Next song", "Pause", "Play" and
"Previous song" are available.
E142599
If you are listening to a Bluetooth
audio device, press the voice
button on the steering wheel
controls. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to a Bluetooth audio
device, press the voice button and, after
the tone, say “Bluetooth Audio”, then any
of the commands in the following chart.
"BLUETOOTH AUDIO"
"Play genre <name>""Browse composer
<name>"
"Browse album <name>"
"Play playlist <name>""Browse folder <name>""Browse all albums"
"Play podcast episode
<name>"
"Browse genre <name>""Browse all artists"
"Play similar music""Browse playlist <name>""Browse all audiobooks"
"Play song <name>""Browse podcast <name>""Browse all authors"
"Previous""Next""Browse all composers"
"Repeat all""Pause""Browse all folders"
"Repeat off""Play""Browse all genres"
"Repeat one""Play album <name>""Browse all playlists"
"Shuffle""Play artist <name>""Browse all podcasts"
"Shuffle album""Play audiobook <name>""Browse all songs"
"Shuffle off""Play author <name>""Browse artist <name>"
"What’s this?""Play composer <name>""Browse audiobook
<name>"
"Help""Play folder <name>""Browse author <name>"
374
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
A/V Inputs
Note: For safety reasons, connecting or
adjusting the settings on your portable
media player should not be attempted while
the vehicle is moving. Also, the portable
media player should be stored in a secure
location, such as the center console or the
glove box, when the vehicle is in motion. The
audio extension cable must be long enough
to allow the portable media player to be
safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
E142622
Your A/V inputs allow you to connect an
auxiliary audio/video source (e.g., game
systems or personal camcorders) by
connecting RCA cords (not included) to
these input jacks. The jacks are yellow, red
and white and are located either in the
center console or behind a small access
door in the instrument panel.
You can also use the A/V inputs as an
auxiliary input jack (AIJ) to play music from
your portable media player over your
vehicle's speakers. Plug in your one-eighth
inch (3.5 millimeter) RCA adapter into the
two left A/V input jacks (red and white).
Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, then select the A/V Inputs
tab.
To use the auxiliary input jack feature,
make sure that your portable media player
is designed to be used with headphones
and that it is fully charged. You also need
an audio extension cable with stereo male
one-eighth inch (3.5 millimeter)
connectors at one end and a RCA jack at
the other.
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the
radio and portable device turned off.
2. Attach one end of the audio extension
cable to the headphone output of your
player and the other end into the
adapter in one of the two left A/V input
jacks (white or red) inside the center
console.
3. Press the lower left corner on the
touchscreen. Select either a tuned
station from the FM tab or the CD tab
(if there is a CD already loaded into the
system). Adjust the volume to a
comfortable listening level.
4. Turn the portable media player on and
adjust the volume to one-half the
maximum.
5. Press the lower left corner on the
touchscreen. Select the A/V In tab.
(You should hear audio from your
portable music player although it may
be low.)
6. Adjust the sound on your portable
media player until it reaches the level
of the FM station or CD by switching
back and forth between the controls.
In order to playback video from your iPod®
or iPhone®, (if compatible), you MUST
have a special combination USB/RCA
composite video cable (available for
purchase from Apple®). When the cable
is connected to your iPod® or iPhone®,
plug the other end into both the RCA jacks
and the USB port.
375
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Note: Do not connect the audio input jack
to a line level output. The AIJ only works
correctly with devices that have a
headphone output with a volume control.
Note: Do not set the portable media
player's volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD
or FM radio as this causes distortion and
reduces sound quality.
Note: If the audio sounds distorted at lower
listening levels, turn the portable media
player volume down. If the problems
persists, replace or recharge the batteries
in the portable media player.
Note: The portable media player must be
controlled in the same manner when it is
used with headphones as the AIJ does not
provide control (e.g., play or pause) over the
attached portable media player.
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. Once your phone is
paired, you can access many options using
the touchscreen or voice commands. While
the system supports a variety of features,
many are dependent on your cellular
phone's functionality.
At a minimum, most cellular phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
•Answering an incoming call
•Ending a call
•Using privacy mode
•Dialing a number
•Redialing
•Call waiting notification
•Caller ID.
Other features such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone's compatibility, see
your phone's user manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing Your Phone for the First
Time
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, accident and
injury. Ford strongly recommends
that drivers use extreme caution when
using any device that may take their focus
off the road. Your primary responsibility is
the safe operation of the vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving, encourage
the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of
applicable state and local laws that may
affect use of electronic devices while
driving.
The first thing you must do to use SYNC's
phone features is to pair your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone with
SYNC. This allows you to use your phone
in a hands-free manner.
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and
radio are turned on and that the
transmission is in position P.
1. Touch Add Phone in the upper left
corner of the touchscreen.
2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On
and that your cellular phone is in the
proper mode. See your phone's user
guide if necessary.
376
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
3. When prompted on your phone's
display, enter the six-digit PIN provided
by SYNC in the radio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is
successful and asks you if you want to
download your phonebook.
Depending on your phone's capability, you
may be prompted with additional options.
For more information on your phone's
capability, see your phone's user guide and
visit the website.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and
radio are turned on and that the
transmission is in position P.
1. Press the phone corner of the
touchscreen, Settings,BT Devices,
then Add Device.
2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On
and that your cellular phone is in the
proper mode. See your phone's user
guide if necessary.
3. When prompted on your phone's
display, enter the six-digit PIN provided
by SYNC on the screen. The display
indicates when the pairing is
successful. The system asks you if you
want to download your phonebook.
Depending on your phone's capability, you
may be prompted with additional options.
For more information on your phone's
capability, see your phone's user guide and
visit the website.
Making Calls
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say "Call <name>" or
say "Dial", the desired number.
E142632
To end the call or exit phone
mode, press and hold the phone
button.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Call information appears in the
display if it is available.
Accept the call by pressing
Accept on the touchscreen or
by pressing this phone button on
your steering wheel controls.
E142632
Reject the call by pressing
Reject on the touchscreen or by
pressing and holding this phone
button on your steering wheel controls.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logs
it as a missed call.
Phone Menu Options
Press the top left corner on your
touchscreen to select from the following
options:
You CanWhen You Select
Access the on-screen numerical pad to enter a number
and place a call.
Phone
377
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
You CanWhen You Select
· During an active call, you can also choose to mute the
call, put it on hold, activate privacy (returns the call to your
cellular phone), join two calls or end the call.
Select and call contacts stored in your phonebook
contacts and call history folder.
Quick Dial
Access and call any contacts in your previously down-
loaded phonebook. The system places the entries in
alphabetical categories summarized at the top of the
screen.
Phonebook
· To turn on contact picture settings (if your device
supports this feature), press Phone,Settings,Manage
Phonebook,Download Photos from Phonebook, then
select On.
· Certain smartphones may support transferring street
addresses when listed with phonebook contact informa-
tion. If this feature is supported, you can select and use
these addresses as destinations and also save them as
favorites.
Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls
while your Bluetooth-enabled phone was connected to
SYNC. You can also choose to save these to Favorites or
Quick Dial.
History
· This is a phone-dependent feature. If your phone does
not support downloading call history using Bluetooth,
SYNC keeps track of calls made with the SYNC system.
Send text messages using your touchscreen. See the Text
Messaging section for more information.
Messaging
Access various phone settings such as turning Bluetooth
on and off, managing your phonebook and more. See the
Phone Settings section for more information.
Settings
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging
are speed-dependent and cannot be
completed when the vehicle is traveling at
speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: SYNC does not download read text
messages from your phone.
You can send and receive text messages
using Bluetooth, read them aloud and
translate text messaging acronyms such
as LOL.
1. Touch the top left corner of the display
to access the Phone menu.
2. Select Messaging.
378
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
3. Choose from the following:
•Listen
•Dial
•Send Text
•View
•Delete.
Composing a Text Message
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature
and cannot be completed when the vehicle
is traveling at speeds over 5 mph (8 km/h).
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features.
1. Touch the top left corner of the display
to access the Phone menu.
2. Press Messaging > Send Text.
3. Enter a phone number or choose from
your phonebook.
4. You can select from the following
options:
•Send, which sends the message as it
is.
•Edit Text, which allows you to
customize the pre-defined message or
create a message on your own.
You can then preview the message and
verify the recipient as wells as update the
message list and send it to a connected
device (i.e. USB drive).
Text Message Options
I’ll call you back in a few minutes.
I just left, I’ll be there soon.
Can you give me a call?
I’m on my way.
I’m running a few minutes late.
I’m ahead of schedule, so I’ll be there early.
I’m outside.
I’ll call you when I get there.
OK
Yes
No
Thanks
Stuck in traffic.
Call me later.
LOL
379
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Receiving a Text Message
Note: If you select View and your vehicle is
traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h), the system
offers to read the message to you instead
of allowing you to view it while driving.
When a new message arrives, an audible
tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the caller name and ID, if
supported by your phone. You can press:
•View to view the text message.
•Listen for SYNC to read the message
to you.
•Dial to call the contact.
•Ignore to exit the screen.
Phone Settings
Press Phone, then Settings or the
Settings icon,Settings, then Phone to
select from the following settings:
You CanWhen You Select
Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as
save it as a favorite.
Bluetooth Devices
Turn Bluetooth on or off.Bluetooth On/Off
Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring in
the vehicle cabin. With this feature turned on, text message
notifications are also suppressed and do not ring inside
the cabin.
Do not disturb
Turn 911 Assist™ on or off. See Information (page 382).911 Assist
Select what ring tone you would like to hear when you
receive a call. Choose from possible system ring tones,
your currently paired phone's ring tone, a beep, text-to-
speech or if you would like the notification to be silent.
Phone ringer
Select how you would like to be notified when you receive
a text message, if supported by your phone. Choose from
possible system alert tones, text-to-speech or silent.
Text message notification
Use this screen to make adjustments to your internet data
connection. Select to make your connection profile with
the PAN (personal area network) or to turn off your
connection. You can also choose to make adjustments to
your settings or have the system always connect, never
connect when roaming or query on connect. Press ? for
more information.
Internet Data Connection*
380
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
You CanWhen You Select
Access features such as automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your
phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Manage Phonebook
Display call history.Display call history
* If compatible.
Phone Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the
following commands:
"PHONE"
"Hold call off"1
"Bluetooth off"
"Hold on"1
"Bluetooth on"
"Join calls"1
"Call"
"Listen to text message <#>""Call <name>"
"Listen to text messages""Call <name> at home"
"Messages"2
"Call <name> at work"
"Mute call"1
"Call <name> on cell"
"Pair phone""Call <name> on other"
"Privacy on"1
"Call voicemail"
"Reply to text messages""Dial"
"Turn ringer off""Do not disturb off"
"Turn ringer on""Do not disturb on"
381
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
"PHONE"
"Unmute call""Forward text messages"
"Help"
"Go to hands free"1
1 These commands are only available during an active call.
2 If you say "Messages", see the following "Messages" chart for additional commands.
"MESSAGES"
"Call"
"Forward text messages"
"Listen to text message <#>"
"Listen to text messages"
"Reply to text messages"
"Help"
INFORMATION
Under the Information menu, you can
access features such as:
•SYNC® Services
•SIRIUS® Travel Link™
•Alerts
•Calendar
•SYNC Applications
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation,
press the Information button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, press the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
SYNC Services (If Equipped, U.S.
Only)
Note: SYNC Services requires activation
prior to use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com
to register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone
and message rates may apply. Subscription
may be required. You must also have the
active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use,
SYNC Services. See Phone (page 376).
Note: This feature does not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Make sure
your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID
before using SYNC Services.
382
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible
for the safe operation of the vehicle, and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe
to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features are provided only as an
aid. Make your driving decisions based on
your observations of local conditions and
existing traffic regulations. Do not follow
the route suggestions if doing so would
result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation, or
if you would be directed into an area that
you consider unsafe. Maps used by this
system may be inaccurate because of errors,
changes in roads, traffic conditions or driving
conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle's current
location, travel direction and speed to help
provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request.
Further, to provide the services you request
and for continuous improvement, the service
may collect and record call details and voice
communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want
Ford or its service providers to collect the
vehicle travel information or other
information identified in the Terms and
Conditions, do not activate or use the
service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle
sensors, integrated GPS technology and
comprehensive map and traffic data, to
give you personalized traffic reports,
precise turn-by-turn directions, business
search, news, sports, weather and more.
For a complete list of services, or to learn
more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using
Voice Commands
1. Press the voice button.
2. When prompted, say "Services". This
initiates an outgoing call to SYNC
Services using your paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular
phone.
3. Once you are connected to the service,
follow the voice prompts to request
the desired service, such as "Traffic" or
"Directions". You can also say "What
are my choices?" to receive a complete
list of available services from which to
choose.
4. Say "Services" to return to the Services
main menu or for help, say "Help".
Connecting to SYNC Services Using
the Touchscreen
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation,
press the Information button.
If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, press the green tab on your
touchscreen.
1. Select Connect to Services to initiate
an outgoing call to SYNC Services
using your phone.
2. Once connected, follow the voice
prompts to request your desired
Service, such as "Traffic" or
"Directions". You can also say "What
are my choices?" to receive a complete
list of available services from which to
choose.
3. To return to the Services menu, say
"Services" or for help, say "Help".
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services,
say "Directions" or "Business search".
To find the closest business or type of
business to your current location, just
say "Business search" and then
"Search near me". If you need further
assistance in finding a location you can
say "Operator" at any time within a
Directions or Business search to speak
383
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
with a live operator. You may also be
prompted to speak with an operator
when the automatic system has
difficulty matching your voice request.
The live operator can assist you by
searching for businesses by name or
by category, residential addresses by
street address or by name or specific
street intersections. Operator Assist is
a feature of your SYNC Services
subscription. For more information on
Operator Assist, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your
Destination. After the route download
is complete, the phone call is
automatically ended.
If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation:
•Turn-by-turn directions appear in the
right vehicle information display, in the
status bar of your touchscreen system
and also on the SYNC Services screen.
You also receive driving instructions
from audible prompts.
•When on an active route, you can
select Route Summary or Route
Status using the touchscreen controls
or voice commands to view the Route
Summary Turn List or the Route
Status ETA. You can also turn voice
guidance on or off, cancel the route or
update the route.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks
if you want the route updated. Just say,
"Yes" when prompted and a new route is
delivered to your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation,
SYNC Services downloads your requested
destination to the navigation system. The
navigation system then calculates the
route and provides driving instructions.
See Navigation (page 395).
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the hang-up phone
button on the steering wheel.
2. Say "Good-bye" from the SYNC
Services main menu.
384
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
SYNC Services Quick Tips
You can personalize your Services feature to provide
quicker access to your most used or favorite information.
You can save address points, such as work or home. You
can also save favorite information like sports teams, such
as Detroit Lions, or a news category. To learn more, log
onto www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Personalizing
Press the voice button at any time (while you are
connected to SYNC TDI Services) to interrupt a voice
prompt or an audio clip (such as a sports report) and say
your voice command.
Push to interrupt
Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-
enabled cellular phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle
Identification Number). You can pair and connect your
phone to any vehicle equipped with Traffic, Directions and
Information and continue enjoying your personalized
services.
Portable
SYNC Services Voice Commands
E142599
When a route has been
downloaded (non-navigation
systems), press the voice button
on the steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the following
commands:
"SERVICES"
"Cancel route"
"Navigation voice off"
"Navigation voice on"
"Next turn"
"Route status"
"Route summary"
"Services"
"Update route"
"Help"
385
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
SIRIUS Travel Link (If Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, accident and
injury. Ford strongly recommends
that drivers use extreme caution when
using any device or feature that may take
their focus off the road. Your primary
responsibility is the safe operation of the
vehicle. We recommend against the use
of any handheld device while driving,
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you
become aware of applicable state and
local laws that may affect use of electronic
devices while driving.
Note: In order to use SIRIUS Travel Link,
your vehicle must be equipped with
navigation and your navigation SD card
must be in the SD card slot.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic# and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by SIRIUS Travel Link.
Note: Neither SIRIUS nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the SIRIUS
Travel Link services or its use in vehicles.
SIRIUS Travel Link (if activated) can help
you locate the best gas prices, find movie
listings, get current traffic alerts, access
the current weather map, get accurate ski
conditions and scores to current sports
games.
Press the Information button, select Sirius
Travel Link, then choose from any of the
following services:
You CanWhen You Select
Identify traffic incidents on your route, nearby your vehicle's
current location or near any of your favorite places (if
programmed).
Traffic On Route
Traffic Nearby
View fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle's location
or on an active navigation route.
Fuel Prices
View nearby movie theaters and their show times (if
available).
Movie Listings
View the nearby weather, current weather, or the 5-day
forecast for the chosen area. Select Map to see the
weather map which can show storms, radar information,
charts and winds. Select Area to select from a listing of
weather locations.
Weather
View scores and schedules from a variety of sports. You
can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier access.
The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.
Sports Info.
View ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions
386
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
SIRIUS Travel Link Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the
following commands:
"SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK"
"5-day weather forecast"
"Fuel prices"
"Movie listings"
"Sports headlines"
"Sports schedules"
"Sports scores"
"Traffic"
"Weather"
"Weather map"
"Help"
* If you say "Sports headlines", "Sports schedules" or "Sports scores", you can then say
any of the commands in the following chart.
Sports-related Commands*
"Baseball"
"College basketball"
"College football"
"Golf"
"MLS"
"My teams"
"NBA"
"NFL"
"NHL"
387
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Sports-related Commands*
"WNBA"
"Help"
* If you want to hear headlines, schedules or scores from a particular sport, or your
favorite team(s), say the sport (or team), then "headlines", "schedules" or "scores".
Additional Sports-related Voice Commands
"NBA scores""MLS headlines""Baseball headlines"
"NFL headlines""MLS schedule""Baseball schedule"
"NFL schedule""MLS scores""Baseball scores"
"NFL scores""Motor sports headlines""College basketball
schedule"
"NHL headlines""Motor sports order""College basketball scores"
"NHL schedule""Motor sports schedule""College football headlines"
"NHL scores""My team headlines""College football schedule"
"WNBA headlines""My teams schedule""College football scores"
"WNBA schedule""My teams scores""Golf headlines"
"WNBA scores""NBA headlines""Golf leaderboard"
"Help""NBA schedule""Golf schedule"
Alerts
Press the Information button, then select
Alerts.
You can select a message and choose to:
•View the complete message
•Delete the message
•Delete All messages
This screen displays any system messages
(i.e., SD card fault).
Note: The system alerts you to any
messages by turning the information icon
yellow. When the messages are read or
deleted, the icon returns to white.
Calendar
Press the Information button, then select
Calendar.
388
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
911 Assist® (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
prior to a crash, the system will not
dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
Always place your phone in a secure
location in the vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a collision. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, ensure
that you read the 911 Assist privacy notice
later in this section for important
information.
Note: If 911 Assist is turned on or off by any
user, that setting applies for all paired
phones. If 911 Assist is turned off, either a
voice message plays or a display
message/icon comes on (or both) when the
vehicle is started after a previously paired
phone connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag or activates
the fuel pump shut-off, your
SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to
contact emergency services by dialing 911
through a paired and connected
Bluetooth-enabled phone. For more
information about 911 Assist, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 34). Important information
regarding airbag deployment is in this
chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 225).
Important information regarding the fuel
pump shut-off is in this chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On
Press the Information button > Apps > 911
Assist, then select On.
You can also access 911 Assist by:
•Pressing the Settings icon > Settings
> Phone > 911 Assist, or
•Pressing the Settings icon > Help > 911
Assist.
To make sure that 911 Assist works
properly:
•SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
•The 911 Assist feature must be set on
prior to the incident.
•A Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
phone has to be paired and connected
to SYNC.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
389
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
•The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (which would
activate 911 Assist); however, if 911 Assist
is triggered, SYNC tries to contact
emergency services. If a connected phone
is damaged or loses connection to SYNC,
SYNC searches for, and tries to connect
to, any available previously paired phone
and tries to make the call to 911.
Before making the call:
•SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
Failure to cancel the call results in
SYNC attempting to dial 911.
•SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
If the call is not cancelled and a successful
call is made, a pre-recorded message is
played for the 911 operator, then the
occupant(s) in the vehicle is able to talk
with the operator. Be prepared to provide
your name, phone number and location
immediately, because not all 911 systems
are capable of receiving this information
electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
•Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware was damaged in a crash.
•The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
•The phone(s) paired and connected to
the system was thrown from the
vehicle.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
Once 911 Assist is set on, it may disclose to
emergency services that the vehicle has
been in a crash involving the deployment
of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump
shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of
electronically or verbally disclosing to 911
operators the vehicle location or other
details about the vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not turn the feature on.
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped)
WARNING
Always follow scheduled
maintenance instructions, regularly
inspect your vehicle, and seek repair
for any damage or problem you suspect.
Vehicle Health Report supplements, but
cannot replace, normal maintenance and
vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report
only monitors certain systems that are
electronically monitored by the vehicle and
will not monitor or report the status of any
other system, (i.e., brake lining wear).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regularly inspect your vehicle may
result in vehicle damage and serious injury.
Note: This feature is only available in the
United States.
390
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature
requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There
is no fee or subscription associated with
Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature
Note: This feature may not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Before
running a report, review the Vehicle Health
Report Privacy Notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for
your vehicle, you may not be able to create
a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle
odometer has reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may
apply when making a report.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set
your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,
you can request a Vehicle Health Report
(inside your vehicle). Return to your
account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view
your report. You can also choose for SYNC
to automatically remind you to run reports
at specific mileage intervals. Cellular phone
airtime usage may apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your
vehicle's overall health in the form of
diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health
Report contains valuable information such
as:
•Vehicle diagnostic information
•Scheduled maintenance
•Open recalls and Field Service Actions
•Unserviced items from vehicle
inspections by your authorized dealer.
Making a Report
To run a report by touchscreen, touch the
Information button > Apps > Vehicle
Health Report.
E142599
To run a report by voice
command, press the voice
button on the steering wheel
and, when prompted, say "Vehicle health
report".
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you run a Vehicle Health Report,
Ford Motor Company may collect your
cellular phone number (to process your
report request) and diagnostic information
about your vehicle. Certain versions or
updates to Vehicle Health Report may also
collect additional vehicle information. Ford
may use the vehicle information it collects
for any purpose. If you do not want to
disclose your cellular phone number or
vehicle information, do not run the feature
or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile
at www.SYNCMyRide.com. See
www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health
Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy
Statement) for more information.
CLIMATE
Press the lower right corner on the
touchscreen to access your climate control
features. Depending on your vehicle line
and option package, your climate screen
may look different than what is shown
here.
391
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Power: Touch to turn the climate control system on and off. When the system
is off, outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle.
A
Passenger settings: Touch DUAL to switch passenger side temperature
controls on and off. Touch the + and - to adjust the temperature. Touch the
heated seat icon to control the heated seat (if equipped).
B
Fan speed: Touch + or - to increase or decrease the volume of air circulated
in your vehicle.
C
Recirculated air: Touch the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When recirculated air is selected, the button illuminates and
the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce
the time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and may also reduce
unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. Recirculated air may turn off
automatically in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the possibility of
fogging.
D
MAX A/C: Touch to switch on. Recirculated air is distributed through the
instrument panel air vents, air conditioning is automatically adjusted to the
highest speed and the temperature dial returns to the full cool position. This
re-cooling of the interior is more economical and efficient.
E
A/C: Touch to turn air conditioning on or off. To improve air conditioning when
starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open for two to three
minutes. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and
efficiency.
F
392
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
AUTO: Touch to turn on fully automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system automatically adjusts
fan speed, air distribution, A/C operation, and outside or recirculated air, to heat
or cool the vehicle to maintain the selected temperature.
G
Rear defroster: Touch to turn the rear window defroster and heated mirrors
(if equipped).
H
Manual airflow distribution controls:Floor/Defrost: Distributes air through
the windshield defroster vents, demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor
vents, and provides outside air to reduce window fogging. Panel: Distributes
air through the instrument panel vents. Panel/Floor: Distributes air through
the instrument panel vents, demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor
vents. Defrost: Touch to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice. Touch again
to return to the previous airflow selection. When switched on, defrost distributes
outside air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents to reduce
window fogging.
I
Driver settings: Depending on your vehicle and option package, you may have
the following features: Touch the + and - to adjust the temperature. Touch the
heated seat icon to control the heated seat (if equipped). Touch MyTemp to
select your previously pre-set temperature setpoint. Touch and hold MyTemp
store a new pre-set for temperature setpoint.
J
Climate Control Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the
following commands:
Climate Control Commands
"Climate automatic"
"Climate my temperature"
"Climate off"
"Climate on"
"Climate temperature <15.5-29.5> degrees"
"Climate temperature <60-85> degrees"
"Help"
393
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
There are additional climate control
commands but in order to access them,
you have to say "Climate" first. When the
system is ready to listen, you may say any
of the following commands:
"CLIMATE"
"Temperature"*
"Maximum fan"A/C off"
"Temperature <15.5-
29.5> degrees"
"Minimum fan""A/C on"
"Temperature <60-85>
degrees"
"My temp""Automatic"
"Temperature
decrease"
"Off""Defrost off"
"Temperature high""On""Defrost on"
"Temperature increase""Panel off""Dual off"
"Temperature low""Panel floor on""Fan decrease"
"Windshield floor on""Panel on""Fan increase"
"Windshield off""Rear defrost on""Floor off"
"Windshield panel on""Rear defrost off""Floor on"
"Windshield panel floor
on"
"Recirc off""MAX A/C off"
"Help""Recirc on""MAX A/C on"
* If you say "Temperature", you can then say any of the commands in the following chart.
"TEMPERATURE"
"<15.5-29.5> degrees"
"<60-85> degrees"
"High"
"Low"
"Help"
394
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
NAVIGATION
Note: The navigation SD card must be in
the SD card slot to operate the navigation
system. If you need a replacement SD card,
see your authorized dealer.
Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To
remove the SD card, just push the card in
and release it. Do not attempt to pull the
card out to remove it; this could cause
damage.
Your navigation system is comprised of
two main features, destination mode and
map mode.
To set a destination, press the green corner
of your touchscreen, then the Dest button
when it appears. See Setting a
destination later in this chapter.
To view the navigation map and the
vehicle's current location, touch the green
bar in the upper right hand corner of the
touchscreen, or, press Dest, then Map. See
Map mode later in this chapter.
Setting a Destination
Press the green corner of your touchscreen,
then the Dest button when it appears.
Choose any of the following:
Destination
Street AddressMy Home
IntersectionFavorites
City CenterPrevious Destinations
MapPoint of Interest (POI)
Previous Starting PointEmergency
Latitude/LongitudeFreeway Entrance/Exit
1. Enter the necessary information into
the highlighted text fields (in any
order). For address destination entry,
the Go! button appears once all the
necessary information has been
entered. Pressing the Go! button makes
the address location appear on the
map. If you choose Previous
Destination, the last 20 destinations
you have selected appear.
2. Select Set as Dest to make this your
destination. You can also choose to set
this as a waypoint (have the system
route to this point on the way to your
current destination) or save it as a
favorite. Any Avoid Areas selections are
also considered in route calculation.
3. Choose from up to three different types
of routes, then select Start Route.
•Fastest: Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.
•Shortest: Uses the shortest distance
possible.
•Eco (EcoRoute): Uses the most fuel
efficient route.
395
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
You can cancel the route or have the
system demo the route for you. Select
Route Prefs to set route preferences like
avoiding freeways, toll roads, ferries and
car trains as well as to use or not use HOV
lanes. (HOV lanes are High Occupancy
Vehicle Lanes also known as carpool or
diamond lanes. These lanes are reserved
for people who ride in buses, vanpools or
carpools.)
Note: If Start Route button is not pressed
and the vehicle is driven on a recognized
road, the system defaults to the fastest
route option and begins guidance.
During route guidance, the talking bubble
icon that appears in the upper right
navigation corner (green bar) can be
pressed if the user wants the system to
repeat a route guidance instruction.
Instructions decrease with each press.
Point of Interest (POI) Categories
Your system offers a variety if POI (Points
of Interest) categories.
Main Categories
AutomotiveFood/Drink & Dining
ShoppingTravel & Transportation
Entertainment & ArtsFinancial
Recreation & SportsEmergency
GovernmentCommunity
Domestic ServicesHealth & Medicine
Subcategories
Restaurant
Golf
Parking
Home & Garden
Personal Care Services
Auto Dealership
Govt Office
Public Transit
Education
396
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
To expand these listings, press the + in
front of the POI listing.
The system also allows you to sort the
POIs alphabetically, by distance or by
cityseekr listings (if available).
cityseekr
Note: cityseekr point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 154
cities (132 in the U.S., 13 in Canada and 9 in
Mexico).
E142634
cityseekr, when available, is a service which
provides additional information about
certain POIs such as restaurants, hotels
and attractions.
When you have selected a POI, the
location and information appear, such as
address and phone number. If the POI is
listed with cityseekr, you also see
information such as a brief description,
check-in and check-out times, when the
restaurant is open, etc.
Press More Information for a longer review,
a list of services and facilities, the average
room or meal price as well as the website.
This screen displays the POI icon such as:
E143884
Hotel
E142636
Coffeehouse
E142637
Food & Drink
E142638
Nightlife
E142639
Attraction
E142640
This icon appears when your
selection exists in multiple
categories within the system.
When you are viewing additional
information for hotels, cityseekr will also
tell you if the hotel has certain services and
facilities using icons.
For restaurants, cityseekr can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseekr can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check in/out times, hotel
service icons and website address.
Setting Your Navigation
Preferences
Select settings for the system to take into
account when planning your route.
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Settings > Navigation.
397
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
You CanWhen You Select
· Turn breadcrumbs on and off.Map Preferences
· Choose how you want to view the turn list (top-to-bottom
or bottom-to-top).
· Set the automatic parking POI notification. (When parking
POI notification is on, parking POI icons display on the map
when you get close to your destination. This may not be
very useful in dense areas, and may clutter the map if other
POIs are also set for display.)
· Avoid freeways, toll roads, ferries and car trains when
planning your route.
Route Preferences
· Use HOV lanes (if available), and have the system always
select the shortest distance, fastest time or most
economical route.
· Choose prompts to be either voice or tone only.Navigation Preferences
· Have the system automatically fill in the state and
province based on the information already entered into
the system.
Choose how you want the system to handle traffic prob-
lems along your route.
Traffic Preferences
· Automatic: Have the system reroute you to avoid traffic
incidents that develop and impact the current route (no
notification is provided).
· Manual: Have the system always provide a traffic alert
notification for traffic incidents along the planned route.
You have a choice to accept or ignore the notification
before the route deviation is made.
Choose areas which you want the system to avoid when
calculating a route for you. Press Add to select a category.
Avoid Areas
Once you make a selection, the system tries to avoid the
area(s) if possible for all routes. To delete a selection,
choose the listing on the screen; when the screen changes
to Avoid Areas Edit, press Delete at the bottom right of
the screen.
Map Mode
Press the green bar in the upper right area
of the touchscreen to view map mode. Map
mode shows advanced viewing comprised
of both 2D city maps as well as 3D
landmarks (when available).
2D city maps show detailed outlines of
buildings, visible land use and land
elements and detailed railway
infrastructure for the most essential cities
around the globe. These maps also contain
features such as town blocks, building
footprints, and railways.
398
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
objects which are typically recognizable
and have a certain tourist value. The 3D
landmarks appear in 3D map mode only.
E142641
Change the appearance of the map display
by repeatedly pressing the arrow button in
the upper left corner of the screen. It
toggles between three different map
modes: Heading up, North up, and 3D.
E142642
Heading up (2D map) always
shows the direction of forward
travel to be upward on the screen.
This view is available for map
scales up to 2.5 miles (4 kilometers). For
larger map scales, this setting is
remembered, but the map is shown in
North up only. If the scale returns below
this level, then Heading up is restored.
E142643
North up (2D map) always shows
the northern direction to be
upward on the screen.
E142644
3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
This viewing angle can be adjusted
and the map can be rotated 180
degrees by dragging your finger along the
shaded bar with arrows at the bottom of
the map.
E146188
Re-centering the map can be
done by pressing this icon
whenever you scroll the map
away from your vehicle's current location.
Auto Zoom
Press the green bar to access map mode,
then select the + or - zoom button to bring
up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the
touchscreen. When the Auto button is
pressed, Auto Zoom is turned on and Auto
is displayed in the bottom left corner of the
screen. The map zoom level then
synchronizes with vehicle speed. The
slower the vehicle is traveling, the farther
in the map is zoomed in; the faster the
vehicle is traveling, the farther the map is
zoomed out. To turn the feature off, just
press the + or - button again.
Map Icons
E142646
Vehicle mark shows the current
location of the vehicle. It stays in
the center of the map display,
except when in scroll mode.
E142647
Scroll cursor allows you to scroll
the map; the icon is fixed in the
center of the screen. The map
position closest to the cursor is in
a window on the top center part of the
screen.
E142648
Address book entry default
icon(s) indicates the location on
the map of an address book entry.
This is the default symbol shown
after the entry has been stored to the
Address Book by any method other than
the map. A different icon can be selected
from the 22 icons available; each icon can
be used more than once.
E142649
Home indicates the location on
the map currently stored as the
home position. Only one entry from
the Address Book can be saved as
Home. This icon cannot be changed.
399
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
E142650
POI (Point Of Interest) icons
can be displayed on the map and
can be turned on or off. There are
about 56 subcategories of POIs
that can be selected to be displayed on
the map one at a time.
E142651
Starting point indicates the
starting point of a planned route.
E142652
Waypoint indicates the location
of a waypoint on the map. The
number inside the circle is different
for each waypoint and represents
the position of the waypoint in the route
list.
E142653
Destination symbol indicates the
ending point of a planned route.
E142654
Next maneuver point indicates
the location of the next turn on the
planned route.
E142655
No GPS symbol indicates that
insufficient GPS satellite signals
are available for accurate map
positioning. This icon may be
intermittently displayed under normal
operation in an area with poor GPS access.
Quick-touch Buttons
When in map mode, touch anywhere on
the map display to access the following
options:
You CanWhen You Select
Select a scrolled location on the map as your destination.
(You may scroll the map by pressing your index finger on
the map display. When you reach the desired location,
simply let go and then press Set as Dest.)
Set as Dest
Set the current location as a waypoint.Set as Waypoint
Save the current location to your favorites.Save to Favorites
Select POI icons to be displayed on the map. Up to three
icons can be selected for display on the map at the same
time.
POI Icons On/Off
Cancel the active route.Cancel Route
Access these features when a route is active:View/Edit Route
· View route
· Edit destination/waypoints
· Edit turn list
· Detour
· Edit route preferences
· Edit traffic preferences
· Cancel route.
400
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
E142656
Rotate the map view by swiping your finger
across the shaded bar with the arrows.
Navteq is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
Navteq by going to
http://mapreporter.navteq.com. Navteq
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-800-NAVMAPS (in
Mexico, call 01-800-557-5539) or going
to www.navigation.com/ford. You need to
specify the make and model of your vehicle
to determine if there is an update available.
Navigation Voice Commands
E142599
When in navigation mode, press
the voice button on the steering
wheel controls. After the tone,
say any of the following commands:
Navigation System Voice Commands
"Navigation"3
"Cancel next waypoint" 1
"Repeat instruction"1
"Cancel route"1
"Show 3D"
"Destination"2
"Show heading up""Destination <nametag>"
"Show map""Destination <POI category>"
"Show north up""Destination favorites"
"Show route"1
"Destination home"
"Show turn list"1
"Destination intersection"
"Voice off""Destination nearest <POI category>"
"Voice on""Destination nearest POI"
"Voice volume decrease""Destination play nametags"
"Voice volume increase""Destination POI"
401
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
Navigation System Voice Commands
"Where am I?""Destination POI category"
"Zoom in""Destination previous destination"
"Zoom out""Destination street address"
"Help"
"Detour"1
1 These commands are only available when a navigation route is active.
2 If you say "Destination", you can then say any command in the following "Destination"
chart.
3 If you say "Navigation", you can then say any command in the following "Navigation"
chart.
"DESTINATION"
"<nametag>"
"<POI category>"
"Favorites"
"Home"
"Intersection"
"Nearest <POI category>"
"Nearest POI"
"Play nametags"
"POI category"
"Previous destination"
"Street address"
"Help"
402
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
"NAVIGATION"
"Destination"*
"Zoom city"
"Zoom country"
"Zoom minimum"
"Zoom maximum"
"Zoom province"
"Zoom state"
"Zoom street"
"Zoom to <distance>"
"Help"
* If you say "Destination", you can then say any command in the "Destination" chart.
One-shot Destination Street Address
If your vehicle is equipped with the SD card
navigation feature, you have the ability to
enter in a street address using a feature
called one-shot street address. When you
say either "Navigation destination street
address" or "Destination street address",
the system asks you to say the full address.
The system displays an example
on-screen. You can then speak the address
naturally, such as "One two three four Main
Street, Anytown".
403
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
Information Provided by:
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
SYNC® End User License
Agreement (EULA)
•You have acquired a device ("DEVICE")
that includes software licensed by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY from an
affiliate of Microsoft Corporation
("MS") . Those installed software
products of MS origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials,
and "online" or electronic
documentation ("MS SOFTWARE")
are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties.
The MS SOFTWARE is licensed, not
sold. All rights reserved.
•The MS SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY. The additional
software and systems of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials,
and "online" or electronic
documentation ("FORD SOFTWARE")
are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties.
The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not
sold. All rights reserved.
•The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD
SOFTWARE may interface with and/or
communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by third party
software and service suppliers. The
additional software and services of
third party origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation ("THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
•The MS SOFTWARE, FORD
SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively
and individually will be referred to as
"SOFTWARE".
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO
THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY
PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
•You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICE and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
404
Appendices
Information Provided by:
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
•Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process.
•Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, or disassemble nor permit
others to reverse engineer, decompile
or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation.
•Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation.
•Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
•SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICE, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
•Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or MS may terminate this EULA if you
fail to comply with the terms and
conditions of this EULA.
•Security Updates/Digital Rights
Management: Content owners use
the WMDRM technology included in
your DEVICE to protect their
intellectual property, included
copyrighted content. Portions of the
SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use
WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the
WMDRM software fails to protect the
content, content owners may ask
Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE's
ability to use WMDRM to play or copy
protected content. This action does
not affect unprotected content. When
your DEVICE downloads licenses for
protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list
with the licenses. Content owners may
require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE
on your DEVICE to access their content.
If you decline an upgrade, you will not
be able to access content that requires
the upgrade.
405
Appendices
Information Provided by:
•Consent to Use of Data: You agree
that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and systems suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may collect and use technical
information gathered in any manner as
part of product support services related
to the SOFTWARE or related services.
MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and services suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may use this information solely to
improve their products or to provide
customized services or technologies to
you. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and systems suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may disclose this information to others,
but not in a form that personally
identifies you.
•Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or
their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components
that you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICE.
•Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components").
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide or
make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms are
provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA
shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent make
available Supplemental Components, and
no other EULA terms are provided, then
the terms of this EULA shall apply, except
that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or
affiliate entity providing the Supplemental
Component(s) shall be the licensor of the
Supplemental Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you or
made available to you through the use of
the SOFTWARE.
406
Appendices
Information Provided by:
•Links to Third Party Sites: The MS
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites through
the use of the SOFTWARE. The third
party sites are not under the control of
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent. Neither MS nor Microsoft
Corporation nor their affiliates nor their
designated agent are responsible for
(i) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent.
•Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICE operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and assumes any risk associated with
the use of the DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD
ROM disk(s) or via web download or other
means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or
their affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content. All rights not
specifically granted under this EULA are
reserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service providers, their
affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments. For additional
information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
407
Appendices
Information Provided by:
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, third party software or service
providers, their affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support
for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS,
its parent corporation Microsoft
Corporation, or their affiliates or
subsidiaries. For product support, please
refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY
instructions provided in the documentation
for the DEVICE. Should you have any
questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR
COMPANY for any other reason, please
refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICE.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND
THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS,
MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR
THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY
AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO
HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.
$250.00).
•THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER
THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY
BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
End User Notice
Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for
Automotive Important Safety
Information
This system Ford SYNC™ contains
software that is licensed to Manufacturer
FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate
of Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a
license agreement. Any removal,
reproduction, reverse engineering or other
unauthorized use of the software from this
system in violation of the license
agreement is strictly prohibited and may
subject you to legal action.
Read and follow instructions: Before
using your Windows Automotive- based
system, read and follow all instructions
and safety information provided in this end
user manual ("User's Guide"). Not
following precautions found in this User's
Guide can lead to an accident or other
serious consequences.
Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When kept
in the vehicle, the User's Guide will be a
ready reference for you and other users
unfamiliar with the Windows
Automotive-based system. Please make
certain that before using the system for
the first time, all persons have access to
the User's Guide and read its instructions
and safety information carefully.
408
Appendices
Information Provided by:
WARNING
Operating certain parts of this
system while driving can distract
your attention away from the road,
and possibly cause an accident or other
serious consequences. Do not change
system settings or enter data non-verbally
(using your hands) while driving. Stop the
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations. This is
important since while setting up or
changing some functions you might be
required to distract your attention away
from the road and remove your hands from
the wheel.
General Operation
Voice Command Control: Functions
within the Windows Automotive-based
system may be accomplished using only
voice commands. Using voice commands
while driving allows you to operate the
system without removing your hands from
the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a prolonged
view of the screen while you are driving.
Pull over in a safe and legal manner before
attempting to access a function of the
system requiring prolonged attention. Even
occasional short scans to the screen may
be hazardous if your attention has been
diverted away from your driving task at a
critical time.
Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic and
emergency signals while driving. Driving
while unable to hear these sounds could
cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions:
Speech recognition software is inherently
a statistical process which is subject to
errors. It is your responsibility to monitor
any speech recognition functions included
in the system and address any errors.
Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual (non-verbal)
setup. Attempting to perform such set-up
or insert data while driving can seriously
distract your attention and could cause an
accident or other serious consequences.
Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner
before attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions based
on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Any such
feature is not a substitute for your personal
judgment. Any route suggestions made by
this system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
placed in an unsafe situation, or if you
would be directed into an area that you
consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately
responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle and therefore, must evaluate
whether it is safe to follow the suggested
directions.
409
Appendices
Information Provided by:
Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used
by this system may be inaccurate because
of changes in roads, traffic controls or
driving conditions. Always use good
judgment and common sense when
following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the system
to route you to emergency services. Ask
local authorities or an emergency services
operator for these locations. Not all
emergency services such as police, fire
stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to
be contained in the map database for such
navigation features.
TeleNav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the TeleNav Software: (a) observe
all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c)
do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d)
do not use the TeleNav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
410
Appendices
Information Provided by:
3. Software License
Subject to your compliance with the terms
of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby grants
to you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software license), without the
right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate upon
any termination or expiration of this
Agreement. You agree that you will use the
TeleNav Software only for your personal
business or leisure purposes, and not to
provide commercial navigation services to
other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
You agree not to do any of the following:
(a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or
otherwise change the TeleNav Software
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive
the source code, audio library or structure
of the TeleNav Software without the prior
express written consent of TeleNav; (c)
remove from the TeleNav Software, or
alter, any of TeleNav's or its suppliers'
trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or
copyright notices, or other notices or
markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or
otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software
to others, except as part of your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software; or (e)
use the TeleNav Software in any manner
that (i) infringes the intellectual property
or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party, (ii)
violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is harmful,
threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous,
defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or
otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent
out, or otherwise permit unauthorized
access by third parties to the TeleNav
Software without advanced written
permission of TeleNav.
411
Appendices
Information Provided by:
4. Disclaimers
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
to applicable law, in no event will TeleNav,
its licensors and suppliers, or agents or
employees of any of the foregoing, be
liable for any decision made or action
taken by you or anyone else in reliance on
the information provided by the TeleNav
Software. TeleNav also does not warrant
the accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data may
not always reflect reality due to, among
other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing
conditions. You are responsible for the
entire risk arising out of your use of the
TeleNav Software. For example but
without limitation, you agree not to rely on
the TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the well-being
or survival of you or others is dependent
on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps
or functionality of the TeleNav Software
are not intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR
TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not
permit the disclaimer of certain warranties,
so this limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY
FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN
EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE
THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA,
LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS,
LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION
OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
412
Appendices
Information Provided by:
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to this
Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall
be settled by independent arbitration
involving a neutral arbitrator and
administered by the American Arbitration
Association in the County of Santa Clara,
California. The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and the
judgment upon the award rendered by the
arbitrator may be entered by any court
having jurisdiction. Note that there is no
judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding
and the decision of the arbitrator shall be
binding upon both parties. You expressly
agree to waive your right to a jury trial.
This Agreement and performance
hereunder will be governed by and
construed in accordance with the laws of
the State of California, without giving
effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To
the extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both TeleNav and you agree to submit to
the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of
the County of Santa Clara, California. The
United Nations Convention on Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods shall
not apply.
7. Assignment
You may not resell, assign, or transfer this
Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound
by the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or
transfer that is not expressly permitted
under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to TeleNav, in which case
you and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, TeleNav
may assign this Agreement to any other
party at any time without notice, provided
the assignee remains bound by this
Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement
413
Appendices
Information Provided by:
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you
consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party's right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
"without limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
The TeleNav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to TeleNav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement includes
end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this
Agreement), and thus your use of the
TeleNav Software is also subject to such
terms. You agree to comply with the
following additional terms and conditions,
which are applicable to TeleNav's third
party vendor licensors:
NavTeq End User License Agreement
END USER TERMS
The content provided ("Data") is licensed,
not sold. By opening this package, or
installing, copying, or otherwise using the
Data, you agree to be bound by the terms
of this agreement. If you do not agree to
the terms of this agreement, you are not
permitted to install, copy, use, resell or
transfer the Data. If you wish to reject the
terms of this agreement, and have not
installed, copied, or used the Data, you
must contact your retailer or NAVTEQ
North America, LLC ("NT") within thirty
(30) days of purchase for a refund of your
purchase price. To contact NT, please visit
www.navteq.com.
The Data is provided for your personal,
internal use only and may not be resold. It
is protected by copyright, and is subject to
the following terms (this "End User License
Agreement") and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
NAVTEQ North America, LLC ("NT") and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®.
414
Appendices
Information Provided by:
NT holds a nonexclusive license from the
United States Postal Service ® to publish
and sell ZIP+4 ® information.
© United States Postal Service ® 2009.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service ® The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4.
The Data for Mexico includes certain Data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
License Limitations on Use: You agree
that your license to use this Data is limited
to and conditioned on use for solely
personal, noncommercial purposes, and
not for service bureau, timesharing or other
similar purposes. Except as otherwise set
forth herein, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
except to the extent permitted by
mandatory laws.
License Limitations on Transfer: Your
limited license does not allow transfer or
resale of the Data, except on the condition
that you may transfer the Data and all
accompanying materials on a permanent
basis if: (a) you retain no copies of the
Data; (b) the recipient agrees to the terms
of this End User License Agreement; and
(c) you transfer the Data in the exact same
form as you purchased it by physically
transferring the original media (e.g., the
CD-ROM or DVD you purchased), all
original packaging, all Manuals and other
documentation. Specifically, Multi-disc
sets may only be transferred or sold as a
complete set as provided to you and not
as a subset thereof.
Additional License Limitations: Except
where you have been specifically licensed
to do so by NT in a separate written
agreement, and without limiting the
preceding paragraph, your license is
conditioned on use of the Data as
prescribed in this agreement, and you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with, or in communication with, including
without limitation, cellular phones,
palmtop and handheld computers, pagers,
and personal digital assistants or PDAs.
WARNING
This Data may contain inaccurate or
incomplete information due to the
passage of time, changing
circumstances, sources used and the
nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic Data, any of which may lead
to incorrect results.
No Warranty: This Data is provided to you
"as is" , and you agree to use it at your own
risk. NT and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
guarantees, representations or warranties
of any kind, express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, content, quality, accuracy,
completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
use or results to be obtained from this
Data, or that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error free.
415
Appendices
Information Provided by:
Disclaimer of Warranty: NT AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: NT AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THIS DATA; OR FOR ANY
LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS
OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THIS DATA, ANY DEFECT IN THIS
DATA, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS
OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR
BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF NT OR
ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Some States, Territories and Countries do
not allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control: You agree not to export
from anywhere any part of the Data or any
direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations,
including but not limited to the laws, rules
and regulations administered by the Office
of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S.
Department of Commerce and the Bureau
of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent
that any such export laws, rules or
regulations prohibit NT from complying
with any of its obligations hereunder to
deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall
be excused and shall not constitute a
breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement: These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between NT (and its licensors, including
their licensors and suppliers) and you
pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
and supersedes in their entirety any and
all written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
Severability: You and NT agree that if any
portion of this agreement is found illegal
or unenforceable, that portion shall be
severed and the remainder of the
Agreement shall be given full force and
effect.
Governing Law: The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws
of the State of Illinois, without giving effect
to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii)
the United Nations Convention for
Contracts for the International Sale of
Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You
agree to submit to the personal jurisdiction
of the State of Illinois for any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder.
416
Appendices
Information Provided by:
Government End Users: If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the
United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
"commercial term" as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. ("FAR") 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with this End User License
Agreement, and each copy of Data
delivered or otherwise furnished shall be
marked and embedded as appropriate
with the following "Notice of Use", and be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR
(MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)
NAME:
NAVTEQ
CONTRACTOR
(MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)
ADDRESS:
425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL
60606.
This Data is a commercial item as defined
in FAR 2.101
and is subject to the End User License
Agreement under
which this Data was provided.
© 2011 NAVTEQ. All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify NAVTEQ prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
Wi-Fi hotspot data provided by JiWire, ©
2013 JiWire.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007
Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright
© 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and
service may practice one or more of the
following U.S. Patents #5,987,525,
#6,061,680, #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6.240,459,
#6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device.
This device may contain content belonging
to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote.
417
Appendices
Information Provided by:
You agree that you will use the content
from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") ,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers for your own
personal, non-commercial use only. You
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote
Data (except in a Tag associated with a
music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE
NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote,
respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content,
including all ownership rights. Under no
circumstances will either Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for
any information that you provide, including
any copyrighted material or music file
information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights,
collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER.
© Gracenote 2007.
418
Appendices
Information Provided by:
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2
IC: 1422A-SYNCG2
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC" before the radio
certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
419
Appendices
Information Provided by:
General Maintenance Information
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may also
help to increase the value of your vehicle
when you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts
for completed maintenance with your
vehicle.
Regular maintenance intervals for your
vehicle have been established based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost
of owning the vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to see that all
scheduled maintenance is performed and
that the materials used meet the
specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 286).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide 12
month or 12000 mile (20000 kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
it is imperative that scheduled
maintenance be completed at the
designated intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor® system which
displays a message in the information
display at the proper oil change service
interval. This interval may be up to one year
or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers).
420
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
When ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL
CHANGE REQUIRED appears in the
information display, it is time for an oil
change. The oil change must be done
within two weeks or 500 miles (800
kilometers) of the ENGINE OIL CHANGE
DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
appearing. The Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor®
must be reset after each oil change. See
Engine Oil Check (page 243).
If your information display is prematurely
reset or becomes inoperative, you should
perform the oil change interval at six
months or 5000 miles (8000 kilometers)
from your last oil change. Never exceed
one year or 10000 miles (16000
kilometers) between oil change intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts
and component systems based upon
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company
relies upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
Ford strongly recommends the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft® or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts because they are
engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
Recommended additives and chemicals
are listed in this owner's manual and in the
Ford Workshop Manual. Additional
chemicals or additives not approved by
Ford Motor Company are not
recommended as part of normal
maintenance. Please consult your warranty
information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, discolored fluids that
also show signs of overheating or foreign
material contamination should be
inspected immediately by a qualified
expert, such as the factory-trained
technicians at your dealership.
Your vehicle’s oils and fluids should be
changed at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Certain basic maintenance checks and
inspections should be performed every
month or at six month intervals.
Check Every Month
•Engine oil level.
•Function of all interior and exterior
lights.
•Tires (including spare) for wear and
proper pressure.
•Windshield washer fluid level.
421
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Check Every Six Months
•Battery connections. Clean if
necessary.
•Body and door drain holes for
obstructions. Clean if necessary.
•Cooling system fluid level and coolant
strength.
•Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate
if necessary.
•Hinges, latches and outside locks for
proper operation. Lubricate if
necessary.
•Parking brake for proper operation.
•Safety belts and seat latches for wear
and function.
•Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS,
airbag and safety belt) for operation.
•Washer spray and wiper operation.
Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend the following
multi-point inspection be performed at
every scheduled maintenance interval to
help ensure your vehicle keeps running
great.
Multi-point Inspection
Half-shaft dust bootsAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hosesClutch operation (if equipped)
Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Engine air filter
Steering and linkageExhaust system
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper
pressure**
Exterior lamps and hazard warning system
operation
Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
Fluid levels*; fill if necessary
Washer spray and wiper operationFor oil and fluid leaks
* Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
**If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
422
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. It is your checklist that gives
you immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle. You know what
has been checked, what is okay as well as
those things that may require future or
immediate attention. The multi-point
vehicle inspection is one more way to keep
your vehicle running great.
Normal Scheduled Maintenance
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor®
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when the
engine oil needs to be changed based on
how your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.
This means you do not have to remember
to change the oil on a mileage-based
schedule; the vehicle lets you know when
an oil change is due by displaying ENGINE
OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED in the information display.
The following table is intended to provide
examples of vehicle use and its impact on
engine oil change intervals. It is provided
as a guideline only. Actual engine oil
change intervals depends on several
factors and generally decrease with
severity of use.
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
Vehicle use and exampleMiles (kilometers)
Normal
7500-10000
(12000-16000)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5000-7499
(8000-11999)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3000-4999
(4000-7999) Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
423
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display*
Change engine oil and filter.**
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the cabin air filter.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings (AWD
vehicles).
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-
joints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings (AWD vehicles).
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
* Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
** Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change. See Engine
Oil Check (page 243).
Additional Maintenance Items1
Replace cabin air filter.Every 20000 miles (32000
km)
Replace engine air filter.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change engine coolant.2
At 100000 miles (160000
km)
Replace spark plugs.Every 100000 miles
(160000 km)
424
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Additional Maintenance Items1
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).3
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km) Replace accessory drive belt(s).4
Replace timing belt (1.6L engine).
1 Additional maintenance items can be performed within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers)
of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the
interval.
2 Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three
years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
4 If not replaced within the last 100000 miles (160000 kilometers).
Maintenance Schedule Log
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
425
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
426
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
427
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
428
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
Special Operating Conditions
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform additional maintenance as
indicated. If you operate your vehicle
occasionally under any of these
conditions, it is not necessary to perform
the additional maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
429
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Perform the services shown in the
following tables when specified or within
3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the OIL
CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing
in the information display.
•Example 1: The OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message comes on at 28751
miles (46270 kilometers); perform the
30000 mile (48000 kilometer)
automatic transmission fluid
replacement.
•Example 2: The OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message has not come on,
but the odometer reads 30000 miles
(48000 kilometers); perform the
engine air filter replacement. (i.e.,
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor® was reset
at 25000 miles [40000 kilometers].)
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use
(i.e. Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery)
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
· Replace cabin air filter (if equipped).Inspect frequently, service
as required · Replace engine air filter.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads
· Replace cabin air filter (if equipped).Inspect frequently, service
as required
430
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads
· Replace engine air filter.
· Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5000 miles (8000
km)
· Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
· Change engine oil and filter.Every 5000 miles (8000
km) or six months · Perform multi-point inspection.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change. See Engine
Oil Check (page 243).
Exclusive Use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles only)
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
Every oil change
Special Operating Condition Log
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
431
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
432
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
Exceptions
There are some exceptions your Normal
Scheduled Maintenance:
California fuel filter replacement: If the
vehicle is registered in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item will not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
prior to the completion of the vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
433
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
Hot climate oil change intervals:
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
oil change interval is 5000 miles (8000
kilometers).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change service
interval is 3000 miles (4800 kilometers).
Engine air filter and cabin air filter
replacement: Engine air filter and cabin
air filter life is dependent on exposure to
dusty and dirty conditions. Vehicles
operated in these conditions require
frequent inspection and replacement of
the engine air filter and cabin air filter.
Engine Coolant Change Record
Initial change: Six years or 100000 miles
(160000 kilometers) (whichever comes
first).
After initial change: Every three years or
50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
Engine Coolant Change Log
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
434
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
435
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
436
Scheduled Maintenance
Information Provided by:
A
A/C
See: Climate Control..........................................118
About This Manual...........................................7
Protecting the Environment................................7
ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................168
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................168
Accessories....................................................293
Exterior style........................................................293
Interior style.........................................................293
Lifestyle.................................................................293
Peace of mind.....................................................293
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation.............................................11
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............184
Active Park Assist..........................................176
Automatic Steering into Parking
Space..................................................................177
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature..........178
Troubleshooting the System..........................178
Using Active Park Assist...................................176
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................251
Horizontal Aim Adjustment...........................252
Vertical Aim Adjustment..................................251
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................62
Airbag Disposal...............................................42
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control..........................................118
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm.........................................61
All-Wheel Drive.............................................163
Anti-Theft Alarm.............................................61
Arming the Alarm..................................................61
Disarming the Alarm............................................61
Appendices...................................................404
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............82
Headlamps On Warning Chime......................82
Key in Ignition Warning Chime........................82
Keyless Warning Alert.........................................82
Parking Brake On Warning Chime..................82
Audio Control...................................................62
MEDIA.......................................................................62
Seek, Next or Previous........................................62
Audio System................................................106
General Information..........................................106
Audio unit - Vehicles With:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC/Satellite
Radio..............................................................107
Audio unit - Vehicles With: Premium
AM/FM/CD..................................................109
Audio unit - Vehicles With: Sony
AM/FM/CD....................................................110
Menu Structure......................................................111
Autolamps........................................................67
Automatic Climate Control.......................119
Automatic High Beam Control.................69
Activating the system.........................................69
Manually overriding the system......................70
Automatic Transmission...........................158
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning..............................................................161
Brake-Shift Interlock.........................................160
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow...................................................................161
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission...................................................159
Understanding the Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission.............................158
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check.............................................................247
Autowipers.......................................................65
Auxiliary Input Jack.......................................114
Auxiliary Power Points...............................140
110 Volt AC Power Point...................................140
12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................140
Locations...............................................................140
AWD
See: All-Wheel Drive.........................................163
B
Blind Spot Monitor.......................................196
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS®)
with Cross Traffic Alert................................196
Booster Seats....................................................17
Types of Booster Seats.......................................18
Brake Fluid Check.........................................247
437
Index
Information Provided by:
Brakes...............................................................168
General Information..........................................168
Breaking-In......................................................216
Bulb Specification Chart...........................253
C
Cabin Air Filter................................................127
California Proposition 65..............................11
Capacities and Specifications...............286
Technical Specifications................................290
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................255
Center Console..............................................142
Changing a Bulb...........................................252
Lamp Assembly Condensation....................252
Replacing a Reverse Lamp Bulb..................252
Replacing the Headlamp Bulbs...................252
Replacing the License Plate Lamp
Bulb....................................................................253
Replacing the Tail, Brake, High-Mount
Brake Lamp, and Turn Signal Lamp
Bulbs..................................................................252
Changing a Fuse...........................................229
Fuses......................................................................229
Changing a Road Wheel...........................280
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information......................................................281
Stowing the flat tire..........................................284
Tire Change Procedure....................................282
Changing the 12V Battery.........................248
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 2.5L/1.6L
EcoBoost®/2.0L EcoBoost®...............250
..................................................................................250
1.6L and 2.0L EcoBoost Engines..................250
2.5L Engine...........................................................250
Changing the Wiper Blades.....................249
Checking MyKey System Status..............50
Checking the Wiper Blades.....................249
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance.................................................32
Child Safety.......................................................14
General Information.............................................14
Child Safety Locks..........................................25
Left-Hand Side......................................................25
Right-Hand Side...................................................25
Child Seat Positioning...................................16
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................258
Cleaning Products.......................................255
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................259
Cleaning the Engine....................................256
Cleaning the Exterior..................................255
Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts.....................256
Exterior Chrome.................................................255
Underbody...........................................................256
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens........................258
Cleaning the Interior....................................257
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades............................................................257
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................50
Climate.............................................................391
Climate Control Voice Commands.............393
Climate Control..............................................118
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check - 2.5L/1.6L
EcoBoost®/2.0L EcoBoost®...................244
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.........41
Creating a MyKey...........................................49
Programming/Changing Optional
Settings...............................................................50
Cruise Control..................................................63
Principle of Operation.......................................183
Type 1........................................................................63
Type 2.......................................................................63
Cruise Control
See: Using Cruise Control................................183
Customer Assistance..................................219
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Event Data Recording...........................................9
Service Data Recording........................................9
Daytime Running Lamps............................68
Direction Indicators.......................................70
Driver Alert......................................................190
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM....................191
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION...........................190
USING DRIVER ALERT.....................................190
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................35
Children and Airbags..........................................36
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment........................................................35
Driving Aids.....................................................190
Driving Hints...................................................216
438
Index
Information Provided by:
Driving Through Water................................216
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps........................68
E
Economical Driving......................................216
Electric Parking Brake.................................169
Applying the electric parking brake.............169
Applying the electric parking brake when
the vehicle is moving....................................169
Battery With No Charge.....................................171
Parking on a hill (vehicles with a manual
transmission) .................................................169
Releasing the electric parking brake............170
Emission Control System..........................154
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)....................155
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) Testing...................................................156
End User License Agreement.................404
SYNC® End User License Agreement
(EULA).............................................................404
Engine Block Heater....................................146
Using the Engine Block Heater.......................147
Engine Coolant Check - 2.5L/1.6L
EcoBoost®/2.0L EcoBoost®...............244
Adding Engine Coolant....................................245
Checking the Engine Coolant........................244
Recycled Engine Coolant................................246
Severe Climates.................................................246
What you Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling..............................................................246
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................59
Engine Oil Check - 2.5L/1.6L
EcoBoost®/2.0L EcoBoost®...............243
Adding Engine Oil..............................................243
Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring
System..............................................................244
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L
EcoBoost®..................................................243
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.5L/2.0L
EcoBoost®..................................................243
Engine Specifications................................286
Drivebelt Routing...............................................286
Entertainment..............................................356
A/V Inputs.............................................................375
AM/FM Radio.......................................................357
Bluetooth Audio..................................................373
Browsing Device Content...............................356
CD............................................................................368
SD Card Slot and USB Port............................370
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)........................................................363
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information.................................373
EPB
See: Electric Parking Brake.............................169
Essential Towing Checks...........................212
Before Towing a Trailer.....................................213
Hitches....................................................................212
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC).........................................213
Safety Chains.......................................................212
Trailer Brakes........................................................212
Trailer Lamps........................................................212
When Towing a Trailer.......................................213
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Export Unique Options..................................13
Exterior Mirrors.................................................73
Auto-Dimming Feature......................................73
Blind Spot Monitor...............................................74
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors................................73
Heated Exterior Mirrors.......................................73
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors...........................74
Memory Mirrors.....................................................73
Power Exterior Mirrors.........................................73
Signal Indicator Mirrors......................................74
F
Fastening the Safety Belts..........................27
Restraint of Pregnant Women.........................27
Safety Belt Extension Assembly....................29
Safety Belt Locking Modes...............................28
Floor Mats........................................................217
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps........................................70
Ford Credit..........................................................11
(U.S. Only).................................................................11
439
Index
Information Provided by:
Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP).......295
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)............296
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. only)..........................295
Front Fog Lamps............................................70
Front Passenger Sensing System............36
Fuel and Refueling.......................................150
Fuel Consumption........................................154
Calculating Fuel Economy..............................154
Filling the Tank....................................................154
Fuel Cut-Off Switch....................................226
Fuel Filter........................................................248
Fuel Quality......................................................151
Choosing the Right Fuel....................................151
Octane Recommendations.............................151
Fuses................................................................229
Fuse Specification Chart..........................229
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel..................................................................236
Power Distribution Box....................................229
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener...........136
Gauges................................................................77
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............78
Fuel Gauge..............................................................78
Information Display..............................................77
Left Information Display....................................79
Type 1 and 2.............................................................77
Type 3.......................................................................78
Gearbox
See: Transmission...............................................157
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................43
Intelligent Access.................................................43
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada..........................................................222
Getting the Services You Need................219
Away From Home...............................................219
H
Hazard Warning Flashers..........................226
Headlamp Exit Delay....................................68
Head Restraints.............................................129
Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................130
Tilting Head Restraints ....................................130
Heated Seats..................................................134
Heated Windows and Mirrors..................126
Heated Exterior Mirror.......................................127
Heated Rear Window........................................126
Heating
See: Climate Control..........................................118
Hill Start Assist...............................................161
Using Hill Start Assist.......................................162
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................124
Cooling the Interior Quickly.............................125
General Hints........................................................124
Heating the Interior Quickly............................125
Recommended Settings for Cooling ..........126
Recommended Settings for Heating...........125
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather.............................................................126
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................168
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........239
I
Ignition Switch...............................................143
In California (U.S. Only)............................220
Information Display Control.......................63
Cluster Display Control Features...................64
Information Displays.....................................83
General Information............................................83
Information....................................................382
911 Assist®...........................................................389
Alerts......................................................................388
Calendar...............................................................388
SIRIUS Travel Link.............................................386
SYNC Services (If Equipped, U.S.
Only)..................................................................382
Vehicle Health Report.....................................390
440
Index
Information Provided by:
Information Messages..................................91
Active Park..............................................................92
Adaptive Cruise Control.....................................92
AdvanceTrac®.......................................................93
Airbag.......................................................................93
Alarm........................................................................93
Automatic Engine Shutdown..........................94
Auto Start-Stop....................................................93
AWD..........................................................................95
Battery and Charging System.........................95
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert System.....................................................96
Collision Warning System.................................96
Doors and Locks...................................................97
Driver Alert..............................................................97
Engine.......................................................................97
Fuel............................................................................98
Hill Start Assist.....................................................98
Keys and Intelligent Access.............................98
Lane Keeping System........................................99
Maintenance........................................................100
MyKey.....................................................................100
Park Aid...................................................................101
Park Brake.............................................................102
Power Steering....................................................103
Remote Start.......................................................103
Starting System .................................................103
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.................104
Traction Control..................................................104
Transmission........................................................104
Installing Child Seats.....................................19
Child Seats...............................................................19
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts.........................20
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)............................................22
Using Tether Straps.............................................24
Instrument Cluster.........................................77
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................68
Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps.....................68
Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps..............68
Interior Lamps.................................................70
Front Interior Lamp..............................................70
Rear Interior Lamp.................................................71
Interior Luggage Compartment
Release...........................................................58
Interior Mirror....................................................74
Auto-Dimming Mirror..........................................75
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump-Starting the Vehicle.......................226
Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................227
Jump Starting......................................................227
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................226
Removing the Jumper Cables........................227
K
Keyless Entry....................................................55
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD...............................................................55
Keyless Starting............................................143
Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................145
Fast Restart..........................................................145
Starting Your Vehicle.........................................144
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving...............................................................144
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary.........................................................144
Switching the Ignition On (Accessory
Mode)................................................................144
Keys and Remote Controls.........................43
Knee Airbag......................................................36
L
Lane Keeping System.................................193
Switching the System On and Off...............193
Lighting Control...............................................67
Headlamp Flasher................................................67
High Beams............................................................67
Lighting...............................................................67
Load Carrying................................................202
Load Limit.......................................................202
Vehicle loading - with and without a
trailer.................................................................202
441
Index
Information Provided by:
Locking and Unlocking.................................52
Activating Intelligent Access ...........................53
Autolock Feature .................................................54
Auto Relock............................................................54
Battery Saver.........................................................55
Illuminated Entry..................................................54
Illuminated Exit.....................................................55
Luggage Compartment.....................................55
Power Door Locks................................................52
Remote Control.....................................................52
Smart Unlocks For Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter........................................................53
Smart Unlocks For Intelligent Access Keys
................................................................................53
Locks...................................................................52
M
Maintenance.................................................239
General Information.........................................239
Manual Climate Control.............................118
Manual Seats..................................................131
Manual Transmission..................................157
Parking Your Vehicle..........................................158
Recommended Shift Speeds.........................157
Reverse....................................................................157
Using the Clutch..................................................157
Media Hub........................................................115
Memory Function..........................................132
Easy Entry and Exit Function..........................133
Linking a Pre-Set Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key.............133
Saving a Pre-Set Position................................133
Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................83
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors..............126
See: Windows and Mirrors.................................72
Mobile Communications Equipment.......12
Moonroof...........................................................75
Bounce-Back..........................................................76
Opening and Closing the Moonroof..............76
Venting the Moonroof.........................................76
Motorcraft Parts..........................................286
MyFord Touch®............................................335
General Information.........................................335
MyKey®..............................................................49
Principle of Operation........................................49
MyKey Troubleshooting................................51
N
Navigation......................................................395
cityseekr................................................................397
Map Mode............................................................398
Navigation Map Updates................................401
Navigation Voice Commands........................401
Point of Interest (POI) Categories..............396
Quick-touch Buttons.......................................400
Setting a Destination.......................................395
Setting Your Navigation Preferences..........397
O
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check - 2.5L/1.6L
EcoBoost®/2.0L EcoBoost®...................243
Opening and Closing the Hood..............239
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature......................................................223
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..........223
Overhead Console........................................142
P
Parking Aid.......................................................174
Front Sensing System.......................................175
Rear Sensing System.........................................174
Parking Aids.....................................................174
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................59
SecuriLock®...........................................................59
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................59
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Personal Safety System™..........................33
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?...................................................................33
Phone...............................................................376
Making Calls.........................................................377
Pairing Subsequent Phones...........................377
Pairing Your Phone for the First Time.........376
Phone Menu Options........................................377
Phone Settings..................................................380
Receiving Calls.....................................................377
Text Messaging...................................................378
442
Index
Information Provided by:
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................52
Power Seats.....................................................131
Power Lumbar......................................................132
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................247
Power Windows..............................................72
Accessory Delay....................................................73
Bounce-Back..........................................................72
Global Opening and Closing.............................72
One-Touch Down.................................................72
One-Touch Up.......................................................72
Window Lock..........................................................73
R
Rear Seat Armrest........................................135
Rear Seats.......................................................134
Rear View Camera........................................179
Using the Rear View Camera System........180
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera....................................179
Recommended Towing Weights............210
Refueling...........................................................151
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System................152
Remote Control..............................................43
Car Finder................................................................47
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters .................43
Intelligent Access Key........................................44
Remote Start .........................................................47
Replacing the Battery.........................................45
Sounding a Panic Alarm....................................47
Using the Key Blade............................................44
Remote Start..................................................127
Automatic Settings............................................127
Heated and Cooled Devices...........................128
Last Settings........................................................128
Removing a Headlamp..............................252
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............256
Replacement Parts
Recommendation.........................................11
Collision Repairs.....................................................11
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs...................................................................11
Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................48
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................224
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)..............................................................223
Roadside Assistance..................................225
Vehicles Sold In Canada : Getting Roadside
Assistance.......................................................225
Vehicles Sold In Canada : Using Roadside
Assistance.......................................................225
Vehicles Sold In The U.S.: Getting Roadside
Assistance.......................................................225
Vehicles Sold In The U.S. : Using Roadside
Assistance.......................................................225
Roadside Emergencies..............................225
Running Out of Fuel.....................................152
Refilling With a Portable Fuel
Container..........................................................153
S
Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................29
Safety Belt Minder.........................................30
Belt-Minder®.........................................................30
Safety Belts......................................................26
Principle of Operation........................................26
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................30
Conditions of operation.....................................30
Safety Precautions......................................150
Satellite Radio................................................115
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)..................................................................116
Satellite Radio Reception Factors.................115
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service....................116
Troubleshooting...................................................116
Scheduled Maintenance..........................420
Engine Coolant Change Record...................434
Exceptions............................................................433
General Maintenance Information.............420
Normal Scheduled Maintenance.................423
Special Operating Conditions......................429
Seats.................................................................129
Security..............................................................59
Settings............................................................347
Clock.......................................................................347
Display....................................................................347
Settings.................................................................349
Sound....................................................................348
Vehicle...................................................................348
Side Airbags.....................................................39
443
Index
Information Provided by:
Side Curtain Airbags.....................................40
Sitting in the Correct Position..................129
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains.................................280
Special Notices................................................12
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12
Special Instructions..............................................12
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control............................................183
Stability Control.............................................173
Principle of Operation.......................................173
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch...........................................143
Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................145
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes...............146
Important Ventilating Information..............146
Starting and Stopping the Engine..........143
General Information..........................................143
Start-Stop.......................................................148
Disabling Auto StartStop................................149
Enabling Auto StartStop.................................148
Steering............................................................201
Electric Power Steering....................................201
Steering Wheel...............................................62
Storage Compartments.............................142
Sun Visors..........................................................75
Illuminated Vanity Mirror....................................75
Supplementary Restraints System.........34
Principle of Operation........................................34
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
SYNC® Applications and Services........314
911 Assist................................................................314
SYNC AppLink....................................................320
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions &
Information (TDI)...........................................317
Vehicle Health Report.......................................316
SYNC®............................................................298
General Information.........................................298
SYNC® Troubleshooting..........................328
T
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications............286
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)........................221
Tire Care..........................................................265
Glossary of Tire Terminology........................266
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................................265
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall............................................................267
Temperature A B C............................................266
Traction AA A B C..............................................266
Treadwear............................................................266
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........262
Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.......................................263
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System ......................................263
Tire Pressures
See: Technical Specifications.......................284
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires.....................................262
Towing a Trailer.............................................210
Load Placement.................................................210
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels...........................................................214
Emergency Towing.............................................214
Recreational Towing..........................................214
Towing..............................................................210
Traction Control.............................................172
Principle of Operation........................................172
Transmission Code Designation............289
Transmission...................................................157
Transporting the Vehicle............................214
U
Under Hood Overview - 1.6L
EcoBoost®..................................................240
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
EcoBoost®...................................................241
Under Hood Overview - 2.5L...................242
Unique Driving Characteristics................148
Universal Garage Door Opener...............136
HomeLink® Wireless Control System........136
USB Port...........................................................114
444
Index
Information Provided by:
Using Adaptive Cruise Control................184
Blocked Sensor...................................................188
Changing the Set Speed..................................187
Detection Issues..................................................187
Disengaging the System..................................186
Following a Vehicle............................................185
Hilly Condition Usage........................................187
Low Speed Automatic Cancellation............187
Overriding the System......................................186
Resuming the Set Speed.................................187
Setting a Speed..................................................184
Setting the Gap Distance................................185
Switching the System Off................................187
Switching the System On................................184
Switching to Normal Cruise Control...........189
System Not Available.......................................188
Using All-Wheel Drive.................................163
Driving In Special Conditions With
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)...............................163
Using Cruise Control....................................183
Switching Cruise Control Off.........................183
Switching Cruise Control On..........................183
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................50
Using Snow Chains....................................280
Using Stability Control................................173
AdvanceTrac® .....................................................173
Using SYNC® With Your Media
Player..............................................................321
Accessing Your Play Menu..............................325
Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the
USB Port............................................................321
Media Menu Features.......................................323
Media Voice Commands..................................321
System Settings.................................................326
What's Playing?..................................................321
Using SYNC® With Your Phone.............302
Accessing Features through the Phone
Menu..................................................................307
Accessing Your Phone Settings....................310
Making Calls........................................................305
Pairing a Phone for the First Time...............302
Pairing Subsequent Phones..........................303
Phone Options during an Active Call.........305
Phone Voice Commands................................303
Receiving Calls...................................................305
System Settings...................................................311
Text Messaging..................................................308
Using Traction Control................................172
System Indicator Lights and
Messages...........................................................172
Using Voice Recognition..........................300
Helpful Hints.......................................................300
Initiating a Voice Session...............................300
System Interaction and Feedback...............301
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)..........................221
V
Vehicle Care...................................................255
General Information.........................................255
Vehicle Certification Label.......................288
Vehicle Identification Number...............288
Vehicle Storage............................................259
Battery...................................................................260
Body.......................................................................260
Brakes....................................................................260
Cooling system...................................................260
Engine....................................................................260
Fuel system.........................................................260
General..................................................................259
Miscellaneous.....................................................260
Removing Vehicle From Storage..................261
Tires........................................................................260
Ventilation
See: Climate Control..........................................118
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number............288
Voice Control...................................................63
445
Index
Information Provided by:
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators.................79
Adaptive Cruise Control.....................................79
Anti-Lock Braking System.................................79
Auto Start-stop.....................................................79
Battery......................................................................79
Blind Spot Monitor...............................................79
Brake System.........................................................79
Cruise Control.......................................................80
Direction Indicator...............................................80
Door Ajar.................................................................80
Electric Park Brake..............................................80
Engine Coolant Temperature..........................80
Engine Oil................................................................80
Fasten Safety Belt...............................................80
Front Airbag...........................................................80
Front Fog Lamps..................................................80
Heads Up Display..................................................81
High Beam...............................................................81
Lane Keeping Aid..................................................81
Low Fuel Level........................................................81
Low Tire Pressure Warning................................81
Parking Lamps.......................................................81
Powertrain Fault....................................................81
Service Engine Soon............................................81
Stability Control....................................................82
Stability Control Off............................................82
Trunk Ajar................................................................82
Washer Fluid Check....................................248
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................255
See: Wipers and Washers.................................65
Waxing.............................................................256
Wheels and Tires.........................................262
Technical Specifications.................................284
Windows and Mirrors....................................72
Windshield Washers.....................................66
Windshield Wipers........................................65
Intermittent Wipe................................................65
Speed Dependent Wipers................................65
Wipers and Washers.....................................65
446
Index
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:

Navigation menu